HP | 3PAR | User's Manual | HP 3PAR User's Manual

3PAR InForm Management
Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Part No. 320-200231 Rev A
July 2010
For Printed Material
Copyright © 2010, 3PAR, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording
or otherwise, without the prior written consent of 3PAR, Inc., 4209 Technology Drive, Fremont, CA 94538.
For Electronic Material
The user may print one copy for personal use. Production of multiple copies or copies for sale is strictly
prohibited.
Trademarks
3PAR, the 3PAR logo, InServ, InForm, and InSpire are trademarks or registered trademarks of 3PAR, Inc. All
other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Changes
The material in this document is for information only and is subject to change without notice. While
reasonable efforts have been made in the preparation of this document to assure its accuracy, 3PAR, Inc.
assumes no liability resulting from errors or omissions in this document or from the use of the information
contained herein.
3PAR reserves the right to make changes in the product design without reservation and without notification to
its users.
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Welcome .......................................................................................................... 19
About Units of Measure ...................................................................................... 19
Related Documentation ...................................................................................... 19
Working with the Interface ......................................................................... 20
Components of the Interface .............................................................................. 21
Main Menu Bar.................................................................................................. 22
Main Toolbar .................................................................................................... 25
Management Tree ............................................................................................. 26
Management Tree Structure ........................................................................ 26
Common Actions Panel ...................................................................................... 27
Manager Pane .................................................................................................. 28
System Manager ....................................................................................... 29
Host Manager............................................................................................ 30
Provisioning Manager ................................................................................. 31
Layout Grid Manager .................................................................................. 32
Remote Copy Manager ............................................................................... 32
Performance Manager ................................................................................ 33
Event Manager .......................................................................................... 34
Task Manager ........................................................................................... 34
Security Manager....................................................................................... 35
Hardware Inventory Manager ...................................................................... 35
Management Window ........................................................................................ 36
Alert/Task/Connection Pane ................................................................................ 37
Status Bar ....................................................................................................... 37
About Introduction Tabs ..................................................................................... 38
Removing the Introduction Tab .................................................................... 38
Restoring the Introduction Tab .................................................................... 38
Selecting Multiple Items ..................................................................................... 39
Refreshing the InForm Management Console......................................................... 40
Exporting Data ................................................................................................. 40
Filtering ........................................................................................................... 41
Using the Complex Filter ............................................................................. 41
Adding and Applying New Criteria ......................................................... 42
320-200231 Rev A
iii
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Removing Criteria .............................................................................. 42
Grouping and Ungrouping Criteria ......................................................... 42
Negating Criteria ................................................................................ 42
Using the Quick Filter ................................................................................. 42
Setting Preferences ........................................................................................... 43
Setting Global Preferences.................................................................................. 43
Setting the Display Unit .............................................................................. 44
Setting the WWN Format ............................................................................ 44
Setting the Date and Time Format ............................................................... 44
Resetting Per-Table Format Settings to Default Settings .................................. 44
Configuring Interface, Dialog, and Tab Settings.............................................. 45
Setting Advanced Display Options ................................................................ 45
Setting Per Table References .............................................................................. 45
Column Resizing ........................................................................................ 46
Column Ordering ....................................................................................... 46
Column Visibility ........................................................................................ 46
Choosing Columns ..................................................................................... 47
Table View ................................................................................................ 47
Setting Manager Pane Preferences ....................................................................... 48
Minimizing and Maximizing the Manager Pane ................................................ 48
Resizing the Manager Pane ......................................................................... 48
Customizing the Manager Pane Display ................................................................ 49
Showing Fewer Manager Buttons ................................................................. 49
Showing More Manager Buttons ................................................................... 50
Selecting Manager Buttons to Display ........................................................... 51
Adding and Removing Manager Buttons ........................................................ 52
Restoring Defaults ..................................................................................... 53
Understanding Icons.......................................................................................... 53
Alert Severity Indicators .................................................................................... 53
Status Bar Icons ............................................................................................... 54
System and Component Status Icons ................................................................... 55
Using Help ....................................................................................................... 56
Using the Help Menu Bar .................................................................................... 57
Using the Help Toolbar ....................................................................................... 57
Using the Help Navigator.................................................................................... 58
Using the Table of Contents Tree ................................................................. 58
iv
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Searching the Index ................................................................................... 59
Using the Search Function........................................................................... 59
Using the Glossary ..................................................................................... 59
Using the Favorites Tab .............................................................................. 59
Using the Help Topic Window .............................................................................. 60
Navigating the Help Topic Window ............................................................... 60
Viewing Related Topics ............................................................................... 60
Working with the InServ Storage Server ................................................. 62
Creating Users and Domains ............................................................................... 62
Logging In and Connecting to Systems ................................................................. 62
Forwarding Error Log Files .................................................................................. 63
Working with the System Manager ...................................................................... 64
Viewing System Information ............................................................................... 64
Viewing System Summary Information................................................................. 65
Viewing all Connected Systems .................................................................... 65
Viewing a Single System ............................................................................. 67
Viewing System Settings .................................................................................... 70
Viewing System Capacity ................................................................................... 72
Viewing System Software ................................................................................... 76
Viewing System Alerts ....................................................................................... 76
Upper Pane ............................................................................................... 77
Lower Pane ............................................................................................... 78
Managing Alerts ................................................................................................ 80
Locating a System............................................................................................. 80
Editing a System ............................................................................................... 81
Working with Controller Nodes ............................................................................ 82
Viewing Controller Nodes ................................................................................... 83
Viewing the Controller Nodes Summary Screen ..................................................... 84
Viewing Controller Node Alerts ............................................................................ 85
Viewing Controller Nodes Details ......................................................................... 86
Viewing Controller Node Ports Details................................................................... 88
Viewing Controller Node Power Supplies Details ..................................................... 89
Viewing Controller Node Batteries Details ............................................................. 91
Viewing Controller Node Alerts Details .................................................................. 92
Editing Controller Node Power Supplies ................................................................ 93
320-200231 Rev A
v
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Editing Controller Node Batteries ......................................................................... 94
Viewing the Controller Node Battery Test Log ........................................................ 94
Resetting the Controller Node Battery Test Log...................................................... 95
Recharging Controller Node Batteries ................................................................... 95
Working with Drive Cages .................................................................................. 96
Viewing Drive Cages .......................................................................................... 96
Viewing the Drive Cage Summary........................................................................ 97
Viewing Drive Cage Connectivity .................................................................. 98
Viewing Drive Cage Capacity ....................................................................... 99
Viewing Drive Cage Power Supplies .................................................................... 101
Viewing Drive Cage SFPs ................................................................................... 102
Viewing Drive Cage Alerts ................................................................................. 105
Viewing Drive Cage Details ................................................................................ 106
Viewing the Drive Cage Details Summary Tab ...................................................... 106
Viewing the Drive Cage Interface Card Details ...................................................... 110
Viewing the Drive Cage Magazine Details ............................................................. 113
Viewing Drive Cage Physical Disks Details ............................................................ 114
Viewing Drive Cage Power Supply Details ............................................................ 115
Editing Drive Cages .......................................................................................... 116
Locating Drive Cages ........................................................................................ 117
Editing Drive Cage Power Supplies ...................................................................... 117
Working with Ports ........................................................................................... 118
Viewing System Ports ....................................................................................... 118
Viewing Port Summary Information .................................................................... 119
Upper Pane .............................................................................................. 120
Lower Pane .............................................................................................. 120
Port Details Summary ........................................................................ 121
Physical Disks ................................................................................... 125
SFP ................................................................................................. 126
Sessions .......................................................................................... 128
Hosts............................................................................................... 129
Viewing System Fibre Channel Ports ................................................................... 130
Upper Pane .............................................................................................. 131
Lower Pane .............................................................................................. 133
Fibre Channel Summary ..................................................................... 133
Physical Disks ................................................................................... 136
vi
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
SFP ................................................................................................. 137
Hosts............................................................................................... 139
Viewing System RCFC Ports ............................................................................... 139
Upper Pane .............................................................................................. 140
Lower Pane .............................................................................................. 141
RCFC Port Summary .......................................................................... 141
SFP ................................................................................................. 144
Viewing System iSCSI Ports............................................................................... 146
Upper Pane .............................................................................................. 147
Lower Pane .............................................................................................. 147
iSCSI Port Summary .......................................................................... 148
Sessions .......................................................................................... 150
Hosts............................................................................................... 150
Viewing System RCIP Ports................................................................................ 150
Viewing SFP Information ................................................................................... 153
Viewing System Port Alerts ................................................................................ 157
Configuring Ports ............................................................................................. 159
Configuring Fibre Channel Ports ......................................................................... 160
Configuring iSCSI Ports ..................................................................................... 160
Configuring a Remote Copy over Fibre Channel Port .............................................. 162
Configuring a Remote Copy over IP Port .............................................................. 163
Clearing Port Parameters .................................................................................. 164
Resetting a Port ............................................................................................... 164
Setting a Port Offline ........................................................................................ 165
Initializing a Port.............................................................................................. 165
Synchronizing a Port with the Name Server ......................................................... 166
Issuing an LIP Command .................................................................................. 166
Enabling a Remote Copy Interface ...................................................................... 167
Disabling a Remote Copy Interface ..................................................................... 167
Pinging a Port .................................................................................................. 168
Viewing Physical Disks ...................................................................................... 168
Viewing the Physical Disks Summary Tab ............................................................ 169
Viewing the Physical Disks Tab ........................................................................... 171
Displaying Summary Information ................................................................ 172
Displaying Capacity Information.................................................................. 173
Displaying Chunklet Usage Information ........................................................ 174
320-200231 Rev A
vii
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Displaying Inventory Information ................................................................ 176
Displaying Environmental Information ......................................................... 177
Displaying State Information ...................................................................... 178
Displaying Paths Information ...................................................................... 179
Viewing the Physical Disks Spares Tab ................................................................ 181
Viewing the Physical Disks Alerts Tab .................................................................. 182
Viewing System Fans ........................................................................................ 183
Working with the Host Manager ............................................................... 184
Viewing Hosts .................................................................................................. 184
Overview of All Hosts ........................................................................................ 185
Overview of a System's Hosts ............................................................................ 186
Viewing Host Information .................................................................................. 188
Upper Pane .............................................................................................. 189
Hosts Tab......................................................................................... 190
Host Explorer Tab.............................................................................. 192
Lower Pane .............................................................................................. 193
Host Summary Details ....................................................................... 193
VLUN Details .................................................................................... 195
Host Explorer Details ......................................................................... 199
Viewing Paths .................................................................................................. 200
Upper Pane .............................................................................................. 201
Lower Pane .............................................................................................. 202
Active VLUNs .................................................................................... 202
VLUN Templates................................................................................ 203
Path Summary .................................................................................. 204
Viewing Unassigned Paths ................................................................................. 205
Viewing Host Sets ............................................................................................ 207
Viewing Host Set Details ................................................................................... 208
Working with Hosts .......................................................................................... 210
Creating Hosts ................................................................................................. 210
Editing Hosts ................................................................................................... 212
Removing Hosts ............................................................................................... 214
Adding Hosts to Host Sets ................................................................................. 215
Exporting Virtual Volumes ................................................................................. 215
Working with Host Sets ..................................................................................... 217
viii
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Creating Host Sets ........................................................................................... 217
Editing Host Sets ............................................................................................. 218
Removing Host Sets ......................................................................................... 219
Exporting Virtual Volumes ................................................................................. 220
Working with the Provisioning Manager ................................................. 221
Viewing Provisioning for All Systems ................................................................... 222
Summary Tab .......................................................................................... 223
Alerts Tab ................................................................................................ 224
Viewing Provisioning for a Single System ............................................................. 224
Summary Tab .......................................................................................... 225
Tasks Tab ................................................................................................ 227
Upper Pane .............................................................................................. 227
Lower Pane .............................................................................................. 228
Alerts Tab ................................................................................................ 229
Working with Common Provisioning Groups ......................................................... 229
Viewing Common Provisioning Groups ................................................................. 230
Viewing the Common Provisioning Group Summary Tab ........................................ 230
Viewing the CPGs Tab ....................................................................................... 232
Upper Pane .............................................................................................. 232
Displaying Summary Information ....................................................................... 232
Displaying Allocation Information ....................................................................... 234
Displaying Capacity Information ........................................................................ 235
Displaying Raw Capacity Information.................................................................. 236
Displaying Alert Information .............................................................................. 237
Lower Pane .............................................................................................. 238
Summary Tab .......................................................................................... 238
Settings Tab ............................................................................................ 240
Virtual Volumes Tab .................................................................................. 241
Logical Disks Tab ...................................................................................... 243
Layout Tab .............................................................................................. 244
Alerts Tab ................................................................................................ 244
Viewing the Common Provisioning Group Layout Tab............................................. 245
Viewing the Common Provisioning Group Alerts Tab .............................................. 245
Creating Common Provisioning Groups ................................................................ 246
Editing a Common Provisioning Group ................................................................. 247
320-200231 Rev A
ix
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Creating Similar Common Provisioning Groups ..................................................... 249
Saving a Common Provisioning Group as a Template............................................. 249
Compacting a Common Provisioning Group .......................................................... 250
Removing a Common Provisioning Group............................................................. 250
Working with Virtual Volumes ............................................................................ 251
Viewing Virtual Volumes .................................................................................... 251
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Summary Tab .......................................................... 252
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab ........................................................................ 254
Upper Pane .............................................................................................. 255
Displaying Summary Information ....................................................................... 255
Displaying Allocation Information ....................................................................... 256
Displaying Capacity Information ........................................................................ 257
Displaying Raw Capacity Information.................................................................. 259
Displaying History Information .......................................................................... 260
Displaying Remote Copy Information .................................................................. 261
Lower Pane .............................................................................................. 262
Summary Tab .......................................................................................... 262
Settings Tab ............................................................................................ 264
Advanced Tab .......................................................................................... 266
Logical Disks Tab ...................................................................................... 267
SCSI Reservations Tab .............................................................................. 268
VLUNs Tab ............................................................................................... 270
Layout Tab .............................................................................................. 273
Alerts Tab ................................................................................................ 273
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Layout Tab .............................................................. 274
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Alerts Tab ............................................................... 274
Creating Virtual Volumes ................................................................................... 275
Creating Virtual Volumes (Fully Provisioned from Physical Disks)............................. 277
Editing Virtual Volumes ..................................................................................... 279
Editing Virtual Volumes (Fully Provisioned from Physical Disks) ............................... 281
Creating Similar Virtual Volumes ........................................................................ 283
Saving a Virtual Volume as a Template ............................................................... 283
Exporting Virtual Volumes ................................................................................. 284
Creating a Remote Copy Group from Virtual Volumes ............................................ 285
Adding a Virtual Volume to a Remote Copy Group ................................................. 286
Moving a Virtual Volume to Another Domain ........................................................ 287
x
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Removing Virtual Volumes ................................................................................. 287
Tuning Virtual Volumes ..................................................................................... 288
Restarting Tuning a Virtual Volume ..................................................................... 289
Rolling Back a Tuned Virtual Volume ................................................................... 289
Working with Virtual Volume Sets ....................................................................... 290
Viewing Virtual Volume Sets .............................................................................. 290
Viewing a Single Virtual Volume Set ............................................................ 291
Creating Virtual Volume Sets ............................................................................. 292
Editing a Virtual Volume Set .............................................................................. 293
Adding a Virtual Volume to a Virtual Volume Set ................................................... 294
Exporting Virtual Volume Sets ............................................................................ 294
Removing a Virtual Volume Set .......................................................................... 295
Working with VLUNs ......................................................................................... 295
Viewing VLUNs ................................................................................................ 296
Active VLUNs Tab ..................................................................................... 296
Displaying Summary Information ....................................................................... 296
Displaying Remote Copy Information .................................................................. 297
VLUN Templates Tab ................................................................................. 298
Upper Pane .............................................................................................. 299
Lower Pane .............................................................................................. 299
Path Summary Tab ................................................................................... 300
Creating VLUNs................................................................................................ 301
Removing VLUNs ............................................................................................. 302
Working with Templates .................................................................................... 302
Viewing Templates ........................................................................................... 303
Upper Pane .............................................................................................. 304
Lower Pane .............................................................................................. 305
Creating Virtual Volume Templates (Thinly Provisioned) ......................................... 305
Editing a Virtual Volume Template (Thinly Provisioned) .......................................... 308
Creating a Virtual Volume Template (Fully Provisioned from Physical Disks) .............. 310
Editing a Virtual Volume Template (Fully Provisioned from Physical Disks) ................ 313
Creating Common Provisioning Group Templates .................................................. 317
Editing a Common Provisioning Group Template ................................................... 320
Copying a Template.......................................................................................... 323
Creating Similar Templates ................................................................................ 323
Removing a Template ....................................................................................... 324
320-200231 Rev A
xi
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Working with Virtual Copies ............................................................................... 324
Viewing Virtual Copies ...................................................................................... 325
Creating a Virtual Copy ..................................................................................... 325
Editing a Virtual Copy ....................................................................................... 326
Removing a Virtual Copy ................................................................................... 327
Creating a Consistency Group Virtual Copy .......................................................... 327
Creating a Batch Virtual Copy ............................................................................ 328
Promoting a Virtual Copy .................................................................................. 329
Working with Physical Copies ............................................................................. 329
Viewing Physical Copies .................................................................................... 330
Creating a Physical Copy ................................................................................... 330
Editing a Physical Copy ..................................................................................... 331
Removing a Physical Copy ................................................................................. 332
Creating a Consistency Group Physical Copy ........................................................ 332
Stopping a Physical Copy .................................................................................. 333
Resynchronizing a Physical Copy ........................................................................ 333
Promoting a Physical Copy ................................................................................ 334
Working with the Layout Grid Manager .................................................. 335
Viewing Layout Information for All InServs .......................................................... 336
Viewing the Layout Grid for a Single System ........................................................ 337
Viewing the Virtual Volume Layout Grid ....................................................... 337
Viewing the CPG Layout Grid ...................................................................... 338
Viewing the Logical Disk Layout Grid ........................................................... 338
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Layout Screen .......................................................... 339
Viewing the CPGs Layout Screen ........................................................................ 340
Viewing the Logical Disks Layout Screen.............................................................. 341
Viewing the By Logical Disk Screen ..................................................................... 342
Navigation Tree ........................................................................................ 343
Summary Pane......................................................................................... 343
Logical Disk Layout Pane ........................................................................... 344
Working with the Remote Copy Manager ............................................... 345
Viewing Remote Copy Information ...................................................................... 345
Viewing Available Remote Copy Systems ............................................................. 346
Viewing Remote Copy System Ports .................................................................... 347
RC Ports Tab ............................................................................................ 347
xii
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
RCIP Tab ................................................................................................. 349
RCFC Tab ................................................................................................ 351
Inventory Tab .......................................................................................... 354
Viewing Configured Remote Copy Systems .......................................................... 355
Summary Tab .......................................................................................... 356
Remote Copy Link Performance Chart ................................................................. 356
Tasks Tab ................................................................................................ 357
Alerts Tab ................................................................................................ 357
Viewing Remote Copy Groups ............................................................................ 358
Viewing Remote Copy Virtual Volumes ................................................................ 359
Viewing Remote Copy Links ............................................................................... 359
Viewing Remote Copy Targets ............................................................................ 360
Configuring Remote Copy .................................................................................. 361
Configuring Remote Copy Ports .......................................................................... 362
Configuring 1-to-1 Remote Copy ........................................................................ 363
Configuring 1-to-N Remote Copy ........................................................................ 366
Configuring N-to-1 Remote Copy ........................................................................ 369
Configuring Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy ........................................... 372
Pinging RCIP Links ........................................................................................... 375
Configuring and Pinging the Remote Copy Links ............................................ 375
Pinging the Remote Copy Links ................................................................... 376
Working with Remote Copy Groups ..................................................................... 376
Creating Remote Copy Groups ........................................................................... 376
Starting Remote Copy Groups ............................................................................ 378
Stopping Remote Copy Groups ........................................................................... 378
Synching Remote Copy Groups .......................................................................... 379
Editing Remote Copy Groups ............................................................................. 379
Removing Remote Copy Groups ......................................................................... 381
Working with Remote Copy Links ....................................................................... 381
Creating Remote Copy Links .............................................................................. 382
Removing Remote Copy Links ............................................................................ 382
Pinging RCIP Links ........................................................................................... 383
Configuring and Pinging the Remote Copy Links ............................................ 383
Pinging the Remote Copy Links ................................................................... 383
Working with Remote Copy Targets .................................................................... 384
Creating Remote Copy Targets ........................................................................... 384
320-200231 Rev A
xiii
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Editing Remote Copy Targets ............................................................................. 386
Removing Remote Copy Targets ......................................................................... 386
Remote Copy Disaster Recovery ......................................................................... 387
Failover Remote Copy Groups ............................................................................ 387
Switch Failover Remote Copy Groups .................................................................. 388
Revert Remote Copy Groups .............................................................................. 389
Recover Remote Copy Groups ............................................................................ 390
Restore Remote Copy Groups ............................................................................ 391
Working with the Performance Manager ................................................ 392
Viewing Performance ........................................................................................ 392
Viewing Performance Over Time ................................................................. 393
Viewing Instantaneous Statistics ................................................................. 394
Creating a New Chart ....................................................................................... 395
Saving a Chart................................................................................................. 396
Editing a Chart ................................................................................................ 397
Working with the Event Manager ............................................................. 398
Viewing the Alerts Summary .............................................................................. 398
Viewing System Alerts ...................................................................................... 400
Upper Pane .............................................................................................. 401
Lower Pane .............................................................................................. 401
Removing System Alerts ................................................................................... 403
Viewing System Events ..................................................................................... 403
Filtering Events ........................................................................................ 404
Working with the Task Manager ......................................................................... 405
Viewing the Tasks Summary .............................................................................. 405
Displaying Tasks .............................................................................................. 406
Removing Tasks............................................................................................... 408
Cancelling Tasks .............................................................................................. 408
Working with the Security Manager......................................................... 409
Viewing the Security System Summary Screen ..................................................... 409
Working with Users .......................................................................................... 412
Viewing Users .................................................................................................. 412
Creating Users ................................................................................................. 414
Editing Users ................................................................................................... 415
Removing Users ............................................................................................... 417
xiv
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Working with Domains ...................................................................................... 417
Viewing Domains ............................................................................................. 418
Viewing Domains for All InServs ................................................................. 418
Viewing Domains for a Single Server ........................................................... 419
Viewing the Domains Summary Tab .................................................................... 419
Viewing the Domains Tab .................................................................................. 422
Summary Information ............................................................................... 422
Capacity Information ................................................................................. 424
Creating Domains ............................................................................................ 425
Editing Domains............................................................................................... 426
Removing Domains .......................................................................................... 427
Viewing Domain Sets ........................................................................................ 428
Creating Domain Sets ....................................................................................... 429
Editing Domain Sets ......................................................................................... 430
Removing Domain Sets ..................................................................................... 431
Moving Objects from One Domain to Another Domain ........................................... 432
Working with Connections ................................................................................. 433
Viewing User Connections ................................................................................. 433
Removing User Connections .............................................................................. 434
Working with the Hardware Inventory Manager .................................. 435
Viewing the Hardware Inventory Summary Tab .................................................... 436
Viewing the Node Subsystems Tab ..................................................................... 437
Viewing the Node Subsystems Controller Nodes Tab.............................................. 438
Viewing the Node Subsystems CPUs Tab ............................................................. 440
Viewing the Node Subsystems Internal Drives Tab ................................................ 441
Viewing the Node Subsystems Physical Memory Tab ............................................. 443
Viewing the Node Subsystems Adapter Cards Tab ................................................. 444
Viewing the Node Subsystems SFPs Tab .............................................................. 446
Viewing the Node Subsystems Power Supplies Tab................................................ 447
Viewing the Node Subsystems Batteries Tab ........................................................ 449
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Tab...................................................................... 450
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Drive Cages Tab .................................................... 451
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Interface Cards Tab ............................................... 452
Viewing the Cage Subsystems SFPs Tab .............................................................. 454
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Magazines Tab ...................................................... 455
320-200231 Rev A
xv
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Physical Disks Tab ................................................. 457
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Power Supplies Tab ................................................ 459
Viewing the All Tab........................................................................................... 460
Glossary .......................................................................................................... 463
Index ............................................................................................................... 471
xvi
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
320-200231 Rev A
xvii
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Welcome
Welcome to the 3PAR InForm® Management Console Online Help!
The topics in this Help system contain information about managing 3PAR InServ® Storage
Servers via the InForm Management Console.
The InForm Management Console enables secure configuration and monitoring capabilities
while providing simultaneous access to multiple storage servers.
The InForm Management Console and the topics in this Help system are for use by system
and storage administrators who monitor and direct system configurations and resource
allocation for InServ storage systems.
3PAR technical documents can be found by logging into 3PAR Central's Document Control
System from 3PAR's Support page, at http://support.3PAR.com.
Contact your local service provider for technical support and services at:
http://www.3PAR.com/services.html.
About Units of Measure
All units of storage (capacity) are calculated base 2 (x 1,024).
1 KIB = 1,024 bytes
1 MiB = 220 bytes = 1,024 bytes = 1,048,576 bytes
1 GiB = 230 bytes = 1,024 MiB = 1,073,741,824 bytes
1 TiB = 240 bytes = 1,024 GiB = 1,099,511,627,776 bytes
All units of performance (speed) are calculated base 10 (x1000).
1 KB = 1000 bytes
1 MB = 106 bytes = 1000 KIB = 1,000,000 bytes
1 GB = 109 bytes = 1000 MB = 1,000,000,000 bytes
1 TB = 1012 bytes = 1000 GB = 1,000,000,000,000 bytes
Related Documentation
In addition to the topics in this Help system, the following documents also provide
information related to administering InServ Storage Servers:
For information about...
Read the...
Installing, starting, and using the
InForm Command Line Interface (CLI)
3PAR InForm OS CLI Administrator's
Guide
Using 3PAR Remote Copy software
3PAR Remote Copy User's Guide
Using the InForm Command Line
Interface (CLI)
3PAR InForm OS Command Line
Interface Reference
S-Class and T-Class Storage Server
3PAR InServ S-Class/T-Class Storage
320-200231 Rev A
19
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
hardware configurations, component
numbering and layout, and system
cabling
Server Physical Planning Manual
E-Class and F-Class Storage Server
hardware configurations, component
numbering and layout, and system
cabling
InServ E-Class/F-Class Storage Server
and Third-Party Rack Physical Planning
Manual
Identifying storage server components
and fixing problems
InForm OS Messages and Operator's
Guide
Working with the Interface
This topic outlines how to use the InForm Management Console and provides an overview of
the major tasks you can perform.
The InForm Management Console interface contains a menu bar, toolbar, management tree,
common actions panel, manager pane, management window, alert/task/connection pane,
and status bar. See Components of the Interface for further information.
When starting the InForm Management Console and logging into an InServ Storage Server,
or multiple storage servers, the interface appears displaying the Systems overview screen,
as well as the management tree and alert pane. The status bar is located at the bottom of
the interface.
Topics discussed here include:
Components of the Interface
About Introduction Tabs
Selecting Multiple Items
Refreshing the InForm Management Console
Exporting Data
Filtering
Setting Preferences
Understanding Icons
Using Help
20
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Components of the Interface
The InForm Management Console is made up of the following components:
Main Menu Bar
Main Toolbar
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
Manager Pane
Management Window
Alert/Task/Connection Pane
Status Bar
320-200231 Rev A
21
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Main Menu Bar
The following items are available from the Main Menu Bar:
Menu
Command
Description
File
Connect
Displays the Connect dialog box, allowing you
to connect additional storage server(s).
Disconnect
Displays the Disconnect dialog box, allowing
you to disconnect from storage server(s).
Exit
Closes all windows and exits the InForm GUI.
Refresh
Refreshes the InForm Management Console.
Auto-Refresh
Automatically refreshes the InForm Management
Console. By default, Auto-Refresh is selected.
Maximize
Expands the Application Window so it consumes
the entire InForm Management Console window.
Export Data
Displays the Export Data window, allowing you
to save table data as CSV or HTML format.
Grid
Displays a submenu for setting the Zoom,
<Set|Clear> Grid Sticky, <Show|Hide>
Details Table.
Preferences
Opens the Preferences window, allowing you to
define Data Format and Look and Feel options
for determining how data is displayed. See
Setting Preferences.
View
22
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Actions
Systems
Hosts
Window
Displays a submenu providing access to system
level options.
Displays a submenu providing access to host
creation, edit, and removal functions.
Provisioning
Displays a submenu providing access to all
aspects for provisioning storage, including VVs,
VLUNs, CPGs, LDs, and Templates.
Remote Copy
Displays a submenu providing access to set up
and edit Remote Copy configurations.
Alert
Displays a submenu for working with the
selected alert. See Managing Events and Alerts.
Performance
Displays a submenu providing options to
performance charting, including new, open,
save, and edit functions.
Task
Displays a submenu allowing you to cancel and
remove tasks.
Security
Displays a submenu providing access for working
with users and domains.
Cascade
Arranges Application Windows so they overlap
one another, but every window is visible within
the desktop.
Tile
Arranges and resizes all Application Windows to
fit inside the desktop.
Tile
Horizontally
Tiles all Application Windows horizontally in the
desktop.
Tile Vertically
Tiles all Application Windows vertically in the
desktop.
320-200231 Rev A
23
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Help
24
Close All
Closes all open Application Windows.
Restore
Restores the selected Application Window from
the TasKiBar to the desktop.
Minimize
Minimizes the selected Application Window.
Maximize
Maximizes the selected Application Window.
1...<List of
Open
Windows>
Restores the selected Application from the
TasKiBar to the Desktop.
Topics
Opens the Help Navigator and the Help Topic
Window, providing access to the InForm
Management Console Online Help system.
About 3PAR
InForm
Management
Console
Displays the About 3PAR InForm
Management Console dialog box, which
contains version number, software patch, and
copyright information.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Main Toolbar
The Main Toolbar is displayed as follows:
The following default items are available from the Main Toolbar:
Command
Description
Connect
Displays the Connect dialog box, allowing you to connect additional
storage server(s).
Refresh
Refreshes the InForm Management Console.
Maximize
Expands the Management Window so it consumes the entire InForm
Management Console window.
Restore
Restores the Management Window to its original size.
Home
Returns all panes, the Management Tree, and Management Window
to the default view (Systems Introduction).
Back/Forward
Export
Returns backward or forward to the previously selected Manager
Pane, Management Tree item, and Management Window display.
Displays the Export Data window, allowing you to save table data as
CSV or HTML format.
Additional actions are displayed on the Main Toolbar depending on the selected manager,
node selected from the Management Tree, and item selected from the Management
Window.
See also:
Management Tree
Manager Pane
Management Window
Working with the Systems Manager
Working with the Hosts Manager
320-200231 Rev A
25
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Working with the Provisioning Manager
Working with the Layout Grid Manager
Working with the Remote Copy Manager
Working with the Performance Manager
Working with the Events Manager
Working with the Tasks Manager
Working with the Security Manager
Working with the Hardware Inventory Manager
Management Tree
The Management Tree displays information relevant to the selected manager from the
Manager Pane. At its most basic, the Management Tree displays which storage servers are
connected to the InForm Management Console. Additional icons displayed on the
Management Tree are specific to the manager selected. For example, in the figure below the
Management Tree displays icons specific to the Systems manager. The Management Tree
also has shortcut menus that contain useful commands.
Management Tree Structure
When you click an icon on the Management Tree, the associated data is displayed in the
Management Window. For example, if you click the Ports icon, information about a
system's ports is displayed.
Each icon displayed with an expandable triangle ( ) to its left is called a node. An
expandable triangle also indicates that that node can be expanded to display additional
information. The Management Tree nodes are displayed in a parent/child relationship. For
example, in the figure below the connected storage servers (s183 and S424) are displayed
as child nodes of the InServs parent node. Ports and Physical Disks are further displayed
as child nodes of the connected servers.
Also included for quick visual reference, Normal , Degraded , or Failed status icons
are displayed in the tree to quickly identify systems or related system components that may
require attention.
26
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
System and Component Status Icons
Common Actions Panel
The Common Actions Panel provides quick access to functions commonly performed with
each manager in the Manager Pane. Clicking an action listed in the Common Action Panel
launches that action's wizard. As with the Management Tree, the functions provided in the
Common Actions Panel are specific to the selected manager from the Management Pane.
Unavailable functions are displayed in grey. For example, in the figure below the actions
displayed in the Common Actions panel are specific to the Systems manager selected in the
Manager Pane.
320-200231 Rev A
27
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Manager Pane
Managers are groups of displays and actions, which are specific to different InServ Storage
Server areas of management. The selected manager affects the Management Tree display,
data displayed in the Management Window, and, if applicable, the actions in the Common
Actions Panel.
The following managers are contained in the Manager Pane:
System Manager
Host Manager
Provisioning Manager
Layout Grid Manager
Remote Copy Manager
Performance Manager
Event Manager
Task Manager
28
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Security Manager
Hardware Inventory Manager
For instructions on modifying the display of the Manager Pane, see Setting Manager Pane
Preferences and Customizing the Manager Pane Display.
System Manager
The System Manager allows you to view and perform system-level actions and
information. When the System Manager is selected, the Management Tree and Common
Actions Panel appear as follows:
See also:
Working with the System Manager
320-200231 Rev A
29
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Host Manager
The Host Manager allows you to view and perform host-specific actions and information.
When the Host Manager is selected, the Management Tree and Common Actions Panel
appear as follows:
See also:
Working with the Host Manager
30
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Provisioning Manager
The Provisioning Manager allows you to view and perform system provisioning actions
and information. When the Provisioning Manager is selected, the Management Tree and
Common Actions Panel appear as follows:
See also:
Working with the Provisioning Manager
320-200231 Rev A
31
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Layout Grid Manager
The Layout Grid Manager allows you to view the layout of virtual volumes, Common
Provisioning Groups (CPGs), and logical disks of InServ Storage Servers. When the Layout
Grid Manager is selected, the Management Tree appears as follows:
See also:
Working with the Layout Grid Manager
Remote Copy Manager
The Remote Copy Manager allows you to view and perform Remote Copy actions and
information. When the Remote Copy Manager is selected, the Management Tree and
Common Actions Panel appear as follows:
See also:
Working with the Remote Copy Manager
32
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Performance Manager
The Performance Manager allows you to view system performance information and work
with performance charts. When the Performance Manager is selected, the Management
Tree and Common Actions Panel appear as follows:
See also:
Working with the Performance Manager
320-200231 Rev A
33
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Event Manager
The Event Manager allows you to view InServ Storage Servers alerts and events. When
the Event Manager is selected, the Management Tree appears as follows:
See also:
Working with the Events Manager
Task Manager
The Task Manager allows you to view and perform system task actions and information.
When the Task Manager is selected, the Management Tree and Common Actions Panel
appear as follows:
See also:
Working with the Tasks Manager
34
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Security Manager
The Security Manager allows you to view and work with system users, domains, and
connections. When the Security Manager is selected, the Management Tree and Common
Actions Panel appear as follows:
See also:
Working with the Security Manager
Hardware Inventory Manager
The Hardware Inventory Manager allows you to view InServ Storage Servers hardware
components. When the Hardware Inventory Manager is selected, the Management Tree
appears as follows:
See also:
Working with the Hardware Inventory Manager
320-200231 Rev A
35
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Management Window
The Management Window displays data, as well as additional options for viewing data. The
data displayed in the Management Window is dependent on the selected manager from the
Manager Pane and the selected node from the Management Tree.
Also included for quick visual reference, Normal , Degraded , or Failed status icons
are displayed in the tree to quickly identify systems or related system components that may
require attention.
In the example below, the Management Window displays system summary data for the
selected node, s183.
See also:
Management Tree
Manager Pane
System and Component Status Icons
36
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Alert/Task/Connection Pane
The Alert/Task/Connection pane is provided for quick reference to new system alerts, recent
tasks, and user connections. Each set of information is displayed on its own tab within the
pane.
See also:
Alert Severity Indicators
Viewing System Alerts
Working with the Tasks Manager
Viewing User Connections
Managing Alerts
Status Bar
The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the InForm Management Console.
The left side of the Status Bar displays the last action performed with the InForm
Management Console.
The right side of the Status Bar displays icons representing the highest alert level,
connection status, and data retrieval process status.
The right side of the Status bar also displays an icon for any runtime exceptions. The icon
can be clicked to view details about the exception.
320-200231 Rev A
37
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Alert Severity Indicators
Status Bar Icons
About Introduction Tabs
Managers are groups of displays and actions, which are specific to different InServ Storage
Server areas of management. The selected manager affects the Management Tree display,
data displayed in the Management Window, and, if applicable, the actions in the Common
Actions Panel. Each manager is provided with an Introduction tab in the Management
Window. Each Introduction tab contains topical overview information about the selected
manager. For example, when selecting the Remote Copy Manager, the Introduction tab
provides overview information about 3PAR Remote Copy and about tasks that can be
performed in the Remote Copy Manager. The left side of the Introduction tabs provide
links to help topics relevant to the selected manager.
Removing the Introduction Tab
A manager's Introduction tab can be closed at any time by clicking Close Tab in the
upper right corner of the tab.
If you wish to hide all Introduction tabs in the managers:
1. Access the Preferences dialog box from the Main Menu Bar by clicking View >
Preferences.
2. Click the Settings tab.
3. In the Introduction Tabs group box, click Remove All Tabs.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click OK to exit the Preferences dialog box.
Note: Once an Introduction tab is closed or hidden, it will not appear again
until you manually restore the tab via Preferences.
Restoring the Introduction Tab
If you wish to restore closed or hidden Introduction tabs:
1. Access the Preferences dialog box from the Main Menu Bar by clicking View >
Preferences.
2. Click the Settings tab.
3. In the Introduction Tabs group box, click Restore All Tabs.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click OK to exit the Preferences dialog box.
38
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Management Tree
Manager Pane
Setting Global Preferences
Selecting Multiple Items
The InForm Management Console supports the standard Shift+click functionality to select
a contiguous block of items, and the standard Ctrl+click functionality to select several noncontiguous items. These functions can be used in most of the managers listed in the
Manager Pane to facilitate actions.
For example, when creating a virtual volume set, you can use specific virtual volumes to
form the set by either using the Shift+click or Ctrl+click function to select a group of
virtual volumes.
See also:
Exporting Data
Filtering
Working with the Systems Manager
Working with the Hosts Manager
Working with the Provisioning Manager
Working with the Layout Grid Manager
Working with the Remote Copy Manager
Working with the Performance Manager
Working with the Events Manager
Working with the Tasks Manager
Working with the Security Manager
320-200231 Rev A
39
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Refreshing the InForm Management
Console
To refresh the data displayed in the Management Window and Alert/Task/Connection
Panel, click Refresh in the Main Toolbar.
See also:
Main Toolbar
Exporting Data
You can export data as a Comma Separated Variable (CSV) or HTML file from all InForm
Management Console displays (except for Performance).
The Export Data dialog can be accessed by performing one of the following:
Clicking View > Export Data.
Clicking Export Data from the Main Toolbar
To export data in a currently displayed table in the Management Window:
1. Access the Export Data dialog.
2. From the Select a format list, select either CSV Format or HTML Format.
3. From the Destination group box, select either Clipboard (default) or File.
4. If more than one row was selected from the table containing the data to be saved, from
the Range group box, select either All (default) or Selection.
40
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
5. Click OK.
6. If you selected File as the save destination, the Save Chart dialog appears. Navigate
and save the file.
Filtering
The InForm Management Console provides a filtering panel, which is located at the top of
most Management Window displays.
The filtering panel provides two filtering options:
Complex Filter
Quick Filter
Using the Complex Filter
The complex filter allows you to define specific criteria by which to search.
Access the complex filter by clicking Filter on the filtering panel.
320-200231 Rev A
41
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: The entries listed under the Property list correspond to the table
headings displayed in the Management Window.
Adding and Applying New Criteria
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select a property from the Property list.
Select an operator from the Operator list.
Select a value from the Value list.
(Optional) Select the Range checKiBox to define a second value to compare against the
first value. This is the same as selecting in range from the Operator list.
5. Click Apply to apply the criteria.
6. To remove listed criteria, click Clear.
7. Continue to add additional criteria as needed. Repeat steps 1 through 5.
Removing Criteria
To remove criteria defined in the Criteria filed, select the criteria and click Remove.
Grouping and Ungrouping Criteria
To group criteria defined in the Criteria field, select two or more criteria and click Group.
To ungroup a criteria group defined in the Criteria field, select the grouped criteria and
click Ungroup.
Negating Criteria
To negate criteria defined in the Criteria field, select the criteria and click Negate.
See also:
Selecting Multiple Items
Using the Quick Filter
The quick filter allows you to define a quick filter based on what filter text is typed in the
top-right text box. The default behavior is to display rows that have rows matching the
input text.
You can choose to have only certain columns matching the input text by clicking the down
arrow, which is located immediately to the left of the simple filter text box.
42
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: The columns displayed in the filter list are dependent on the contents
of the table you are currently viewing, for example ports, physical disks, etc.
Setting Preferences
The InForm Management Console allows you to set global preferences, set preferences for
each table, and set Manager Pane viewing preferences.
Setting Global Preferences
Setting Per Table Preferences
Setting Manager Pane Preferences
Setting Global Preferences
The Preferences dialog box allows you to set global preferences for all systems displayed
on the InForm Management Console. These preferences are saved on the system and
remembered the next time you log in using the InForm Management Console. The
Preferences dialog box contains three tabs; Data Format, Settings, and Advanced.
This topic provides procedures for the following:
Setting the Display Unit
Setting the WWN Format
Setting the Date and Time Format
Resetting Per-Table Format Settings to Default Settings
Configuring Interface, Dialog, and Tab Settings
Setting Advanced Display Options
320-200231 Rev A
43
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Access the Preferences dialog box from the Main Menu Bar by clicking View >
Preferences.
Setting the Display Unit
To set the display unit:
1. Select the Data Format tab on the Preferences dialog box.
2. From the Display Unit group box, select the desired option (GB is the default display
unit).
3. If you do not want to display the selected unit on the table heading row, uncheck the
Display Unit on Header checKiBox.
4. Click Apply to continue modifying preferences, or click OK when finished.
Setting the WWN Format
To set the WWN format:
1. Select the Data Format tab on the Preferences dialog box.
2. From the WWN group box, select the desired WWN format (0F0F0F0F0F0F0F0F is
the default format).
3. Click Apply to continue modifying preferences, or click OK when finished.
Setting the Date and Time Format
To set the date and time format:
1. Select the Data Format tab on the Preferences dialog box.
2. From the Data Time group box, select the desired data and time format (Long
Display is the default format).
3. Click Apply to continue modifying preferences, or click OK when finished.
Resetting Per-Table Format Settings to Default Settings
To set reset per-table format settings to their default settings:
1. Select the Data Format tab on the Preferences dialog box.
2. Select the Reset Per-Table Format Preferences to Default checKiBox.
3. Click OK.
See also:
Setting Per Table Preferences
44
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Configuring Interface, Dialog, and Tab Settings
To configure interface and dialog settings:
1. Select the Settings tab on the Preferences dialog box.
2. Select the user interface elements and dialog boxes you wish to view in the InForm
Management Console Interface by selecting the appropriate checKiBoxes.
3. Select whether to view Introduction tabs by clicking Remove All Tabs or Restore All
Tabs.
4. Click Apply to continue modifying preferences, or click OK when finished.
Setting Advanced Display Options
To set advanced display options:
1. Select the Advanced tab on the Preferences dialog box.
2. Select whether to view the Port State of loss sync as failed.
3. Select whether to view physical disk spares, advanced volume properties, logical disks,
and SCSI reservations by selecting the appropriate checKiBoxes.
4. Click Apply to continue modifying preferences, or click OK when finished.
Setting Per Table References
The InForm Management Console allows you to set per-table preferences. These
preferences are saved on the system and remembered the next time you log in using the
InForm Management Console.
Note: The per-table preferences and changes made by manually dragging
and sorting tables override any preferences specified when Setting Global
Preferences.
This topic provides procedures for the following:
Column Resizing
Column Ordering
Column Visibility
Choosing Columns
Table View
320-200231 Rev A
45
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Column Resizing
To resize a table column:
1. Place your mouse on the right edge of a table heading row.
2. When the resize pointer appears, click and drag the mouse to resize the column.
Column Ordering
To quickly rearrange the order of displayed table columns, click and drag any column to a
different location in the table.
Note: See Setting Global Preferences to learn how to make global changes to
tables and InForm Management Console display properties using the
Preferences dialog box. Changes made by clicking and dragging columns (as
described in this topic) override any preferences set in the Preferences dialog
box.
See also:
Setting Global Preferences
Column Visibility
To hide a column in a table, right-click the table column heading you wish to hide and click
Hide.
Note: The InForm Management Console does not allow hiding of all columns
in a table.
To show a column in a table, right-click any table column heading and click Show >
<column heading>.
46
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Choosing Columns
To show, hide, or reorder multiple table columns at one time:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Right-click any table heading column and click Choose Columns.
To hide columns, select the column from the Show list and click the right arrow button.
To show columns, select the column from the Hide list and click the left arrow button.
To reorder columns, select the column from the Show list and click the up or down
arrow button.
5. Click OK.
See also:
Selecting Multiple Items
Table View
To apply a saved table view, right-click any table heading column and click Table View >
<table view name>.
To save the current table view as it has been edited by the previous procedures:
1. Right-click any table heading column and click Table View > Save As.
2. Enter a name for the table view you wish to save.
3. Click OK.
To remove a saved table view:
1. Right-click any table heading column and click Table View > Remove.
2. Enter the table view you wish to remove.
3. Click OK.
320-200231 Rev A
47
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Setting Manager Pane Preferences
The InForm Management Console allows you to set Manager Pane display preferences.
These preferences are saved on the system and remembered the next time you log in using
the InForm Management Console.
This topic provides procedures for the following:
Minimizing and Maximizing the Manager Pane
Resizing the Manager Pane
Minimizing and Maximizing the Manager Pane
To minimize the Manager Pane, click the down arrow located at the top of the Manager
Pane.
When minimized, each manager in the Manager Pane changes to an icon.
To maximize the Manager Pane, click, the up arrow located at the top of the minimized
Manager Pane.
When maximized, the manager icons are restored to buttons.
The following figures display the Manager Pane maximized (left figure) and minimized (right
figure).
Resizing the Manager Pane
To resize the Manager Pane:
1. Place your mouse on the top edge of the Manager Pane.
2. When the resize pointer appears, click and drag the mouse to resize the column.
48
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: When making the Manager Pane smaller, the Manager buttons located
at the bottom of the pane change to icons. The icons are restored to buttons
when enlarging the Manager Pane.
See also:
Customizing the Manager Pane Display
Manager Pane
Customizing the Manager Pane Display
The InForm Management Console allows you to customize the Manager buttons that appear
in the Management Pane. This allows you to set up the Manager Pane to display only
commonly used Managers. Additionally, it allows you to reduce the amount of space used by
the Manager Pane, which can be useful if you have a large Management Tree.
Showing Fewer Manager Buttons
Showing More Manager Buttons
Selecting Manager Buttons to Display
Adding and Removing Manager Buttons
Restoring Defaults
Showing Fewer Manager Buttons
By default, all Manager buttons are displayed in the Manager Pane. To display fewer
buttons:
1. Click the right arrow button at the bottom of the Manager Pane.
2. Click Show Fewer Buttons.
320-200231 Rev A
49
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The last Manager button in the Manager Pane is minimized and is displayed as an icon
at the bottom of the Manager Pane.
Repeating steps 1 and 2 continues to minimize Manager buttons and display them as
icons at the bottom of the Manager Pane. For example, if the Hardware Manager button
is minimized, the next Manager button to be minimized is the Security Manager button,
followed by the Tasks Manager button, etc.
Note: The minimized Manager is still functional. Click the minimized
Manager's icon to invoke that Manager's functionality.
Showing More Manager Buttons
If you have modified the Manager Pane to display fewer Manger buttons, to show more
Manager buttons:
1. Click the right arrow button at the bottom of the Manager Pane.
2. Click Show More Buttons.
50
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The most recently minimized Manager button is restored to the Manager Pane (the leftmost displayed Manager icon).
Repeating steps 1 and 2 continues to restore Manager buttons in the order in which
they were last minimized from the Manager Pane. For example, if the Tasks Manger
button was restored, the next Manager button to be restored is the Security Manager
button, followed by the Hardware Inventory Manager button.
Selecting Manager Buttons to Display
To select Manager buttons to show and hide in the Manager Pane:
1. Click the right arrow button at the bottom of the Manager Pane.
2. Click Choose Buttons.
3. In the Choose Buttons dialog box, select the Manager buttons to display by clicking
one or more Manager and moving to the Show and Hide lists using the right and left
arrow buttons.
320-200231 Rev A
51
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
4. Select the order in which the Manager buttons in the Show list are displayed by
selecting a Manager and then clicking the up and down arrow buttons to move the
Manager to its display location.
5. Click OK.
The Manager buttons that you chose to display are displayed in the Manager Pane in the
order you specified. The Manager buttons that you chose to hide are not displayed as
buttons or icons in the Manager Pane.
Adding and Removing Manager Buttons
To remove Manager buttons from the Manager Pane:
1. Click the right arrow button at the bottom of the Manager Pane.
2. Click Add or Remove Buttons > uncheck the Manager button you wish to remove.
Note: After removing a Manager button, the Manager Pane automatically
resizes itself to equal the total length of displayed Manager buttons.
To add Manager buttons to the Manager Pane:
1. Click the right arrow button at the bottom of the Manager Pane.
2. Click Add or Remove Buttons > check the Manager button you wish to add.
52
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: When adding a Manager button back to the Manager Pane, you must
manually resize the Manager Pane in order for all Manager buttons to display.
See Resizing the Manager Pane.
Restoring Defaults
To restore the default view of the Manger Pane:
1. Click the right arrow button at the bottom of the Manager Pane.
2. Click Restore Defaults.
See also:
Setting Manager Pane Preferences
Manager Pane
Understanding Icons
The InForm Management Console uses icons for quick visual reference of alerts, system
status, and system components and objects status.
Alert Severity Indicators
Status Bar Icons
System and Component Status Icons
Alert Severity Indicators
The alert pane and status bar use the following icons to indicate alert severity levels. On the
status bar, the alert severity indicator tells you the severity level of the most serious alert
for all systems currently connected to the InForm Management Console.
Icon
Name
Description
Fatal
A fatal event has occurred. It is no longer possible to take
remedial action.
320-200231 Rev A
53
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Critical
The event is critical and requires immediate action.
Major
The event requires immediate action.
Minor
An event has occurred that requires action, but the situation is
not yet serious.
Degraded
An aspect of performance or availability may have become
degraded. You must decide if action is necessary.
Informational
The event is informational. No action is required other than
acknowledging or removing the alert.
See also:
Status Bar Icons
System and Component Status Icons
Alert/Task/Connection Pane
Status Bar
Managing Alerts
Status Bar Icons
The status bar displays an alert severity indicator, as well as information about your
connection status and the progress of system operations.
The following icons are used:
Icon
Name
Description
See Alert
Severity
Indicators
Alert Severity
The status bar displays only the highest severity
level found on connected systems.
Auto-update not
working
Appears when auto-refresh is lost. The InForm
Management Console will not receive any
updated events from the InServ Storage Server.
Connected
Appears if at least one system is connected.
54
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Disconnected
Appears if at least one system is being
disconnected or rebooted.
No connection
Appears when there are no systems connected.
Operation
progress
Animated icon that indicates the progress of an
operation.
Exception
Detected
Appears if a runtime exception has occurred.
See also:
Status Bar
Alert Severity Indicators
System and Component Status Icons
Viewing the Internal Error Log
System and Component Status Icons
The InForm Management Console provides icons for quick reference, which display the
status of connected systems, system hardware, and system objects in the Management
Tree and the Management Window.
Icon
Name
Description
Normal
Indicates that the component or object is in a healthy state and is
operating normally.
Indicates that the component or object is still operational, however
either the performance of the object is degraded or there is a single
point of failure of a dependent component.
Degraded
A degraded component's status is also reflected in the status of
other components where the degraded component is used. This is
further reflected in the status of the system.
For example, if a physical disk loses one path it can still serve data,
but it is marked as degraded because the loss of the other path
would cause it to fail. Because this component is degraded, this
status is reflected in the components (e.g. drive cage, system) that
320-200231 Rev A
55
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
contain that disk.
Failed
Indicates that the component or object is not operational. Like a
degraded status, the failed status is also reflected in components
and objects where the failed component or object is used.
See also:
Alert Severity Indicators
Status Bar Icons
Management Tree
Management Window
Using Help
Access the Help topics by clicking Help > Topics from the Main Menu Bar.
The following Help Menu components are discussed further:
Help Menu Bar
Help Toolbar
Help Navigator
56
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Help Topic Window
Using the Help Menu Bar
The following menus and commands are available from the Help Menu Bar:
Menu
Command
Description
Open
Page
Opens a help page URL or a local help file.
Note: This feature is not used by the InForm Management
Console Help.
Exit
Closes the Help system.
Set Font
Sets the font and size of the Help text.
File
Options
See also:
Using Help
Using the Help Toolbar
Using the Help Navigator
Using the Help Topic Window
Using the Help Toolbar
The following shortcuts are available in the Help Toolbar located at the top of the Help
system window:
Button
Command
Description
Back
Displays the last topic viewed.
320-200231 Rev A
57
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Forward
Displays the last topic viewed prior to clicking the Back
button.
Print Topic
Prints the currently displayed topic.
Print Setup
Sets up the page to be printed.
Add to
Favorites
Adds the displayed topic to the favorites tab in the Help
Navigator.
See also:
Using Help
Using the Help Menu Bar
Using the Help Navigator
Using the Help Topic Window
Using the Help Navigator
The Help Navigator provides the following five tabs:
Table of Contents
Index
Search
Glossary
Favorites
Using the Table of Contents Tree
The Table of Contents tab displays a hierarchical tree that lists all Help system topics. Use
the Table of Contents tab as follows:
Click the Table of Contents tab to see the Help system table of contents.
Double-click any folder icon to see all available topics listed under that subject heading in
the table of contents. Double-clicking a folder icon also displays the first topic for that
book in the Help Topic Window.
Click any bullet icon to see the corresponding topic in the Help Topic Window.
58
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Searching the Index
The Help system index is an alphabetical list of keywords associated with Help system
topics. These keywords are defined and associated with topics by an author. Use the Index
tab as follows:
Click the Index tab to see the Help system index.
Use the scrollbox on the right to scroll through the index contents and then click an entry
to select it, or type the first few letters of a word in the Find box at the top of the index
to jump to a specific entry in the index.
Once you select an index entry, a list of topics appears in the topic list below the index.
Double-click a topic in the topic list to view that topic in Help Topic Window.
Using the Search Function
The Help system search function allows you to search through all Help system contents for a
specific word or words, phrase, or Boolean expression. Use the Search tab as follows:
Click the Search tab to access the Help system search function.
Type a word or words in the Find box and press Enter see a list of topics containing that
word or words.
When you perform a search using the Search tab, results appear in the table below the
search box. Results are ranked according to how well they match your search criteria as
follows:
High
Medium-High
Medium
Low
Click a topic in the results to view that topic in the Help Topic Window.
Using the Glossary
The Glossary tab allows you to view terms and definitions in the Help Navigator Window.
Use the Glossary tab as follows:
Click the Glossary tab to access the Help system glossary.
Type a word or words in the Find box, or choose an item from the list to see the
definition appear in the bottom pane of the Glossary tab.
Using the Favorites Tab
The Favorites tab allows you to view favorite help topics you have added with the Add to
Favorites button on the Main Tool Bar.
To view your favorites, click the Favorites tab and click a saved favorite.
320-200231 Rev A
59
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Using Help
Using the Help Menu Bar
Using the Help Toolbar
Using the Help Topic Window
Using the Help Topic Window
The Help Topic Window displays the contents of the selected Help topic.
Navigating the Help Topic Window
Viewing Related Topics
Navigating the Help Topic Window
Click any Back to the Top
arrow to return to the top of a Help topic.
Use the Back
and Forward
previously viewed topics.
buttons on the Help Toolbar to return to
Use the Previous Topic and Next Topic
arrow buttons embedded at the top
and bottom of each Help topic to navigate back and forward between topics in the Table
of Contents.
See also:
Using the Help Toolbar
Viewing Related Topics
At the bottom of many sections in the Help topics are links to related topics.
The following figure displays the Security Manager section of the Manager Pane topic. The
section's related topics follow the See also: text.
60
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Using Help
Using the Help Menu Bar
Using the Help Toolbar
Using the Help Navigator
320-200231 Rev A
61
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Working with the InServ Storage Server
This section contains the following operations:
Creating Users and Domains
Logging In and Connecting to Systems
Forwarding Error Log Files
Creating Users and Domains
A user account is required to access a 3PAR InServ Storage Server via the InForm
Management Console.
To create a user account, see Creating Users. To create a domain, see Creating Domains.
Note: 3PAR Domains requires a 3PAR Domains license. See the 3PAR InForm
OS Concepts Guide for information about licenses.
See also:
Creating Domains
Creating Users
Logging In and Connecting to Systems
The InForm Management Console allows authorized users to connect to an InServ Storage
Server, or multiple storage severs. In order to connect to an InServ Storage Server, you
must have the following information:
System name or IP address
Username
Password
62
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
To connect to an InServ Storage Server:
1. Start the InForm Management Console.
Note: Any systems previously connected to are displayed in the text box
under the IP Address or Name text box. To select multiple systems use
CTRL+click.
2. In the Connect dialog box, enter:
a. the IP address or system name.
b. your user name.
c. your password.
3. If you do not want a secured connection, uncheck the Secure Connection checKiBox.
Otherwise, click OK.
4. By clicking Options, you can modify the Secure Data Port, Unsecured Data Port,
and Event Port check boxes as needed.
Forwarding Error Log Files
If an internal error results in the termination of the InForm Management Console, an error
log file is created in your home directory with the following path and file name:
C:\...\InFormMC\log\InFormMC.log (for Windows® )
or:
informmc/log/informmc.log (for Solaris™ )
An error dialog box similar to the following appears:
If you experience an unexpected internal error while using the InForm Management
Console:
1. Record the exact path and filename specified in the dialog box.
2. Note the action or sequence of actions that you were performing prior to receiving the
error message.
320-200231 Rev A
63
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
3. Contact your local service provider for technical support and services for instructions on
forwarding the error log file.
Working with the System Manager
The System manager allows you to perform the following:
View System Information
Manage System Alerts
Locate a System
Edit a System
Work with Controller Nodes
Work with Drive Cages
Work with Ports
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing System Information
Information about your system's provisioning and network settings, capacity, current
software level, and system alerts are displayed in tabular format in the Systems screen.
Information can be displayed for all connected InServ Storage Servers, or per selected
InServ Storage Server.
To view the Systems screen for all connected InServ Storage Servers:
1. Click Systems in the Manager Pane.
2. From the Management Tree, click InServs.
To view the Systems screen for a specific InServ Storage Server:
1. Click Systems in the Manager Pane.
2. From the Management Tree, click the InServ Storage Server you wish view.
For information about each tab displayed in the Systems screen, see:
Viewing System Summary Information
64
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing System Settings
Viewing System Capacity
Viewing System Software
Viewing System Alerts
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing System Summary Information
To view system summary information, access the Systems screen and then click the
Summary tab.
The contents displayed in the Summary tab differs for all connected systems and for a
single system.
Viewing all Connected Systems
Viewing a Single System
Viewing all Connected Systems
If you are viewing information for all connected systems, the Summary tab is displayed as
follows:
The Summary tab can be filtered to display Summary information and Descriptor
information for all connected systems.
The following information is displayed when filtering by Summary information:
Column
Description
Name
The InServ Storage Server name. Each name displayed is a link
to that server's Summary information.
Serial Number
The system serial number.
320-200231 Rev A
65
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Model
The storage server model number.
OS Version
The InForm OS version running on the server.
State
The current state of the storage server, Normal, Degraded, or
Failed.
FC Total
The total amount of space available from Fibre Channel devices
(in GiB).
FC Allocated
Percentage
The percentage of used allocated Fibre Channel device space.
FC Free
The amount of free Fibre Channel device capacity (in GiB).
NL Total
The total amount of space available from Near Line devices (in
GiB).
NL Allocated
Percentage
The percentage of used allocated Near Line device space.
NL Free
The amount of free Near Line device capacity (in GiB).
SSD Total
The total amount of space available from SSD devices (in GiB).
SSD Allocated
Percentage
The percentage of used allocated SSD device space.
SSD Free
The amount of free SSD device capacity (in GiB).
Up Since
The date and time the system was brought online.
Connection State
The current connection state, either Active or Inactive.
Note: The InForm Management Console displays the devices currently
installed in your system. For example, if you do not have Fibre Channel drives
installed, the FC entries will not appear.
The following information is displayed when filtering by Descriptor information:
Column
Description
Name
The InServ Storage Server name. Each name displayed is a link to that
server's Summary information.
66
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Serial
Number
The system serial number.
Model
The storage server model number.
Location
The physical location of the server (if entered during server setup).
Owner
The owner of the server (if entered during server setup).
Contact
Contact information for the server owner (if entered during server
setup).
Comments
Any notes about the server (if entered during server setup).
Viewing a Single System
If you are viewing information for a single system, the Summary tab is displayed as
follows:
320-200231 Rev A
67
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Summary tab for a single system displays the following information:
Group
General
Field
Description
Name
The storage server's name.
Model
The model number of the storage server.
Serial
Number
The storage server's serial number.
OS Version
The current InForm OS version.
Controller
Nodes
The total number of controller nodes.
Ports
The total number of ports in the system.
Host
The number of host ports.
Disk
The number of disk ports.
Free
The number of free ports.
Remote Copy
The number of Remote Copy ports.
Drive Cages
The total number of drive cages.
Physical
Disks
The total number of physical disk drives.
FC
The number of Fibre Channel drives.
NL
The number of Near Line drives.
SSD
The number of SSD drives.
Note: The InForm Management Console displays the devices currently installed in your
system. For example, if you do not have Fibre Channel drives installed, the FC field will not
appear on the Summary tab.
Hosts
The total number of hosts.
Provisioning
68
CPGs
The total number of CPGs.
Virtual
Volumes
The total number of virtual volumes.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Resources
Capacity
CPU Usage
The current CPU usage in MHz and percentage.
Control
Memory
The current control memory usage in GiB and percentage.
Data Memory
The current data memory usage in GiB and percentage.
Device
List of device types. The selected device type affects the
display of the data displayed in the Overview and
Allocated fields.
Overview
The overview of allocated and free space per device type in
the system displayed graphically, in percentage, and in
GiB.
Allocated
The amount of allocated space used by provisioning,
sparing, and internal system structures and processes
(such as logging logical disks, admin volume, etc.)
displayed graphically, in percentage, and in GiB.
Up Since
The date and time the storage server was brought online.
New Alerts
Any new alerts. Any displayed alerts are links to the
Systems Alerts tab.
State
The state of the storage server; Normal, Degraded, or
Failed. See System and Component Status Icons.
State
Description
A description of the displayed state.
Health
See also:
Editing a System
Locating a System
Working with Drive Cages
Working with Controller Nodes
Working with Ports
320-200231 Rev A
69
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing System Settings
To view a specific system's settings information, access the Systems screen and then
click the Settings tab.
The Settings tab appears as follows:
The Settings tab displays the following information:
Group
System
Parameter
Field
Description
FC Raw Space
Alert
The raw space alert threshold (in GiB) for Fibre
Channel devices.
NL Raw Space
Alert
The raw space alert threshold (in GiB) for Near
Line devices.
SSD Raw Space
Alert
The raw space alert threshold (in GiB) for SSD
devices.
Note: The InForm Management Console displays the devices currently installed in your
system. For example, if you do not have Fibre Channel drives installed, the FCRaw Space
Alert field will not appear on the Settings tab.
Descriptors
70
Copy Space
Reclaim
Indicates if the copy space reclaim feature is
Enabled or Disabled.
Maximum
Volume
Retention Time
The set maximum volume retention time.
Location
Location of the server (if entered).
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Owner
The owner of the server (if entered).
Contact
Contact information (if entered).
Comments
Any notes about the server (if entered).
IPv4/IPv6
Radio buttons indicating if you wish to view either
IPv4 or IPv6 network configuration information. If
your system is not configured for IPv6, the IPv6
button is disabled.
IP Address
The server's IP address.
Subnet Mask
(If IPv4 was selected) The subnet mask.
Prefix
(If IPv6 was selected) The decimal value indicating
the number of contiguous, higher-order bits of the
address that make up the network portion of the
address.
Active Node
The active system node.
Status
The status of the server.
Default Route
The default routing IP address.
NTP Server
The NTP server, if any.
Network
Configuration
320-200231 Rev A
71
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing System Capacity
To view a single system's capacity information, access the Systems screen and then click
the Capacity tab.
Raw capacity for the selected InServ Storage Server is displayed for Total, Fibre Channel,
Near Line, and Solid State capacities. Each of these top level capacity items can be
further expanded to the following:
Note: In the normal situation, the capacity displays show you the space that
is consumed by provisioning (e.g. CPGs, Volumes, and underlying LDs) and
the space that is reserved by the system for spares.
When chunklets or PDs fail, the data that was on those chunklets is moved
onto the spares. The total amount of space consumed by provisioning does not
change, nor does the total amount of spares in the system. However, there is
an overlap in the numbers because the used spares are counted in the total
number of spares (total spares = unused + used spares) AND in the
provisioning (because parts of the LDs/CPGs/Volumes) are now using those
spares. In this case, an asterisk (*) appears to indicate that the numbers will
not add up due to this shared space.
72
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Field
Description
Total
amount of
usable
storage on
the storage
server.
+ Total
Amount of
storage
capacity
currently
allocated.
+ Allocated
Amount of
storage
allocated to
volumes.
+ Volumes
+ Base Volumes
- User
- Copy
- Admin
Amount
allocated for
base volume
user space,
copy space
and admin
space.
Amount of
volume
space
allocated to
CPGs.
+ CPGs
+ Copy
- Used
- Unused
+ Admin
320-200231 Rev A
Amount of
volume
space
allocated to
base
volumes.
Amount of
CPG space
allocated to
Copy.
Amount of
Copy space
that is used
or not used.
Amount of
CPG space
allocated to
73
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
admin.
- Used
- Unused
- Unmapped
Amount of
volume
space that is
not mapped.
Amount of
allocated
space used
by the
system.
+ System
- Internal
Amount of
system
space used
internally.
+ Spares
Amount of
space
allocated to
spares.
- Used
Spare space
allocated for
LDs when
underlying
PDs have
failed.
- Unused
Unused
space.
+ Free
74
Amount of
admin space
that is used
or not used.
Amount of
free space
on the
system,
regardless
of initialized
or not.
- Initialized
Amount of
initialized
free space
on the
system.
- Uninitialized
Amount of
uninitialized
free space
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
on the
system. This
includes any
chunklets
that are
currently
being
cleaned.
- Failed
+ Fibre Channel
Amount of
failed space.
Total
amount of
Fibre
Channel
(FC) storage
on the
storage
server.
Note: Subcontents of the Fibre Channel Total display are identical to the Total display at
the top of this table.
+ Nearline
Total
amount of
Nearline
(NL) storage
on the
storage
server.
Note: Subcontents of the Nearline Total display are identical to the Total display at the
top of this table.
+ Solid State
Total amount
of Solid State
(SSD) storage
on the
storage
server.
Note: Subcontents of the Solid State Total display are identical to the Total display at
the top of this table.
Note: Only device types (Fibre Channel, Nearline, and Solid State) that
are on your system are displayed. For example, if your system contains only
Fibre Channel drives, only Fibre Channel capacity is displayed.
320-200231 Rev A
75
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Working with the Hardware Inventory Manager
Viewing System Software
To view a single system's software information, access the Systems screen and then click
the Software tab.
The Software tab displays the Component Versions of each software feature and the
License information. By default, the Component Versions include the CLI Server,
System Manager, Kernel, and TPD Kernel Code. The License information includes
Enabled Features and the Key Generation Date.
If you wish to view the build level of the Component Versions, click the Show Build
Levels checKiBox.
If you wish to view versions of all system software, click Show All Versions.
Viewing System Alerts
To view system alert information, access the Systems screen and then click the Alerts
tab.
or
1. In the Manager Pane, click Events.
2. In the Management Tree, click the InServs node or a system node.
3. In the Management Window, click the Alerts tab.
76
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Alerts tab is split into an upper pane and lower pane. The upper pane display a
summary of the alerts. The lower pane displays the details of an alert selected in the upper
pane.
The information displayed in the Alerts tab is nearly identical between the information
displayed for all connected systems and information displayed for a single system, with the
only exception being an additional System column appears in the upper pane for all
connected systems. The following figure displays the Alerts tab for all connected systems.
The upper and lower panes are described in greater detail below.
Upper Pane
Lower Pane
Upper Pane
The upper pane of the Alerts tab displays the following:
Column
Description
System
The system on which the alert occurred.
Severity
The severity of the alert. See Alert Severity Indicators.
320-200231 Rev A
77
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
ID
The alert ID.
State
The alert state.
Last Time
The last occurrence of the alert.
Message
A brief description of the alert.
Repeat Count
The number of times the alert has been issued.
First Time
The first occurrence of the alert.
Lower Pane
The lower pane of the Alerts tab displays detailed information about an alert selected in the
upper pane. The lower pane displays the following information:
Group
General
Field
Description
Severity
The alert severity. See Alert Severity Indicators.
Type
The alert type.
Message
A brief description of the alert.
ID
The alert ID.
State
The alert state.
Message Code
The alert message code.
Sequence
The alert sequence.
Node ID
The controller node ID.
Component
The component for which the alert was issued.
Severity
The alert severity. See Alert Severity Indicators.
Type
The alert type.
Resolved by Event
78
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Sequence
The alert sequence.
Time
The time the alert was resolved.
Message
A brief description of the alert.
System
The name of the server that generated the alert.
System SN
The server's serial number.
Node ID
The node ID.
Component
The affected system components.
Repeat Count
The number of times the alert was issued.
Last time
The last occurrence of the alert.
First time
The first occurrence of the alert.
Component
Frequency
See also:
Alert Severity Indicators
Alert/Task/Connection Pane
Viewing the Alerts Summary
Managing Alerts
Viewing System Events
Exporting Data
320-200231 Rev A
79
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Managing Alerts
Once you have accessed and viewed the system alerts, either from the
Alert/Task/Connection Pane or from the Alerts tab on the Systems screen, you can apply
the following actions to any selected alert.
Acknowledge the alert
Mark the alert as new
Mark the alert as fixed
Remove the alert
To apply an action to an alert:
If you accessed the alert from the Alert/Task/Connection Pane, right-click the alert and
click Acknowldege, Mark as Fixed, Remove, or Show Details.
If you accessed the alert from the Alerts tab on the Systems screen, right-click the alert
and click Acknowldege, Mark as Fixed, Mark as New, Remove, or Show Details.
See also:
Alert/Task/Connection Pane
Viewing System Alerts
Alert Severity Indicators
Locating a System
This operation helps locate an InServ Storage Server by oscillating the node status LEDs
amber and green on all nodes of the storage server. If desired, the LEDs in all connected
drive cages are also set amber or oscillate, depending on the drive cage type.
Note: This operation can only be performed by users with Super, Service,or
Edit privilege levels.
To locate an InServ Storage Server:
1. Click Systems in the Manager Pane.
2. From the Management Tree, right-click the InServ Storage Server you wish to locate
and then click Locate System.
3. Select a Duration for the LED(s) to oscillate (from 1 and 255 seconds).
80
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
4. Optionally, if you want the drive cage LEDs to turn amber or oscillate as well, click the
Include Cage(s) checKiBox.
5. Click OK to start the locate.
Note: This operation can only be performed by users with Super, Service,or
Edit privilege levels.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Editing a System
You can edit the identification, identification information, properties, and alert settings for
any InServ Storage Server connected to the InForm Management Console.
Note: Editing storage servers can only be performed by users with Super,
Service, and Edit privilege levels.
To edit a storage server, access the Edit System wizard.
1. In the Manager Pane, click Systems.
2. In the Management Tree, click the system you wish to edit.
3. In the Common Actions Panel, click Edit System.
The Edit System wizard appears.
In the Edit System wizard, edit the following information as needed:
1. In the General group box, select the following:
a. Name - enter a new system name.
b. FC Raw Space Alert - Select whether to enable or disable the raw space alert for
Fiber Channel drives. If Enabled, enter a value from 100 to 100,000 GiB.
c. NL Raw Space Alert - Select whether to enable or disable the raw space alert for
Nearline drives. If Enabled, enter a value from 100 to 100,000 GiB.
d. SSD Raw Space Alert - Select whether to enable or disable the raw space alert for
SSD drives. If Enabled, enter a value from 100 to 100,000 GiB.
320-200231 Rev A
81
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: These fields only appear for devices installed on the system. For
example, if your system contains no SSD drives, the SSD Raw Space Alert
field will not be present.
e. Select whether to enable or disable the Copy Space Reclaim feature, which
reclaims logical disk space.
f. To select a Maximum Volume Retention time, select Enabled, select hour(s) or
day(s), and then enter a value of 1 to 1,825 (days) or 1 to 43,800 (hours).
2. In the Descriptors group box, enter the following:
a. Location - Enter the physical location of the storage server; for example, Lab 1.
b. Owner - Enter the owner of the storage server.
c. Contact - Enter any contact information.
d. Comments - Enter any relevant notes about the storage server.
3. Click OK.
The storage server is updated accordingly.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
Viewing System Information
Working with Controller Nodes
The InForm Management Console allows you to:
View Controller Nodes
Edit Controller Node Power Supplies
Edit Controller Node Batteries
Recharge Controller Node Batteries
82
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Controller Nodes
The Controller Nodes screen displays summary information about system controller nodes
and node components. The Controller Nodes screen is divided into an upper pane, which
displays summary information about the nodes, and a lower pane, which displays detailed
information about the nodes and node components.
To access the Controller Nodes screen:
1. Click Systems in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Management Tree, select Controller Nodes under the system whose controller
node information you wish to view.
The upper pane of the Controller Nodes screen is provided with two tabs; Summary and
Alerts.
The lower pane of the Controller Nodes screen provides five tabs; Summary, Ports,
Power Supplies, Batteries, and Alerts.
For information about the upper pane, see:
Viewing the Controller Nodes Summary Screen
Viewing Controller Nodes Alerts
For information about the lower pane, see:
Viewing Controller Nodes Details
Viewing Controller Node Ports Details
Viewing Controller Nodes Power Supplies Details
Viewing Controller Nodes Batteries Details
Viewing Controller Nodes Alerts Details
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
320-200231 Rev A
83
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Controller Nodes Summary
Screen
To view the Controller Nodes Summary screen:
1. Access the Controller Nodes screen.
2. In the upper pane, click the Summary tab.
The Summary tab appears as follows:
The Summary tab provides the following information:
Column
Description
ID
The node ID.
Name
The node name.
State
The current state of the node; either Normal, Degraded, or Failed.
See System and Component Status Icons.
Status LED
The current status of the node, as indicated by the node LED.
Ports
The total number of ports on the node.
Control
Memory
The amount of control memory (in GiB).
Data Memory
The amount of data memory (in GiB).
Cache
Availability
The percentage of available cache space.
84
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Viewing Controller Nodes
System and Component Status Icons
Viewing Controller Node Alerts
To view the Controller Node alerts screen:
1. Access the Controller Nodes screen.
2. In the upper pane, click the Alerts tab.
The Alerts tab appears as follows:
The Alerts tab provides the following information:
Column
Description
Severity
The severity of the alert. See Alert Severity Indicators.
ID
The alert ID.
State
The alert state.
Last Time
The last occurrence of the alert.
Message
A brief description of the alert.
Repeat Count
The number of times the alert has been issued.
First Time
The first occurrence of the alert.
320-200231 Rev A
85
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Viewing Controller Nodes
Viewing Controller Nodes Alerts Details
Alert Severity Indicators
Managing Alerts
Viewing Controller Nodes Details
To view the Controller Node details screen:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Controller Nodes screen.
In the upper pane, click the Summary tab.
Select a node.
In the lower pane, click the Summary tab.
The Summary tab appears as follows:
86
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Summary tab provides the following information:
Group
General
Health
Physical
Memory
Field
Description
Position
The position of the node in the node chassis.
Name
The node name.
Online
Indicates if the node is online.
InForm OS
Version
The InForm OS version.
Slots
The total number of slots on the node.
Free
The number of unused slots on the node.
Ports
The total number of ports on the node.
Control
Memory
The amount of control memory, in GiB.
Data Memory
The amount of data memory, in GiB.
Cache
Availability
The percentage of available cache.
Status LED
The current status of the node, as indicated by the node
LED.
New Alerts
Any new alerts. See Alert Severity Indicators.
State
Current state of the node, either Normal, Degraded,
or Failed. See System and Component Status Icons.
State
Description
Description of the node state.
Control
Memory
The amount of used control memory, displayed in GiB
and percentage.
Data Memory
The amount of used data memory, displayed in GiB and
percentage.
320-200231 Rev A
87
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
CPU
CPU Usage
The current CPU usage, displayed in MHz and
percentage.
See also:
Viewing the Controller Nodes Summary Screen
Alert Severity Indicators
System and Component Status Icons
Viewing Controller Node Ports Details
To view the Controller Node Ports detail screen:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Controller Nodes screen.
In the upper pane, click the Summary tab.
Select a node.
In the lower pane, click the Ports tab.
The Ports tab appears as follows:
88
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Ports tab provides the following information:
Group
Column
Description
Type
The type of interface card, either Ethernet or Fibre Channel
(FC).
Position
The position of the card in node:slot format.
Ports
The number of ports on the interface.
Max Rate
The maximum rate in Gbps.
Type
The port type, Fibre Channel (FC), iSCSI, Remote Copy over
IP (RCIP), or Remote Copy over Fibre Channel (RCFC).
Connected
Device Type
The connected device type, Free, Disk, Host, or InServ.
Speed
The speed of the port in Gbps.
Count
The number of ports.
Cards
Ports
See also:
Viewing the Controller Nodes Summary Screen
Working with Ports
Viewing Controller Node Power Supplies
Details
To view the Controller Node Power Supplies details screen:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Controller Nodes screen.
In the upper pane, click the Summary tab.
Select a node.
In the lower pane, click the Power Supplies tab.
320-200231 Rev A
89
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Power Supplies tab appears as follows:
The Power Supplies tab provides the following information:
Column
Description
Node ID
The node ID.
Power
Supply ID
The power supply ID.
Serial
Number
The power supply serial number.
State
The state of the power supply. See System and Component Status
Icons.
Fan State
The fan state, Normal, Degraded, or Failed. See System and
Component Status Icons.
Fan Speed
The current fan speed.
Battery State
The power supply battery state, Normal, Degraded, or Failed. See
System and Component Status Icons.
See also:
System and Component Status Icons
Viewing the Controller Nodes Summary Screen
90
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Controller Node Batteries Details
To view the Controller Node Batteries details screen:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Controller Nodes screen.
In the upper pane, click the Summary tab.
Select a node.
In the lower pane, click the Batteries tab.
The Batteries tab appears as follows:
The Batteries tab provides the following information:
Column
Description
Node ID
The node ID.
Power Supply ID
The power supply ID.
Battery ID
The battery ID.
Serial Number
The battery serial number.
State
The state of the battery. See System and Component Status
Icons.
Charge State
The charge state of the battery.
Charge Level
The charge level of the battery.
Maximum Battery
Life
The battery's maximum life.
Test In Progress
Indicates if any tests are in progress.
320-200231 Rev A
91
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Expiration Time
The battery expiration date.
See also:
System and Component Status Icons
Viewing the Controller Nodes Summary Screen
Viewing Controller Node Alerts Details
To view the Controller Node Alerts details screen:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Controller Nodes screen.
In the upper pane, click the Summary tab.
Select a node.
In the lower pane, click the Alerts tab.
The Alerts tab displays the information for a specific node as selected in the upper pane
and appears as follows:
The Alerts tab provides the following information:
Column
Description
Severity
The severity of the alert. See Alert Severity Indicators.
ID
The alert ID.
State
The alert state.
Last Time
The last occurrence of the alert.
92
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Message
A brief description of the alert.
Repeat Count
The number of times the alert has been issued.
First Time
The first occurrence of the alert.
See also:
Alert Severity Indicators
Viewing the Controller Nodes Summary Screen
Viewing Controller Nodes Alerts
Editing Controller Node Power Supplies
The InForm Management Console allows you to edit the serial number of a controller node
power supply.
1. In the Manager Pane, click Systems.
2. In the Management Tree, click Controller Nodes under the system whose power
supply you wish to edit.
3. In the lower Controller Node Details pane displayed in Management Window, select
the Power Supplies tab.
4. Right-click the power supply whose serial number you wish to edit and click Edit.
5. Enter a new alphanumeric serial number in the Serial Number field using numeric
characters 0 to 9 and alphabetic characters A to F.
6. Click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing Controller Nodes Power Supplies Details
320-200231 Rev A
93
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Editing Controller Node Batteries
The InForm Management Console allows you to edit controller node batteries.
1. In the Manager Pane, click Systems.
2. In the Management Tree, click Controller Nodes under the system whose batteries
you wish to edit.
3. In the lower Controller Node Details pane displayed in Management Window, select
the Batteries tab.
4. Right-click the battery you wish to edit and click Edit.
5. Enter a new alphanumeric serial number in the Serial Number field using numeric
characters 0 to 9 and alphabetic characters A to F.
6. Enter a new battery expiration date in the Expiration Time field. You can alternately
click the calendar button to the right of the field and select a date from the calendar
that appears.
7. Click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Controller Node Battery Test
Log
To view the controller node battery test log:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Systems.
2. In the Management Tree, click Controller Nodes under the system whose batteries
you wish to edit.
3. In the lower Controller Node Details pane displayed in Management Window, select
the Batteries tab.
4. Right-click the battery whose test log you wish to view and click Show Test Log.
94
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Resetting the Controller Node Battery
Test Log
To reset the controller node battery test log:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Systems.
2. In the Management Tree, click Controller Nodes under the system whose batteries
you wish to edit.
3. In the lower Controller Node Details pane displayed in Management Window, select
the Batteries tab.
4. Right-click the battery whose test log you wish to reset and click Reset Test Log.
5. Click Yes when prompted for confirmation.
Recharging Controller Node Batteries
The InForm Management Console allows you to recharge controller node batteries.
1. In the Manager Pane, click Systems.
2. In the Management Tree, click Controller Nodes under the system whose batteries
you recharge.
3. In the lower Controller Node Details pane displayed in Management Window, select
the Batteries tab.
4. Right-click the battery you wish to recharge and click Re-charge.
5. Click Yes when the battery recharge confirmation dialog box appears.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
320-200231 Rev A
95
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Working with Drive Cages
The InForm Management Console allows you to:
View Drive Cages
Edit Drive Cages
Locate Drive Cages
Edit Drive Cage Power Supplies
Viewing Drive Cages
The Drive Cages screen displays summary information about system drive cages and drive
cage components.
To access the Drive Cages screen:
1. Click Systems in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Management Tree, select Drive Cages under the system whose drive cage
information you wish to view.
The Drive Cages screen provides four tabs, Summary, Power Supplies, SFPs, and
Alerts. For information about each, see:
Viewing the Drive Cage Summary
Viewing Drive Cage Power Supplies
Viewing Drive Cage SFPs
Viewing Drive Cage Alerts
Additionally, you can view drive cage details. See:
Viewing Drive Cage Details
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
96
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Drive Cage Summary
To view the Drive Cage Summary screen:
1. Access the Drive Cages screen.
2. In the upper pane, click the Summary tab.
The Summary tab appears as follows:
The Summary tab provides the following information:
Column
Description
Name
The drive cage name.
State
The drive cage state. See System and Component Status Icons.
Model
The drive cage model.
Loop A
The port on the InServ Storage Server to which the A loop is
connected.
Loop B
The port on the InServ Storage Server to which the B loop is
connected.
Speed
The port speed in Gbps.
Disks
The number of disks in the drive cage. The bottom of the Disks
column displays a total disk count.
FC Total
The total Fibre Channel capacity in GiB. The bottom of the FC Total
column displays total FC capacity.
FC Allocated
Percentage
The percentage of used Fibre Channel capacity. The bottom of the
FC Allocated Percentage column displays the total used
percentage.
SSD Total
The total SSD capacity in GiB. The bottom of the SSD Total column
displays total SSD capacity.
320-200231 Rev A
97
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
SSD Allocated
Percentage
The percentage of used SSD capacity. The bottom of the SSD
Allocated Percentage column displays the total used percentage.
Note: The device types displayed in the summary are dependent on the devices installed in
your system. For example, if you have Near Line and disk drives installed, the summary will
display NL (Near Line) Total, NL Allocated Percentage columns.
The Summary tab can be further filtered to view drive cage connectivity and drive cage
capacity.
Viewing_Drive_Cage_Connectivity
Viewing_Drive_Cage_Capacity
Viewing Drive Cage Connectivity
To view drive cage connectivity information, select Connectivity from the filter list.
The connectivity summary appears as follows:
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
Name
The drive cage name.
State
The drive cage state. See System and Component Status Icons.
Position A
Distance the drive cage is from the controller node port. (0 = directly
connected to InServ ports, 1= there is one device between the node and
this drive cage, etc).
Revision A
Version of firmware running on the controller for the A loop.
Position B
Distance the drive cage is from the controller node port. (0 = directly
connected to InServ Storage Server ports, 1= there is one device
between the node and this drive cage, etc).
Revision B
Version of firmware running on the controller for the B loop.
98
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
A0 Port
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage port A0.
A1 Port
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage port A1.
A2 Port
(for DC3
drive cages)
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage port A2.
A3 Port
(for DC3
drive cages)
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage port A3.
B0 Port
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage port B0 .
B1 Port
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage port B1.
B2 Port
(for DC3
drive cages)
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage port B2.
B3 Port
(for DC3
drive cages)
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage port B3.
Daisy
Chained
Indicates whether the drive cages are daisy chained.
Viewing Drive Cage Capacity
To view drive cage capacity information, select Capacity from the filter list.
The capacity summary appears as follows:
320-200231 Rev A
99
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
Name
The drive cage name.
State
The drive cage state. See System and Component Status Icons.
FC Total
The total Fibre Channel capacity in GiB. The bottom of the FC Total
column displays total FC capacity.
FC Free
The amount of free Fibre Channel space in GiB. The bottom of the
FC Free column displays total free FC capacity.
FC Allocated
The amount of allocated Fibre Channel space in GiB. The bottom of
the FC Allocated column displays total allocated FC capacity.
FC Allocated
Percentage
The percentage of used Fibre Channel capacity. The bottom of the
FC Allocated Percentage column displays the total used
percentage.
SSD Total
The total SSD capacity in GiB. The bottom of the SSD Total column
displays total SSD capacity.
SSD Free
The amount of free SSD space in GiB. The bottom of the SSD Free
column displays total free SSD capacity.
SSD Allocated
The amount of allocated SSD space in GiB. The bottom of the SSD
Allocated column displays total allocated SSD capacity.
SSD Allocated
Percentage
The percentage of used SSD capacity. The bottom of the SSD
Allocated Percentage column displays the total used percentage.
Note: The device types displayed in the summary are dependent on the devices installed in
your system. For example, if you have Near Line and disk drives installed, the summary will
display NL (Near Line) Total, NL Allocated Percentage, etc. columns.
100
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Drive Cage Power Supplies
To view the Drive Cage power supply information:
1. Access the Drive Cages screen.
2. In the upper pane, click the Power Supplies tab.
The Power Supplies tab appears as follows:
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
Cage
The drive cage name.
State
The drive cage state. See System and Component Status Icons.
Model
The drive cage model.
AC State
Indicates the presence of AC power to the power supply. See System and
Component Status Icons.
Fan State
Power supply fan operational status. See System and Component Status
Icons.
Fan
Speed
The fan speed.
320-200231 Rev A
101
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Viewing Drive Cages
Viewing the Drive Cage Power Supply Details
Viewing Drive Cage SFPs
To view the Drive Cage SFP information:
1. Access the Drive Cages screen.
2. In the upper pane, click the SFPs tab.
The SFPs tab appears as follows:
The upper half of the SFPs tab displays summary SFP information. The lower half of the
SFPs tab displays detailed information about a selected SFP from the upper pane.
The following information appears in the upper tab:
102
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Column
Description
Interface
Card
Interface card number, as assigned by the system.
SFP
SFP number, as assigned by the system.
State
The drive cage state. See System and Component Status Icons.
Manufacturer
The SFP manufacturer.
Max Speed
The maximum speed of the SFP in Gbps.
TX Disable
Displays whether the transmit laser is disabled.
TX Fault
Displays whether the transmit laser has a problem.
RX Loss
Displays whether the receive end of the SFP is experiencing a loss of
signal from the host or drive cage.
RX Power
Low
Displays whether the SFP receive power is low.
DDM Support
Displays whether the SFP is DDM-capable (Digital Diagnostic
Monitoring).
The following information appears in the lower tab:
Group
General
Field
Description
Interface Card
Interface card number, as assigned by the system.
SFP
SFP number, as assigned by the system.
State
Current condition of the SFP.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer of the SFP.
Part Number
Part number of the SFP.
Serial Number
Serial number of the SFP.
320-200231 Rev A
103
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
DDM
104
Revision
SFP's revision level.
Max Speed
Maximum speed allowed by the SFP.
Qualified
Displays whether the SFP has been tested and if the SFP
is supported.
TX Disable
Displays whether the transmit laser is disabled.
TX Fault
Displays whether the transmit laser has a problem.
RX Loss
Displays whether the receive end of the SFP is
experiencing a loss of signal from the host or drive cage.
RX Power Low
Displays whether the SFP receive power is low.
DDM Support
Displays whether the SFP is DDM-capable (Digital
Diagnostic Monitoring).
Column
Description
Type
Identifies the monitored parameters (temperature,
voltage, TX bias, TX power, and RX power).
Unit
The unit of measure used for the monitored parameters.
Value
The current measured value.
Low Threshold
Warning
The manufacturer's recommended lower-limit warning
level.
High Threshold
Warning
The manufacturer's recommended upper-limit warning
level.
Low Alarm
Threshold
The manufacturer's recommended lower-limit alarm
level.
High Alarm
Threshold
The manufacturer's recommended upper-limit alarm
level.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Viewing Drive Cages
Viewing Drive Cage Alerts
To view the Drive Cage alerts:
1. Access the Drive Cages screen.
2. In the upper pane, click the Alerts tab.
The Alerts tab appears as follows:
The upper half of the Alerts tab displays summary alert information. The lower half of the
Alerts tab displays detailed information about a selected alert from the upper pane.
320-200231 Rev A
105
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The information displayed in the Alerts tab is identical to the information displayed in the
Systems Alerts screen, except the Drive Cage Alerts tab does not display a Systems
column. See Viewing System Alerts for details.
See also:
Viewing Drive Cages
Viewing System Alerts
Viewing Drive Cage Details
The Drive Cage detail screens display details about a specific drive cage selected from the
Drive Cage Summary tab.
To view drive cage details, access the Drive Cages screen.
Drive cage details are displayed on six tabs in the lower pane of the Drive Cages screen.
For information about each, see:
Viewing the Drive Cage Details Summary Tab
Viewing the Drive Cage Interface Card Details
Viewing the Drive Cage Magazine Details
Viewing the Drive Cage Physical Disks Details
Viewing the Drive Cage Power Supply Details
Viewing the Drive Cage Details Summary
Tab
The Drive Cage details Summary tab displays detailed information about a drive cage
selected from the Summary tab in the upper pane of the Drive Cages screen.
1. To view drive cage details, access the Drive Cages screen.
2. In the upper pane of the Drive Cages screen, click the Summary tab and then click a
drive cage.
3. In the lower pane, click the Summary tab.
The details Summary tab appears as follows:
106
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information is provided:
Group
General
Field
Description
Name
The drive cage name.
Model
The drive cage model.
Node WWN
(for DC1 and DC3
drive cages)
The World-Wide Name of the controller node.
Serial Number
(for DC3 drive
cages)
The drive cage serial number.
Split Loop
(for DC2 and DC4
drive cages)
Whether the drive cage is in split loop mode.
ID Switch
(for DC3 drive
cages)
The number of ID switches.
Interface Cards
The number of interface cards.
SFPs
The number of SFPs.
Magazines
The number of drive magazines.
Free Drive Bays
The number of available drive magazine bays.
320-200231 Rev A
107
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Physical Disks
The number of physical disks.
Power Supplies
The number of power supplies.
Location
The location of the drive cage.
Loop A
The throughput in KIB/sec for the Loop A port.
Loop B
The throughput in KIB/sec for the Loop B port.
Loop A
Revision of firmware running on the FC-AL for port A.
A0 Port
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage
port A0.
A1 Port
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage
port A1.
A2 Port
(for DC3 drive
cages)
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage
port A2.
A3 Port
(for DC3 drive
cages)
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage
port A3.
Loop B
Revision of firmware running on the FC-AL for port B.
B0 Port
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage
port B0.
B1 Port
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage
port B1.
B2 Port
(for DC3 drive
cages)
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage
port B2.
Resources
Connectivity
108
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Health
B3 Port
(for DC3 drive
cages)
Controller node initiator port connected to drive cage
port B3.
Daisy Chained
Displays if the selected drive cage is connected to
another drive cage, i.e. daisy chained.
Position A
Distance the drive cage is from the controller node
port (0 = directly connected to InServ ports, 1=
there is one device between the node and this drive
cage, etc).
Position B
Distance the drive cage is from the controller node
port (0 = directly connected to InServ ports, 1=
there is one device between the node and this drive
cage, etc).
New Alerts
Any alerts.
State
Current state of the drive cage, either Normal,
Degraded, or Failed. See System and Component
Status Icons.
Temperature
Sensor Value
(for DC3 drive
cages)
The temperature value of the drive cage.
Firmware
(for DC2 and DC4
drive cages)
The firmware version on the drive cage.
State
Description
Description of the drive cage state.
See also:
Viewing Drive Cages
Viewing the Drive Cage Summary
320-200231 Rev A
109
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Drive Cage Interface Card
Details
To view interface card details:
1. Access the Drive Cages screen.
2. In the upper pane of the Drive Cages screen, click the Summary tab and then click a
drive cage.
3. In the lower pane, click the Interface Cards tab.
The Interface Cards tab appears as follows (the following image depicts information for a
DC4 drive cage. Your screen may differ depending on the drive cage type in your system):
The following information for DC2 and DC4 drive cages is provided:
Column
Description
Name
The interface card name.
Ports
Four ports for each FC-AL. For FC-AL A, that is A0 through A3, and for
FC-AL B, that is B0 through B3.
Link A RX
LED
The status of Link A's fibre channel receiver of the SFP. Green if
receiving signal; off if not receiving signal.
Link A TX
LED
The status of Link A's SFP transmitter. Green if sending signal; off if not
sending signal.
Link B RX
LED
The status of Link B's fibre channel receiver of the SFP. Green if
receiving signal; off if not receiving signal.
Link B TX
LED
The status of Link B's SFP transmitter. Green if sending signal; off if not
sending signal.
System LED
The system status.
Link A Speed
Link A speed.
110
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Link B Speed
Link B speed.
Link A SFP
State
The state of Link A's SFP.
Link B SFP
State
The state of Link B's SFP.
The following information for DC3 drive cages is provided:
Column
Description
Name
The interface card name.
Ports
Four ports for each FC-AL. For FC-AL A, that is A0 through A3, and for
FC-AL B, that is B0 through B3.
Port 0 State
Current state of port 0.
Port 1 State
Current state of port 1.
Port 2 State
Current state of port 2.
Port 3 State
Current state of port 3.
Port 0 Link
Speed
Link speed for port 0.
Port 1 Link
Speed
Link speed for port 1.
Port 2 Link
Speed
Link speed for port 2.
Port 3 Link
Speed
Link speed for port 3.
Firmware
State
Drive cage firmware status (Current, Not Current, Unknown).
State
Current state of the interface card.
ESH State
The current state of the Enhanced Switch Hub.
320-200231 Rev A
111
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information for DC1 drive cages is provided:
Column
Description
Name
The interface card name.
Ports
Ports for each FC-AL. For FC-AL A, that is A0 and A1, and for FC-AL
B, that is B0 and B1.
Loop LED (Port
0)
Current state of port 0.
Loop LED (Port
1)
Current state of port 1.
Loop Split
Current state of daisy-chained drive cages (Unknown, Normal, Off,
Green, Green blink, Amber, Amber blink).
Status LED
Current state of interface card.
Link Speed
Link speed.
Firmware
State
Drive cage firmware status (Current, Not Current, Unknown).
CPU State
(Self)
Current state of the current loop's CPU (Unknown, Normal, Failed,
Degraded).
CPU State
(Partner)
Current state of other loop's CPU (Unknown, Normal, Failed,
Degraded).
See also:
Viewing Drive Cages
Viewing the Drive Cage Summary
System and Component Status Icons
112
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Drive Cage Magazine Details
To view drive magazine details:
1. Access the Drive Cages screen.
2. In the upper pane of the Drive Cages screen, click the Summary tab and then click a
drive cage.
3. In the lower pane, click the Magazines tab.
The Magazines tab appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Position
Position of the drive magazine within the drive cage.
Status LED
(for DC2 and DC4 drive
cages)
The current state of the drive magazine. See System and
Component Status Icons.
Hot Plug LED
(for DC2 and DC4 drive
cages)
The current state of the hot plug LED.
Disks
Number of disks in the drive magazine.
Loop A State
Status of the Interface Card loop (A) to the node.
Loop B State
Status of the Interface Card loop (B) to the node.
See also:
Viewing Drive Cages
Viewing the Drive Cage Summary
320-200231 Rev A
113
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Drive Cage Physical Disks
Details
To view physical disk details:
1. Access the Drive Cages screen.
2. In the upper pane of the Drive Cages screen, click the Summary tab and then click a
drive cage.
3. In the lower pane, click the Physical Disks tab.
The Physical Disks tab appears as follows:
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
ID
Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. For
unadmitted disks, this columns is blank (--).
Position
Location of the disk in the format: N:S:P (Node:Slot:Port).
WWN
The World Wide Name (WWN) assigned to the disk.
Status LED
(for DC1, DC2, and DC4
drive cages)
Current state of the disks.
Temperature
Current internal temperature of the disk drive.
Loop A AL_PA
The loop A arbitrated loop physical address of the disk.
Loop A State
Status of the Interface Card loop to the node. See System
and Component Status Icons.
114
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Loop B AL_PA
The loop B arbitrated loop physical address of the disk.
Loop B State
Status of the Interface Card loop to the node. See System
and Component Status Icons.
State
Status of the physical disk. See System and Component
Status Icons.
ESI State
(for DC2, DC3, and DC4
drive cages)
State of the ESI (Enclosure Services Interface). See
System and Component Status Icons.
See also:
Viewing Drive Cages
Viewing the Drive Cage Summary
Viewing Drive Cage Power Supply Details
To view power supply details:
1. Access the Drive Cages screen.
2. In the upper pane of the Drive Cages screen, click the Summary tab and then click a
drive cage.
3. In the lower pane, click the Power Supplies tab.
The Power Supplies tab appears as follows:
320-200231 Rev A
115
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
Cage
The drive cage to which the power supply belongs.
ID
Numeric ID of the power supply.
State
Status of the physical disk. See System and Component Status Icons.
Model
Model name of the power supply.
AC State
Indicates the presence of AC power to the power supply.
Fan State
Power supply fan operational status.
Fan Speed
Speed of the power supply fan.
See also:
Viewing Drive Cages
Viewing the Drive Cage Summary
Viewing Drive Cage Power Supplies
Editing Drive Cages
To edit a drive cage:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Systems.
2. In the Management Tree, click Drive Cages under the system whose drive cage you
wish to edit.
3. In the Summary tab of upper pane displayed in Management Window, right-click the
drive cage you wish to edit and click Edit.
4. Enter the drive cage location the Location field.
5. Click OK.
116
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Locating Drive Cages
This operation locates a drive cage, or components of the drive cage such as drive
magazines or ports in the storage server, by setting the related LED(s) to amber or
oscillate.
1. In the Manager Pane, click Systems.
2. In the Management Tree, click Drive Cages under the system whose drive cage you
wish to locate.
3. In the Summary tab of upper pane displayed in Management Window, right-click the
drive cage you wish to locate and click Locate.
4. In the Duration field, enter a value of 1 to 255 seconds.
5. In the Target Component list, select the component you wish to locate.
6. Click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Editing Drive Cage Power Supplies
To edit a drive cage power supply:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Systems.
2. In the Management Tree, click Drive Cages under the system whose drive cage you
wish to edit.
3. In the Power Supplies tab displayed in Management Window, right-click the drive
cage power supply you wish to edit and click Edit.
4. Enter the drive cage power supply model number in the Model field.
5. Click OK.
320-200231 Rev A
117
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Working with Ports
The InForm Management Console allows you to:
View System Ports
Configure Ports
Clear Port Parameters
Reset Ports
Set Ports Offline
Initialize Ports
Synchronize Ports with the Name Server
Issue an LIP Command
Enable a Remote Copy Interface
Ping a Port
Viewing System Ports
The system Ports screen provides information about all system ports.
To access the system Ports screen:
1. Click Systems in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Management Tree, select Ports under the system whose port information you
wish to view.
The system Ports screen provides seven tabs, Summary, Fibre Channel, RCFC, iSCSI,
RCIP, SFPs, and Alerts. For information about each, see:
Viewing Port Summary Information
Viewing System Fibre Channel Ports
Viewing System RCFC Ports
Viewing System iSCSI Ports
118
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing System RCIP Ports
Viewing SFP Information
Viewing System Port Alerts
Viewing Port Summary Information
To view the Port summary information:
1. Access the Ports screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the Summary tab.
The Summary tab appears as follows:
320-200231 Rev A
119
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Summary tab is divided into an upper pane and a lower pane. The upper pane displays
a summary of all system ports. The lower pane displays detailed information about a single
port selected from the upper pane.
Upper Pane
Lower Pane
Upper Pane
The upper pane provides the following information:
Column
Description
Position
Port location.
WWN/MAC
World Wide Name or Media Access Control address of the connected
device.
State
The state of the port. See System and Component Status Icons.
Type
Indicates whether the port is FC, iSCSI, RCIP, or RCFC.
Connected
Device Type
Type of device that the port is connected to. Free, Disk, Host, or
InServ.
Connected
Device
Name of device that the port is connected to, e.g. host1, cage0.
Mode
Port firmware mode setting. Ports in Initiator mode are connected to
drive cages and ports in Target mode export to hosts. Suspended
mode is for target ports that have not yet been initialized by the
system (rare). Peer mode is for Ethernet ports.
Lower Pane
The lower pane provides detail information about a selected port from the upper pane.
Information is presented on up to four tabs, which includes a Summary tab, and,
depending on your system setup, Physical Disks, SFP, Sessions, or Hosts. Each are
discussed in detail in the following:
Port_Details_Summary
Physical_Disks
SFP
Sessions
Hosts
120
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Port Details Summary
The port details summary is presented on the Summary tab.
The Summary tab provides the following information:
Group
General
320-200231 Rev A
Field
Description
Location
Port location.
Position
(not shown)
For iSCSI ports. Port location.
Port WWN
Port World Wide Name.
Node WWN
Node World Wide Name.
Type
Indicates whether the port is FC, iSCSI, RCIP, or
RCFC.
Rate
Rate that data can be transferred over the port (1
Gbps, 2 Gbps or 4 Gbps). When there is no
specified value, no connection exists.
Connected
Device Type
Type of device that the port is connected to. Free,
Disk, Host, or InServ.
Connected
Device
Name of device that the port is connected to, e.g.
host1, cage0.
Mode
Port firmware mode setting. Ports in Initiator mode
121
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
are connected to drive cages and ports in Target
mode export to hosts. Suspended mode is for target
ports that have not yet been initialized by the system
(rare). Peer mode is for Ethernet ports.
Resources
Settings
(displayed for FC
and RCFC ports)
IP Settings
(displayed for
RCIP and iSCI
122
State
Current state of the port.
MAC
(not shown)
For iSCSI ports. The Media Access Control address for
the Ethernet interface.
TPGT
(not shown)
For iSCSI ports. The Target Portal Group Tag for the
iSCSI target portal group.
Total Data
Throughput
The throughput in KIB/sec.
Connection
Mode
The type of port connection.
Connection
Type
Connection type or port connection setting (Loop,
Point, or Loop-point). When the port is set to Looppoint, both loop and point-to-point connections are
enabled.
Configured
Rate
Data transfer rate setting (for example,
1 Gbps). Auto indicates that the system
automatically selects the rate.
Max Rate
Maximum rate of connection from the port.
Class 2
Indicates whether Fibre Channel service Class 2 is
Disabled, Ack 1 or Ack 0.
VCN
For fabric attached ports, indicates the VLUN change
notification setting. When set to Enabled, notices are
generated and sent to the fabric controller. When set
to Disabled, no notification is sent.
Unique Node
WWN
Indicates whether the node's WWN is Enabled or
Disabled.
Interrupt
Coalesce
If Disabled, each I/O generates a separate interrupt
to the HBA port driver rather than generating one
interrupt for multiple I/O completion.
MAC
For RCIP ports. Media Access Control address of the
Ethernet interface.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
ports - not
shown)
Fibre Channel
Settings
(displayed for FC
and RCFC ports)
320-200231 Rev A
DHCP
For iSCSI ports. Indicates if the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) protocol is enabled.
IP Address
IP address of the iSCSI or RCIP port.
Gateway
The address of a local IP router on the same network
as the InServ, used to forward traffic to destinations
beyond the local network.
Subnet Mask
Netmask address for the iSCSI or RCIP interface.
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit. The greatest amount of
data or "packet" size that can be transferred in one
physical frame on a network. MTU setting for the
iSCSI port. The default setting is 1500. When
supported by the network, an MTU value of 9000
should be used.
Configured
Rate
For RCIP ports. The configured data transfer rate. A
value of 0 indicates that no data is being transferred.
Rate
For iSCSI ports. Data transfer rate. A value of 0
indicates that no data is being transferred.
TCP Port
The TCP port number used by the iSCSI card.
Duplex
(For RCIP) The duplex speed, Half or Full.
Adapter Type
For RCIP ports. Model of the adapter that contains the
port (for example, Intel PRO/1000MT).
Topology
Type of connection (Private Loop, Public Loop, or
Point-Point).
Class
Identifies which Fibre Channel classes of service are
enabled (2, 3, or 2/3). 2/3 indicates that both Class
2 and Class 3 are enabled.
Adaptor Type
Model of the Fibre Channel adapter that contains the
port (for example, QLOGIC 2302).
123
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Mode Change
Indicates whether port mode change from initiator to
target or vice versa is Allowed or Prohibited. This
setting is configured using the InForm CLI command
controlport.
Hosts
The number of hosts connected to the port. This is
only displayed if the port is connected to hosts.
Physical
Disks
The number of physical disks connected to the port.
This is only displayed if the port is connected to drive
cages.
Link State
The current state of the link. Displayed if the port is
an RCFC port.
Remote Node
WWN
The node WWN. Displayed if the port is an RCFC port.
Remote Port
WWN
iSNS Settings
(displayed for
iSCSI ports - not
shown)
124
The port WWN. Displayed if the port is an RCFC port.
Primary IP
Address
Primary Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS) server
IP address. iSNS protocol allows for automated
discovery, management, and configuration of iSCSI.
Secondary IP
Address
Secondary iSNS server IP address.
TCP Port
The port on the iSNS server with which to
communicate.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Physical Disks
The physical disk port information is presented on the Physical Disks tab.
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
AL_PA
The arbitrated loop physical address of the device.
Device
The type of connected disk.
Position
The position of the disk in the InServ Storage Server.
I/O Error Count
The number of errors on the connected disk.
State
The state of the disk. See System and Component Status Icons.
See also:
Viewing Drive Cages
320-200231 Rev A
125
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
SFP
The port SFP information is presented on the SFP tab.
The following information is provided:
Group
Field
Description
Position
The location of the SFP within the system.
State
Current condition of the SFP.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer of the SFP.
Part Number
Part number of the SFP.
Serial Number
Serial number of the SFP.
Revision
SFP's revision level.
Max Speed
Maximum speed allowed by the SFP.
Qualified
Displays whether the SFP has been tested and if the SFP
is supported.
TX Disable
Displays whether the transmit laser is disabled.
General
126
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
DDM
TX Fault
Displays whether the transmit laser has a problem.
RX Loss
Displays whether the receive end of the SFP is
experiencing a loss of signal from the host or drive cage.
RX Power Low
Displays whether the SFP receive power is low.
DDM Support
Displays whether the SFP is DDM-capable (Digital
Diagnostic Monitoring).
Column
Description
Type
Identifies the monitored parameters (temperature,
voltage, TX bias, TX power, and RX power).
Unit
The unit of measure used for the monitored parameters.
Value
The current measured value.
Low Threshold
Warning
The manufacturer's recommended lower-limit warning
level.
High Threshold
Warning
The manufacturer's recommended upper-limit warning
level.
Low Alarm
Threshold
The manufacturer's recommended lower-limit alarm
level.
High Alarm
Threshold
The manufacturer's recommended upper-limit alarm
level.
See also:
Viewing Drive Cages
320-200231 Rev A
127
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Sessions
For iSCSI ports, session information is displayed on the Sessions tab.
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
Position
Location of the iSCSI port.
IP Address
IP address of the host that initiated the connection.
TSIH
Identifier for the Target Session Identifying Handle (TSIH).
iSCSI
iSCSI name for the associated iSCSI host path.
Connection Count
Number of connections for this session.
Start Time
Time the session started.
128
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Hosts
The host port information is presented on the Hosts tab. Information differs for Fibre
Channel and iSCSI ports.
For Fibre Channel ports, the following is displayed:
The following information is provided for Fibre Channel ports:
Column
Description
Host ID
The ID of the host.
Host Name
The name of the host.
Domain
The domain in which the host resides.
WWN
The hosts WWN.
Port
The hosts location in N:S:P (Node:Slot:Port) format.
For iSCSI ports, the following is displayed:
320-200231 Rev A
129
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information is provided for iSCSI ports:
Column
Description
Host ID
The ID of the host.
Host Name
The name of the host.
Domain
The domain in which the host resides.
iSCSI
iSCSI name for the associated iSCSI host path.
IP Address
iSCSI port IP address.
Viewing System Fibre Channel Ports
To view system fibre channel port information:
1. Access the Ports screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the Fibre Channel tab.
The Fiber Channel tab appears as follows:
130
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Fibre Channel tab is divided into an upper pane and a lower pane. The upper pane
displays a summary of all fibre channel ports in the system. The lower pane displays
detailed information about a single port selected from the upper pane.
Upper_Pane
Lower_Pane
Upper Pane
The upper pane can be filtered to display Fibre Channel Summary and Settings
information.
When Summary is selected, the following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Position
The port location in node:slot:port format.
WWN
World Wide Name of the connected device.
320-200231 Rev A
131
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
State
The state of the port. See System and Component Status Icons.
Mode
Port firmware mode setting. Ports in Initiator mode are connected to
drive cages and ports in Target mode export to hosts. Suspended
mode is for target ports that have not yet been initialized by the
system (rare). Peer mode is for Ethernet ports.
Topology
Type of connection (Private Loop, Public Loop, or Point-Point).
Rate
Rate that data can be transferred over the port (1 Gbps, 2 Gbps or 4
Gbps). When there is no specified value, no connection exists.
Class
Identifies which Fibre Channel classes of service are enabled (2, 3, or
2/3). 2/3 indicates that both Class 2 and Class 3 are enabled.
Connected
Device Type
Type of device that the port is connected to. Free, Disk, Host, or
InServ.
Connected
Device
Name of device that the port is connected to, e.g. host1, cage0.
Mode Change
Indicates whether port mode change from initiator to target or vice
versa is Allowed or Prohibited. This setting is configured using the
InForm CLI command controlport.
When Settings is selected, the following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Position
The port location in node:slot:port format.
Connection
Mode
The type of port connection. Disk, Host, or RCFC.
Connection
Type
Type of connection (Private Loop, Public Loop, or Point-Point).
Configured
Rate
Data transfer rate setting in Gbps (for example,
1 Gbps). Auto indicates that the system automatically selects the
rate.
Max Rate
Maximum rate of connection from the port.
Class 2
Indicates whether Fibre Channel service Class 2 is Disabled, Ack 1 or
Ack 0.
VCN
For fabric attached ports, indicates the VLUN change notification
setting. When set to Enabled, notices are generated and sent to the
fabric controller. When set to Disabled, no notification is sent.
132
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Unique Node
WWN
Indicates whether the node's WWN is Enabled or Disabled. Not
available for systems running InForm OS 2.2.4 or lower.
Interrupt
Coalesce
If Disabled, each I/O generates a separate interrupt to the HBA port
driver rather than generating one interrupt for multiple I/O completion.
Not available for systems running InForm OS 2.2.4 or lower.
Lower Pane
The lower pane provides detail information about a selected fibre channel port from the
upper pane. If the fibre channel port is connected to disks, information is presented on a
Summary tab, a Physical Disks tab, and SFP tab. If the fibre channel port is connected to
hosts, information is presented on a Summary tab, Hosts tab, and SFP tab. Each are
discussed in detail in the following:
Fibre_Channel_Summary
Physical_Disks
SFP
Hosts
Fibre Channel Summary
The fibre channel summary is displayed on the Summary tab.
The following information is provided:
Group
Field
Description
General
Location
Port location.
320-200231 Rev A
133
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Resources
Port WWN
Port World Wide Name.
Node WWN
Node World Wide Name.
Type
Indicates whether the port is FC, iSCSI, RCIP, or RCFC.
Rate
Rate that data can be transferred over the port (1 Gbps,
2 Gbps or 4 Gbps). When there is no specified value,
no connection exists.
Connected
Device Type
Type of device that the port is connected to. Free, Disk,
Host, or InServ.
Connected
Device
Name of device that the port is connected to, e.g. host1,
cage0.
Mode
Port firmware mode setting. Ports in Initiator mode are
connected to drive cages and ports in Target mode
export to hosts. Suspended mode is for target ports
that have not yet been initialized by the system (rare).
Peer mode is for Ethernet ports.
State
Current state of the port.
Total Data
Throughput
The throughput in KIB/sec.
Connection
Mode
The type of port connection.
Connection
Type
Connection type or port connection setting (Loop,
Point, or Loop-point). When the port is set to Looppoint, both loop and point-to-point connections are
enabled.
Configured
Rate
Data transfer rate setting (for example,
1 Gbps). Auto indicates that the system automatically
selects the rate.
Max Rate
Maximum rate of connection from the port.
Class 2
Indicates whether Fibre Channel service Class 2 is
Disabled, Ack 1 or Ack 0.
VCN
For fabric attached ports, indicates the VLUN change
notification setting. When set to Enabled, notices are
generated and sent to the fabric controller. When set to
Disabled, no notification is sent.
Settings
134
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Fibre
Channel
Settings
Unique Node
WWN
Indicates whether the node's WWN is Enabled or
Disabled. Not available for systems running InForm OS
2.2.4 or lower.
Interrupt
Coalesce
If Disabled, each I/O generates a separate interrupt to
the HBA port driver rather than generating one interrupt
for multiple I/O completion. Not available for systems
running InForm OS 2.2.4 or lower.
Topology
Type of connection (Private Loop, Public Loop, or
Point-Point).
Class
Identifies which Fibre Channel classes of service are
enabled (2, 3, or 2/3). 2/3 indicates that both Class 2
and Class 3 are enabled.
Adaptor Type
Model of the Fibre Channel adapter that contains the
port (for example, QLOGIC 2302).
Mode Change
Indicates whether port mode change from initiator to
target or vice versa is Allowed or Prohibited. This
setting is configured using the InForm CLI command
controlport.
Hosts
The number of hosts connected to the port. This is only
displayed if the port is connected to hosts.
Physical
Disks
The number of physical disks connected to the port. This
is only displayed if the port is connected to drive cages.
Note: Persona information is not displayed on systems using InForm OS 2.3.1 or higher.
Persona
Number for the current port persona setting.
Vendor
Manufacturer of the host computer’s network adapter.
This value is determined by the port persona.
Adapter Type
Host computer's network adapter. This value is
determined by the port persona.
OS
Host computer’s operating system. This value is
determined by the port persona.
Persona
(not shown)
320-200231 Rev A
135
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Connection
Indicates whether the connection is
Direct Connect or Fabric Attached, as determined by
the port persona.
Modified
When a persona has been edited by a user, Modified
appears in this column. Otherwise, this column remains
blank (--).
Physical Disks
The physical disk port information is presented on the Physical Disks tab.
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
AL_PA
The arbitrated loop physical address of the device.
Device
The type of connected disk.
Position
The position of the disk in the InServ Storage Server.
I/O Error Count
The number of errors on the connected disk.
State
The state of the disk. See System and Component Status Icons.
136
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
SFP
The fibre channel port SFP information is presented on the SFP tab.
The following information is provided:
Group
Field
Description
Position
The location of the SFP within the system.
State
Current condition of the SFP.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer of the SFP.
Part Number
Part number of the SFP.
Serial Number
Serial number of the SFP.
Revision
SFP's revision level.
Max Speed
Maximum speed allowed by the SFP.
Qualified
Displays whether the SFP has been tested and if the SFP
is supported.
TX Disable
Displays whether the transmit laser is disabled.
General
320-200231 Rev A
137
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
DDM
138
TX Fault
Displays whether the transmit laser has a problem.
RX Loss
Displays whether the receive end of the SFP is
experiencing a loss of signal from the host or drive cage.
RX Power Low
Displays whether the SFP receive power is low.
DDM Support
Displays whether the SFP is DDM-capable (Digital
Diagnostic Monitoring).
Column
Description
Type
Identifies the monitored parameters (temperature,
voltage, TX bias, TX power, and RX power).
Unit
The unit of measure used for the monitored parameters.
Value
The current measured value.
Low Threshold
Warning
The manufacturer's recommended lower-limit warning
level.
High Threshold
Warning
The manufacturer's recommended upper-limit warning
level.
Low Alarm
Threshold
The manufacturer's recommended lower-limit alarm
level.
High Alarm
Threshold
The manufacturer's recommended upper-limit alarm
level.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Hosts
The host port information is presented on the Hosts tab.
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
Host ID
The ID of the host.
Host Name
The name of the host.
Domain
The domain in which the host resides.
WWN
The hosts WWN.
Port
The hosts location in N:S:P (Node:Slot:Port) format.
Viewing System RCFC Ports
To view system Remote Copy over Fibre Channel (RCFC) port information:
1. Access the Ports screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the RCFC tab.
320-200231 Rev A
139
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The RCFC tab appears as follows:
The RCFC tab is divided into an upper pane and a lower pane. The upper pane displays a
summary of all RCFC ports in the system. The lower pane displays detailed information
about a single port selected from the upper pane.
Upper_Pane
Lower_Pane
Upper Pane
The upper pane presents the following information:
Column
Description
Position
The port location in node:slot:port format.
State
The state of the port. See System and Component Status Icons.
Mode
Port firmware mode setting. Ports in Initiator mode are connected to
drive cages and ports in Target mode export to hosts. Suspended
mode is for target ports that have not yet been initialized by the system
(rare). Peer mode is for Ethernet ports.
140
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Topology
Type of connection (Private Loop, Public Loop, or Point-Point).
Rate
Rate that data can be transferred over the port (1 Gbps, 2 Gbps or 4
Gbps). When there is no specified value, no connection exists.
Remote
Port WWN
Remote
Node WWN
World Wide Name of the remote port.
World Wide Name of the remote node.
Lower Pane
The lower pane provides detail information about a selected RCFC port from the upper pane.
Information is presented on a Summary tab, and depending on your system setup, an SFP
tab. Each are discussed in detail in the following:
RCFC_Port_Summary
SFP
RCFC Port Summary
The RCFC port summary is displayed on the Summary tab.
320-200231 Rev A
141
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information is provided:
Group
General
Resources
Field
Description
Location
Port location.
Port WWN
Port World Wide Name.
Node WWN
Node World Wide Name.
Type
Indicates whether the port is FC, iSCSI, RCIP, or RCFC.
Rate
Rate that data can be transferred over the port (1 Gbps,
2 Gbps or 4 Gbps). When there is no specified value,
no connection exists.
Connected
Device Type
Type of device that the port is connected to. Free, Disk,
Host, or InServ.
Connected
Device
Name of device that the port is connected to, e.g. host1,
cage0.
Mode
Port firmware mode setting. Ports in Initiator mode are
connected to drive cages and ports in Target mode
export to hosts. Suspended mode is for target ports
that have not yet been initialized by the system (rare).
Peer mode is for Ethernet ports.
State
Current state of the port.
Total Data
Throughput
The throughput in KIB/sec.
Connection
Mode
The type of port connection.
Connection
Type
Connection type or port connection setting (Loop,
Point, or Loop-point). When the port is set to Looppoint, both loop and point-to-point connections are
enabled.
Configured
Rate
Data transfer rate setting (for example,
1 Gbps). Auto indicates that the system automatically
selects the rate.
Max Rate
Maximum rate of connection from the port.
Settings
142
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Fibre
Channel
Settings
Class 2
Indicates whether Fibre Channel service Class 2 is
Disabled, Ack 1 or Ack 0.
VCN
For fabric attached ports, indicates the VLUN change
notification setting. When set to Enabled, notices are
generated and sent to the fabric controller. When set to
Disabled, no notification is sent.
Unique Node
WWN
Indicates whether the node's WWN is Enabled or
Disabled. Not available for systems running InForm OS
2.2.4 or lower.
Interrupt
Coalesce
If Disabled, each I/O generates a separate interrupt to
the HBA port driver rather than generating one interrupt
for multiple I/O completion. Not available for systems
running InForm OS 2.2.4 or lower.
Topology
Type of connection (Private Loop, Public Loop, or
Point-Point).
Class
Identifies which Fibre Channel classes of service are
enabled (2, 3, or 2/3). 2/3 indicates that both Class 2
and Class 3 are enabled.
Adaptor Type
Model of the Fibre Channel adapter that contains the
port (for example, QLOGIC 2302).
Remote Port
WWN
World Wide Name of the remote port.
Remote Node
WWN
World Wide Name of the remote node.
Mode Change
Indicates whether port mode change from initiator to
target or vice versa is Allowed or Prohibited. This
setting is configured using the InForm CLI command
controlport.
Link State
The state of the link.
Note: Persona information is not displayed on systems using InForm OS 2.3.1 or higher.
Persona
(not shown)
Persona
320-200231 Rev A
Number for the current port persona setting.
143
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Vendor
Manufacturer of the host computer’s network adapter.
This value is determined by the port persona.
Adapter Type
Host computer's network adapter. This value is
determined by the port persona.
OS
Host computer’s operating system. This value is
determined by the port persona.
Connection
Indicates whether the connection is
Direct Connect or Fabric Attached, as determined by
the port persona.
Modified
When a persona has been edited by a user, Modified
appears in this column. Otherwise, this column remains
blank (--).
SFP
The RCFC SFP information is presented on the SFP tab.
The following information is provided:
Group
General
144
Field
Description
Position
The location of the SFP within the system.
State
Current condition of the SFP.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer of the SFP.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Part Number
Part number of the SFP.
Serial Number
Serial number of the SFP.
Revision
SFP's revision level.
Max Speed
Maximum speed allowed by the SFP.
Qualified
Displays whether the SFP has been tested and if the SFP
is supported.
TX Disable
Displays whether the transmit laser is disabled.
TX Fault
Displays whether the transmit laser has a problem.
RX Loss
Displays whether the receive end of the SFP is
experiencing a loss of signal from the host or drive cage.
RX Power Low
Displays whether the SFP receive power is low.
DDM Support
Displays whether the SFP is DDM-capable (Digital
Diagnostic Monitoring).
Column
Description
Type
Identifies the monitored parameters (temperature,
voltage, TX bias, TX power, and RX power).
Unit
The unit of measure used for the monitored parameters.
Value
The current measured value.
Low Threshold
Warning
The manufacturer's recommended lower-limit warning
level.
High Threshold
Warning
The manufacturer's recommended upper-limit warning
level.
Low Alarm
Threshold
The manufacturer's recommended lower-limit alarm
level.
DDM
320-200231 Rev A
145
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
High Alarm
Threshold
The manufacturer's recommended upper-limit alarm
level.
Viewing System iSCSI Ports
To view system iSCSI port information:
1. Access the Ports screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the iSCSI tab.
The iSCSI tab appears as follows:
The iSCSI tab is divided into an upper pane and a lower pane. The upper pane displays a
summary of all iSCSI ports in the system. The lower pane displays detailed information
about a single port selected from the upper pane.
Upper_Pane
Lower_Pane
146
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Upper Pane
The upper pane presents the following information:
Column
Description
Position
The port location in node:slot:port format.
MAC
Media Access Control address of the connected device.
State
The state of the port. See System and Component Status Icons.
IP
Address
IP address of the iSCSI port.
Subnet
Mask
Netmask address for the iSCSI interface.
Gateway
The address of a local IP router on the same network as the InServ, used
to forward traffic to destinations beyond the local network.
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit. The greatest amount of data or "packet" size
that can be transferred in one physical frame on a network. MTU setting for
the iSCSI port. The default setting is 1500. When supported by the
network, an MTU value of 9000 should be used.
Lower Pane
The lower pane provides detail information about a selected port from the upper pane.
Information is presented a Summary tab, a Sessions tab, and a Hosts tab. Each are
discussed in detail in the following:
iSCSI_Port_Summary
Sessions
Hosts
320-200231 Rev A
147
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
iSCSI Port Summary
The iSCSI port summary is displayed on the Summary tab.
The following information is provided:
Group
General
148
Field
Description
Position
Port location.
Type
Indicates whether the port is FC, iSCSI, RCIP, or RCFC.
Rate
Rate that data can be transferred over the port (1 Gbps,
2 Gbps or 4 Gbps). When there is no specified value, no
connection exists.
Connected
Device Type
Type of device that the port is connected to. Free, Disk,
Host, or InServ.
Connected
Device
Name of device that the port is connected to, e.g. host1,
cage0.
Mode
Port firmware mode setting. Ports in Initiator mode are
connected to drive cages and ports in Target mode export
to hosts. Suspended mode is for target ports that have
not yet been initialized by the system (rare). Peer mode is
for Ethernet ports.
State
Current state of the port.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Resources
IP
Settings
iSNS
Settings
MAC
The Media Access Control address for the Ethernet
interface.
TPGT
The Target Portal Group Tag for the iSCSI target portal
group.
Total Data
Throughput
The throughput in KIB/sec.
DHCP
For iSCSI ports. Indicates if the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) protocol is enabled.
IP Address
IP address of the iSCSI port.
Gateway
The address of a local IP router on the same network as
the InServ, used to forward traffic to destinations beyond
the local network.
Subnet Mask
Netmask address for the iSCSI interface.
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit. The greatest amount of data
or "packet" size that can be transferred in one physical
frame on a network. MTU setting for the iSCSI port. The
default setting is 1500. When supported by the network,
an MTU value of 9000 should be used.
Rate
Data transfer rate. A value of 0 indicates that no data is
being transferred.
TCP Port
The TCP port number used by the iSCSI card.
Primary IP
Address
Primary Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS) server IP
address. iSNS protocol allows for automated discovery,
management, and configuration of iSCSI.
Secondary IP
Address
Secondary iSNS server IP address.
TCP Port
The port on the iSNS server with which to communicate.
320-200231 Rev A
149
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Sessions
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
Position
Location of the iSCSI port.
IP Address
IP address of the host that initiated the connection.
TSIH
Identifier for the Target Session Identifying Handle (TSIH).
iSCSI
iSCSI name for the associated iSCSI host path.
Connection Count
Number of connections for this session.
Start Time
Time the session started.
Hosts
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
Host ID
Unique number for the port.
Host Name
Name of a host to which the target port connects.
Domain
Name of the domain associated with the host, if applicable.
IP Address
IP address of the iSCSI port.
Viewing System RCIP Ports
To view system Remote Copy over IP (RCIP) port information:
1. Access the Ports screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the RCIP tab.
150
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The RCIP tab appears as follows:
The RCIP tab is divided into an upper pane and a lower pane. The upper pane displays a
summary of all RCIP ports in the system. The lower pane displays detailed information
about a single port selected from the upper pane.
The upper pane provides the following information:
Column
Description
Position
The port location in node:slot:port format.
MAC
Media Access Control address of the connected device.
State
The state of the port. See System and Component Status Icons.
IP
Address
IP address of the RCIP port.
Subnet
Mask
Netmask address for the RCIP interface.
Gateway
The address of a local IP router on the same network as the InServ, used
to forward traffic to destinations beyond the local network.
320-200231 Rev A
151
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit. The greatest amount of data or "packet" size
that can be transferred in one physical frame on a network. MTU setting for
the iSCSI port. The default setting is 1500. When supported by the
network, an MTU value of 9000 should be used.
Rate
Rate that data can be transferred over the port (1 Gbps, 2 Gbps or 4
Gbps). When there is no specified value, no connection exists.
The lower pane provides the following information:
Group
Field
Description
Location
Port location.
Type
Indicates whether the port is FC, iSCSI, RCIP, or RCFC.
Rate
Rate that data can be transferred over the port (1 Gbps,
2 Gbps or 4 Gbps). When there is no specified value, no
connection exists.
Connected
Device Type
Type of device that the port is connected to. Free, Disk,
Host, or InServ.
Connected
Device
Name of device that the port is connected to, e.g. host1,
cage0.
Mode
Port firmware mode setting. Ports in Initiator mode are
connected to drive cages and ports in Target mode export
to hosts. Suspended mode is for target ports that have
not yet been initialized by the system (rare). Peer mode is
for Ethernet ports.
State
Current state of the port.
MAC
The Media Access Control address for the Ethernet
interface.
IP Address
IP address of the RCIP port.
Gateway
The address of a local IP router on the same network as
the InServ, used to forward traffic to destinations beyond
the local network.
Subnet Mask
Netmask address for the RCIP interface.
General
IP
Settings
152
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Resources
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit. The greatest amount of data
or "packet" size that can be transferred in one physical
frame on a network. MTU setting for the iSCSI port. The
default setting is 1500. When supported by the network, an
MTU value of 9000 should be used.
Configured
Rate
The duplex speed, Half or Full.
Duplex
Model of the adapter that contains the port (for example,
Intel PRO/1000MT).
Adapter Type
The TCP port number used by the iSCSI or RCIP card.
Total Data
Throughput
The throughput in KIB/sec.
Viewing SFP Information
To view port SFP information:
1. Access the Ports screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the SFPs tab.
320-200231 Rev A
153
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The SFPs tab appears as follows:
The SFPs tab is divided into an upper pane and a lower pane. The upper pane displays a
summary of all SFPs in the system. The lower pane displays detailed information about a
single SFP selected from the upper pane.
The upper pane provides the following information:
Column
Description
Position
Position of the port in which the SFP is installed.
State
The drive cage state. See System and Component Status Icons.
Manufacturer
The SFP manufacturer.
Part Number
The SFP's part number.
Serial
Number
The SFP's serial number.
Revision
The revision level of the SFP.
154
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Max Speed
Maximum speed allowed by the SFP.
Qualified
Displays whether the SFP has been qualified by 3PAR.
TX Disable
Displays whether the transmit laser is disabled.
TX Fault
Displays whether the transmit laser has a problem.
RX Loss
Displays whether the receive end of the SFP is experiencing a loss of
signal from the host or drive cage.
RX Power
Low
Displays whether the SFP receive power is low.
DDM Support
Displays whether the SFP is DDM-capable (Digital Diagnostic
Monitoring).
The lower pane provides the following information:
Group
General
Field
Description
Position
Position of the port in which the SFP is installed.
State
Current condition of the SFP.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer of the SFP.
Part Number
Part number of the SFP.
Serial Number
Serial number of the SFP.
Revision
SFP's revision level.
Max Speed
Maximum speed allowed by the SFP.
Qualified
Displays whether the SFP has been tested and if the SFP
is supported.
320-200231 Rev A
155
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
DDM
156
TX Disable
Displays whether the transmit laser is disabled.
TX Fault
Displays whether the transmit laser has a problem.
RX Loss
Displays whether the receive end of the SFP is
experiencing a loss of signal from the host or drive cage.
RX Power Low
Displays whether the SFP receive power is low.
DDM Support
Displays whether the SFP is DDM-capable (Digital
Diagnostic Monitoring).
Column
Description
Type
Identifies the monitored parameters (temperature,
voltage, TX bias, TX power, and RX power).
Unit
The unit of measure used for the monitored parameters.
Value
The current measured value.
Low Threshold
Warning
The manufacturer's recommended lower-limit warning
level.
High Threshold
Warning
The manufacturer's recommended upper-limit warning
level.
Low Alarm
Threshold
The manufacturer's recommended lower-limit alarm
level.
High Alarm
Threshold
The manufacturer's recommended upper-limit alarm
level.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing System Port Alerts
To view port alerts:
1. Access the Ports screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the Alerts tab.
The Alerts tab appears as follows:
The Alerts tab is divided into an upper pane and a lower pane. The upper pane displays a
summary of all port alerts. The lower pane displays detailed information about a single alert
selected from the upper pane.
The upper pane provides the following information:
Column
Description
Severity
The severity of the alert. See Alert Severity Indicators.
320-200231 Rev A
157
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
ID
The alert ID.
State
The alert state.
Last Time
The last occurrence of the alert.
Message
A brief description of the alert.
Repeat Count
The number of times the alert has been issued.
First Time
The first occurrence of the alert.
The lower pane provides the following information:
Group
General
Resolved by Event
(if resolved)
158
Field
Description
Severity
The alert severity. See Alert Severity Indicators.
Type
The alert type.
Message
A brief description of the alert.
ID
The alert ID.
State
The alert state.
Message Code
The alert message code.
Sequence
The alert sequence.
Node ID
The controller node ID.
Component
The component for which the alert was issued.
Severity
The alert severity. See Alert Severity Indicators.
Type
The alert type.
Sequence
The alert sequence.
Time
The time the alert was resolved.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Message
A brief description of the alert.
System
The name of the server that generated the alert.
System SN
The server's serial number.
Node ID
The node ID.
Component
The affected system components.
Repeat Count
The number of times the alert was issued.
Last time
The last occurrence of the alert.
First time
The first occurrence of the alert.
Component
Frequency
Configuring Ports
The InForm Management Console allows you to configure the following types of ports:
Fibre Channel
iSCSI
Remote Copy over Fiber Channel (RCFC)
Remote Copy over IP (RCIP)
To learn how to configure ports with the InForm Management Console, see the following:
Configuring Fibre Channel Ports
Configuring iSCSI Ports
Configuring an RCFC Port
Configuring an RCIP Port
320-200231 Rev A
159
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Configuring Fibre Channel Ports
To configure a Fiber Channel port, access the Fibre Channel Port Configuration wizard:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Systems.
2. In the Management Tree, select the system on which you wish to configure the port.
3. In the Common Actions Panel, click Configure FC Port.
The Fibre Channel Port Configuration wizard appears.
4. In the General group box:
a. System list - Select the system on which the port will be configured.
b. Port list - Select the port to be configured as a Fibre Channel port.
5. In the Settings group box:
a. Connection Mode list - Select the mode of the port as Disk, Host, or RCFC.
b. Connection Type list - Select whether the connection type is Loop or Point.
c. Unique Node WWN - Enable or disable the node WWN.
d. Configured Rate - Select Auto (default), 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, or 4 Gbps.
e. VLUN Change Notification (VCN) - Enable or disable the VLUN change
notification.
f. Interrupt Coalesce - Enable or disable the interrupt coalesce.
g. Persona list - (For systems using InForm OS 2.2.4) Select the port persona.
6. Click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Ports
Configuring iSCSI Ports
To configure an iSCSI port, access the iSCSI Port Configuration wizard:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Systems.
2. In the Management Tree, select the system on which you wish to configure the port.
3. In the Common Actions Panel, click Configure iSCSI Port.
The iSCSI Port Configuration wizard appears.
160
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 1. General
1. In the General group box:
a. System list - Select the system on which the port will be configured.
b. Port list - Select the port to be configured as an RCIP port.
2. In the IP Settings group box, perform the following:
a. Select Obtain an IP Address automatically.
b. MTU list - Enter the MTU value.
or
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Select Use the following IP address.
IP Address - Enter the iSCSI port's IP address.
Subnet Mask - Enter the iSCSI port's subnet mask.
Gateway - Enter the iSCSI port's gateway address.
MTU list -Enter the MTU value.
3. Click Finish to complete the iSCSI port configuration, or click Next to enter iSNS
settings.
Step 2. iSNS Settings
1.
2.
3.
4.
Primary IP Address - Enter the Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS) IP address.
Secondary IP Address - Enter the iSNS secondary IP address.
TCP Port - Enter the iSNS TCP port. The default port is 3205.
Click Finish to complete the iSCSI port configuration, or click Next to view the
configuration summary.
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information. When satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Ports
320-200231 Rev A
161
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Configuring a Remote Copy over Fibre
Channel Port
To configure a Remote Copy over Fibre Channel (RCFC) port, access the Fibre Channel
Port Configuration wizard:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Systems.
2. In the Management Tree, select the system on which you wish to configure the port.
3. In the Common Actions Panel, click Configure FC Port.
The Fibre Channel Port Configuration wizard appears.
4. In the General group box:
a. System list - Select the system on which the port will be configured.
b. Port list - Select the port to be configured as a Fibre Channel port.
5. In the Settings group box:
a. Connection Mode list - Select the mode of the port as RCFC.
b. Connection Type list - Select whether the connection type is Loop or Point.
c. Unique Node WWN - Enable or disable the node WWN.
d. Configured Rate - Select Auto (default), 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, or 4 Gbps.
e. VLUN Change Notification (VCN) - Enable or disable the VLUN change
notification.
f. Interrupt Coalesce - Enable or disable the interrupt coalesce.
g. Persona list - (For systems using InForm OS 2.2.4) Select the port persona.
6. Click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Ports
Configuring Fibre Channel Ports
162
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Configuring a Remote Copy over IP Port
To configure a Remote Copy over IP (RCIP) port, access the RCIP Port Configuration
wizard:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Systems.
2. In the Management Tree, select the system on which you wish to configure the port.
3. In the Common Actions Panel, click Configure RCIP Port.
The RCIP Port Configuration wizard appears.
4. In the General group box:
a. System list - Select the system on which the port will be configured.
b. Port list - Select the port to be configured as an RCIP port.
5. In the IP Settings group box:
a. IP Address - Enter the IP address of the RCIP port. The IP address is required.
b. Subnet Mask - Enter the RCIP port's subnet mask. The subnet mask is required.
c. Gateway - Enter the RCIP port's gateway address.
d. MTU list -Enter the MTU value.
e. Speed list - Select the port speed as Auto (default), 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1
Gbps.
f. Duplex list - Select the port's duplex value of either Half or Full.
6. Click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Ports
320-200231 Rev A
163
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Clearing Port Parameters
Note: This operation can only be performed on Remote Copy over Fibre
Channel, Remote Copy over IP, and iSCSI ports.
To clear a port's parameters:
1. Access the ports Summary tab.
2. Right-click the port to be cleared and then click Clear in the menu that appears.
The Clear Port Configuration dialog box appears.
3. Click Yes.
See also:
Viewing Port Summary Information
Resetting a Port
Note: This operation cannot be performed on Remote Copy over IP (RCIP)
ports.
To reset a port:
1. Access the ports Summary tab.
2. Right-click the port you wish to reset and then click Reset in the menu that appears.
The Reset Port dialog box appears.
3. (Optional) Select Reload Firmware if you wish to reload the port firmware upon reset.
4. Click Yes.
See also:
Viewing Port Summary Information
164
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Setting a Port Offline
Note: This operation cannot be performed on Remote Copy over IP ports.
To set a port offline:
1. Access the ports Summary tab.
2. Right-click the port you wish to set offline and then click Set Offline in the menu that
appears.
The Set Offline dialog box appears.
3. Click Yes.
See also:
Viewing Port Summary Information
Initializing a Port
Initializing a Port
Note: This operation can only be performed on Fibre Channel and Remote
Copy over Fibre Channel (RCFC) ports.
To initialize a port:
1. Access the ports Summary tab.
2. Right-click the port you wish to initialize and then click Initialize in the menu that
appears.
The Initialize Port dialog box appears.
3. Click Yes.
See also:
Viewing Port Summary Information
320-200231 Rev A
165
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Synchronizing a Port with the Name
Server
Note: This operation can only be performed on Fibre Channel and Remote
Copy over Fibre Channel (RCFC) ports.
To synchronize a port with the name server:
1. Access the ports Summary tab.
2. Right-click the port you wish to sync and then click Name Server Sync in the menu
that appears.
The Name Server Sync dialog box appears.
3. Click Yes.
See also:
Viewing Port Summary Information
Issuing an LIP Command
Note: This operation can only be performed on Fibre Channel and Remote
Copy over Fibre Channel (RCFC) ports.
To issue an LIP command:
1. Access the ports Summary tab.
2. Right-click the port on which you wish to issue the LIP command and then click Issue
LIP in the menu that appears.
The Issue LIP dialog box appears.
3. Click Yes.
See also:
Viewing Port Summary Information
166
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Enabling a Remote Copy Interface
Note: This operation can only be performed on Remote Copy over IP (RCIP)
ports.
To enable a Remote Copy interface:
1. Access the ports Summary tab.
2. Right-click the disabled Remote Copy port you wish to enable and then click Enable
Interface in the menu that appears.
The Enable Interface dialog box appears.
3. Click Yes.
See also:
Viewing Port Summary Information
Disabling a Remote Copy Interface
Disabling a Remote Copy Interface
Note: This operation can only be performed on Remote Copy over IP (RCIP)
ports.
To disable a Remote Copy interface:
1. Access the ports Summary tab.
2. Right-click the Remote Copy port you wish to disable and then click Disable Interface
in the menu that appears.
The Disable Interface dialog box appears.
3. Click Yes.
See also:
Viewing Port Summary Information
Enabling a Remote Copy Interface
320-200231 Rev A
167
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Pinging a Port
To ping an iSCSI or RCIP port:
1. Access the ports Summary tab.
2. Right-click the iSCSI or RCIP port you wish to ping and then click Ping in the menu that
appears.
The Ping Port wizard appears.
3. In the General group box, enter the following:
a. System - Select a system from the list.
b. Port - Select the port from which you are initiating the ping.
c. Destination IP Address - Enter the destination port's IP address.
d. Count - The number of times (from 1 to 25) to ping the specified IP address.
e. *Wait Time - Enter the wait time in seconds (5 to 30) for each ping.
f. *Packet Size - Enter the number of packets (1 to 65,507) to send with each ping.
g. *(Optional) Select Prevent fragmentation of packets.
4. Click Ping.
*For RCIP ports only.
See also:
Viewing Port Summary Information
Viewing Physical Disks
The Physical Disks screen displays summary information about system physical disks.
To access the Drive Cages screen:
1. Click Systems in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Management Tree, select Physical Disks under the system whose physical disk
information you wish to view.
The Physical Disks screen provides four tabs, Summary, Physical Disks, Spares, and
Alerts. For information about each, see:
Viewing the Physical Disk Summary Tab
Viewing the Physical Disks Tab
Viewing the Physical Disks Spares Tab
Viewing the Physical Disks Alerts Tab
168
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing the Physical Disks Summary Tab
To view the physical disks Summary tab:
1. Access the Physical Disks screen.
2. Click the Summary tab.
The Summary tab appears as follows:
320-200231 Rev A
169
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information is displayed:
Group
Device
Types
170
Field
Description
Device Type
The type of physical disk, either Fibre Channel (FC), Near
Line (NL), or Solid State (SSD).
Device Speed
The disk speed.
NOTE: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for
the drives without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of
the performance difference between the drive and the other drives in the
system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For an SSD drive, the number is to be
treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per
second, bandwidth, and the access time.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Device Size
The disk size in GiB.
Count
The number of each type of disk.
Total Capacity
The total capacity (in GiB) for each type of disk.
Allocated
Percentage
Amount of storage (in percent) consumed by the disk
drive.
Device Type
Select the device type, Fibre Channel (FC), Near Line (NL),
or Solid State Device (SSD), or All. The capacity and
capacity usage of the selected device type is displayed in
graphical form.
Overview
Displays the physical disks' free and used space (in GiB).
Volume Raw
Space
Displays the physical disks' fully provisioned space and
thinly provisioned space.
New Alerts
The number of new physical disk alerts.
Disk State
The current state of the system's physical disks. See
System and Component Status Icons.
Capacity
Health
See also:
Viewing Physical Disks
System and Component Status Icons
Viewing the Physical Disks Tab
To view the Physical Disk tab:
1. Access the Physical Disks screen.
2. Click the Physical Disks tab.
The Physical Disks tab can be filtered to display Summary, Capacity, Chunklet Usage,
Inventory, Environmental, State, and Paths information.
320-200231 Rev A
171
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: In the following sections, where shown, the Device Speed number
does not represent a rotational speed for the drives without spinning media
(SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance difference
between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives,
the number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational
speed. For an SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance
benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the
access time.
Displaying Summary Information
To view physical disk summary information, select Summary from the filtering list. The
summary information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
ID
Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. Physical disks are
numbered contiguously during system installation beginning with 0.
Cage
The drive cage in which the disk resides.
Position
Location of the disk in the format: N:S:P (Node:Slot:Port).
Device Type
Indicates whether a physical disk is a Fibre Channel (FC), Nearline
(NL), or Solid State (SSD) drive.
Device Speed
Speed of the specified disk. (RPM)
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
172
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
State
State of the disk as identified by the kernel. See Error! Hyperlink
reference not valid..
Total Capacity
Total amount of usable storage for this disk drive.
Free Capacity
Amount of free space in the disk drive, regardless of initialized or
not.
Allocated
Capacity
Amount of storage remaining for use on the disk drive.
Allocated
Percentage
Amount of storage (in percent) consumed by the disk drive.
Port A
Location of the primary initiator port to which the disk is attached.
Port B
Location of the secondary initiator port to which the disk is attached.
Displaying Capacity Information
To view physical disk capacity information, select Capacity from the filtering list. The
capacity information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
ID
Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. Physical disks are
numbered contiguously during system installation beginning with 0.
Cage
The drive cage in which the disk resides.
320-200231 Rev A
173
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Position
Location of the disk in the format: N:S:P (Node:Slot:Port).
Device Type
Indicates whether a physical disk is a Fibre Channel (FC), Nearline
(NL), or Solid State (SSD) drive.
Device Speed
Speed of the specified disk. (RPM)
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
State
State of the disk as identified by the kernel. See Error! Hyperlink
reference not valid..
Total Capacity
Total amount of usable storage for this disk drive.
Volumes
Amount of storage on the physical disk being utilized by volumes.
Spares
Amount of storage allocated as spares by the physical disk.
Free
Amount of free space on the physical disk, regardless of initialized or
not.
Unavailable
Amount of unavailable space on the physical disk.
Failed
Amount of failed space on the physical disk.
Displaying Chunklet Usage Information
To view physical disk chunklet usage information, select Chunklet Usage from the
filtering list. The chunklet usage information appears as follows:
174
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
ID
Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. Physical disks are
numbered contiguously during system installation beginning with
0.
Cage
The drive cage in which the disk resides.
Position
Location of the disk in the format: N:S:P (Node:Slot:Port).
Device Type
Indicates whether a physical disk is a Fibre Channel (FC), Nearline
(NL), or Solid State (SSD) drive.
Device Speed
Speed of the specified disk. (RPM)
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
State
State of the disk as identified by the kernel. See Error! Hyperlink
reference not valid..
Total Chunklets
Number of chunklets on the physical disk, excluding those
reserved by the system, such as for the TOC.
Normal Used OK
Number of chunklets allocated to logical disks and containing data
that is currently accessible to the system.
Normal Used Failed
Number of chunklets allocated to logical disks and containing data
but currently inaccessible because they have failed.
Normal Unused Free
Number of chunklets currently free and available for use by logical
disks.
Normal Unused Init
Number of chunklets being cleaned. A chunklet that is clean has
been set to all zeros, and therefore does not contain any data.
Normal Unused
Unavailable
Number of unavailable chunklets.
Normal Unused
Failed
Number of initialized but unallocated chunklets that do not contain
data and have failed.
Spare Used OK
Number of chunklets currently used for sparing and containing
data that is accessible by the system.
Spare Used Failed
Number of chunklets used for sparing but containing data that is
currently inaccessible to the system because they have failed.
320-200231 Rev A
175
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Spare Unused Free
Number of chunklets currently free and available for use, but only
as spares.
Spare Unused Uninit
Number of spare chunklets being cleaned. A chunklet that is clean
has been set to all zeros, and therefore does not contain any data.
Spare Unused Failed
Number of uninitialized chunklets reserved as spares but
currently unusable because they have failed.
Displaying Inventory Information
To view physical disk inventory information, select Inventory from the filtering list. The
inventory information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
ID
Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. Physical disks are
numbered contiguously during system installation beginning with 0.
Cage
The drive cage in which the disk resides.
Position
Location of the disk in the format: N:S:P (Node:Slot:Port).
Device Type
Indicates whether a physical disk is a Fibre Channel (FC), Nearline
(NL), or Solid State (SSD) drive.
Device Speed
Speed of the specified disk. (RPM)
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
176
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
State
State of the disk as identified by the kernel. See Error! Hyperlink
reference not valid..
WWN
The World Wide Name (WWN) assigned to the disk.
Manufacturer
Name of the disk manufacturer (for example, SEAGATE).
Model
Disk model number.
Serial Number
Disk manufacturer's serial number.
Firmware Version
Disk manufacturer's firmware revision tracking string.
Displaying Environmental Information
To view physical disks' environmental information, select Environmental from the
filtering list. The physical disks' environmental information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
ID
Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. Physical disks are
numbered contiguously during system installation beginning with
0.
Cage
The drive cage in which the disk resides.
Position
Location of the disk in the format: N:S:P (Node:Slot:Port).
Device Type
Indicates whether a physical disk is a Fibre Channel (FC),
Nearline (NL), or Solid State (SSD) drive.
320-200231 Rev A
177
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Device Speed
Speed of the specified disk. (RPM)
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
State
State of the disk as identified by the kernel. See Error!
Hyperlink reference not valid..
Correctable Read
Errors
Identified correctable read errors.
Uncorrectable Read
Errors
Identified uncorrectable read errors.
Correctable Write
Errors
Identified correctable write errors.
Uncorrectable Write
Errors
Identified uncorrectable write errors.
Temperature
Internal temperature of the disk.
Displaying State Information
To view physical disk state information, select State from the filtering list. The physical
disk state information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
178
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Column
Description
ID
Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. Physical disks are
numbered contiguously during system installation beginning with 0.
Cage
The drive cage in which the disk resides.
Position
Location of the disk in the format: N:S:P (Node:Slot:Port).
Device Type
Indicates whether a physical disk is a Fibre Channel (FC), Nearline
(NL), or Solid State (SSD) drive.
Device Speed
Speed of the specified disk. (RPM)
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
State
State of the disk as identified by the kernel. See Error! Hyperlink
reference not valid..
State
Description
Description of the drive state.
Displaying Paths Information
Note: Paths information is available for display for systems using InForm OS
version 2.3.1 and later.
To view physical disks' paths information, select Paths from the filtering list. The physical
disks' paths information appears as follows:
320-200231 Rev A
179
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
ID
Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. Physical disks are numbered
contiguously during system installation beginning with 0.
Cage
The drive cage in which the disk resides.
Position
Location of the disk in the format: N:S:P (Node:Slot:Port).
State
State of the disk as identified by the kernel. See Error! Hyperlink
reference not valid..
Path A
The port location of the physical disk's A port in <node>:<slot>:<port>
format.
Path B
The port location of the physical disk's B port in <node>:<slot>:<port>
format.
A State
The state of the A port; Normal, Degraded, New, or Failed.
B State
The state of the B port; Normal, Degraded, New, or Failed.
Order
Displays the order of which node takes over if the primary node fails.
For a two node system, displays the primary/secondary path.
For a four node system, displays the primary/secondary/third/fourth path.
See also:
Viewing Physical Disks
System and Component Status Icons
180
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Physical Disks Spares Tab
Note: In order to view the Spares tab, you must enable spares information in
preferences. See Setting Global Preferences.
To view the physical disks Spares tab:
1. Access the Physical Disks screen.
2. Click the Spares tab.
The Spares tab appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
PD ID
Physical disk ID, as assigned by the system. Physical disks are
numbered contiguously during system installation beginning with 0.
PD Chunklet
Chunklet ID, which indicates the location of the chunklet on the physical
disk. Chunklets are numbered contiguously beginning with 0
LD Name
Name of the logical disk that is using the spare chunklet.
LD Chunklet
The position of the chunklet in the logical disk.
State
State of the chunklet as identified by the kernel. See System and
Component Status Icons.
Usage
Indicates whether the chunklet is reserved by a logical disk or available
for use.
320-200231 Rev A
181
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Media
Current status of the physical disk media for the chunklet (Valid or
Failed).
User
Reserved
The spare status of the chunklet. Yes indicates the chunklet is reserved
as a spare and No indicates a free chunklet that has been selected by
the system as a spare.
Clean
Clean status of the chunklet. Yes indicates that the chunklet is free of
data and ready for use. No indicates that it is currently in use, and
Cleaning denotes that the chunklet is being cleaned of all data (reset to
all zeros).
Initial
Location
Location of the chunklet prior to relocation, expressed as <PD ID> :
<chunklet ID>.
Destination
The destination of the chunklet during relocation, expressed as
<PD ID> : <chunklet ID>.
See also:
Viewing Physical Disks
System and Component Status Icons
Setting Global Preferences
Viewing the Physical Disks Alerts Tab
To view the physical disks Alerts tab:
1. Access the Physical Disks screen.
2. Click the Alerts tab.
The Alerts tab displays physical disk-related alerts for the system. The information
displayed in the physical disks Alerts tab is identical to the information contained in the
systems Alerts tab.
The Alerts tab displays only physical disk-related alerts.
See Viewing System Alerts.
See also:
Viewing Physical Disks
Viewing System Alerts
182
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing System Fans
To view information about system fans:
1. Click Systems in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Management Tree, select Sysetm Fans under the system whose physical disk
information you wish to view.
The System Fans screen appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
System
The InServ Storage Server name.
Fan ID
Fan ID, as assigned by the system.
Primary Node
Node that has primary control over the fan.
Secondary Node
Node that has secondary control over the fan.
State
Current state of the fan. See System and Component Status Icons.
LED
Color of the fan LED.
Fan Speed
Current fan speed.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
System and Component Status Icons
320-200231 Rev A
183
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Working with the Host Manager
Storage servers automatically detect new physically connected host paths and display their
World-Wide Name (WWN) (for Fibre Channel ports) or iSCSI Name (for iSCSI ports) in the
InForm Management Console. However, you can also use the InForm Management Console
to add new WWNs or iSCSI names for unestablished host paths and assign them to a host
before they are physically connected. This allows a "plug-and-play" functionality that avoids
the need for manual reconfiguration after establishing new host paths.
The Host Manager allows you to perform the following:
View Host Information
Create, Edit, and Remove Hosts
Create, Edit, and Remove Host Sets
Note: If you are a domain user, only information within the domain(s) you
have access to, will be visible.
If you are a domain user, you can perform any host task via the Domains node in the
management tree. The information and procedures when working in the Domains node are
identical to those under the InServs node, except information is filtered by domain.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Hosts
The Host Manager allows you to view information summary and detail information about
hosts for all connected systems and a single system's hosts. Additionally, you can also view
information about host paths and host sets.
Overview of All Hosts
Overview of a System's Hosts
Viewing Host Information
Viewing Paths
Viewing Unassigned Paths
Viewing Host Sets
Viewing Host Set Details
184
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Overview of All Hosts
To display an overview of hosts in all connected systems:
1. In the Manager pane, click Hosts.
2. In the Management tree, click InServs.
3. Click the Summary tab.
The overview appears as follows:
The following information is provided:
Group
General
Active
VLUNs
Field
Description
Hosts
The total number of hosts.
Host Sets
The total number of host sets.
Operating
Systems
Provides a breakdown of operating systems. If Host
Explorer is not running, this field displays Unknown.
Average Paths
per Host
The average number of paths per host.
Average per
Host
The average number of VLUNs per host.
Top 10
Select to display only the top ten active VLUNs.
Column
Description
320-200231 Rev A
185
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Capacity
Exported
Host
The host name. Each name listed is a link to the Host
screen.
System
The system on which the host resides.
Active VLUNs
The number of active VLUNs.
Average Virtual
Size
The average virtual size in GiB.
Top 10
Select to display only the top ten hosts with the
greatest capacity exported.
Column
Description
Host
The host name. Each name listed is a link to the Host
screen.
System
The system where the export originated.
Total Exported
Size
The total exported size in GiB.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Overview of a System's Hosts
Viewing Host Information
Overview of a System's Hosts
To access the overview of a single system's hosts:
1. In the Manager pane, click Hosts.
2. In the Management tree, click the InServ Storage Server that contains the hosts you
wish to view.
186
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The systems hosts overview appears as follows:
The following information is provided:
Group
General
Active VLUNs
Field
Description
Hosts
The total number of hosts. This is also a link to the
Host screen.
Host Sets
The total number of host sets. This is also a link to
the Host Sets summary screen.
Operating
Systems
Provides a breakdown of operating systems. If Host
Explorer is not running, this field displays Unknown.
Paths
Total number of paths. This is also a link to the Paths
screen.
Unassigned
Total number of unassigned hosts. This is also a link
to the Unassigned paths screen.
Average per
Host
The average number of active VLUNs.
Host
The host name. Each name listed is a link to the Host
screen.
Active VLUNs
The number of active VLUNs per host.
320-200231 Rev A
187
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Initiators per
Node
Capacity
Exported
Initiators per
Port
Node
The node number.
Initiators
The number of initiators.
Average
Virtual Size
The average virtual size of exported capacity in GiB.
Host
The host name. Each name listed is a link to the Host
screen.
Total Exported
Size
The exported size per host in GiB.
Port
The host port location in node:slot:port format.
Type
The type of host port.
Initiators
The number of initiators.
See also:
Viewing Host Information
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Host Information
To view more in-depth information about hosts for a single system, perform the following:
1. In the Manager pane, click Hosts.
2. In the Management tree, click Hosts under the InServ Storage Server that contains the
hosts you wish to view.
188
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Hosts screen appears as follows:
The Hosts screen is divided into an upper and lower pane. The upper pane provides general
information about all hosts in a system. The lower pane provides more detailed information
about a specific host as selected in the upper pane.
Upper Pane
Information in the upper pane is provided on two tabs, Hosts and Host Explorer.
Hosts_Tab
Host_Explorer_Tab
320-200231 Rev A
189
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Hosts Tab
The Hosts tab can be set to show summary information or descriptor information.
When displaying summary information, the Hosts tab appears as follows:
The following summary information is provided:
Column
Description
Name
The host name.
System
The system on which the host resides.
Domain
The domain in which the host resides.
Set
The host set to which the host belongs.
Host Ports
The host port.
InServ Ports
The InServ Storage Server port on which the host is visible.
Node ID(s)
The node(s) connected to the host.
One of the following host personas:
Persona
Volumes Exported
190
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1 = Generic; UARepLun, SESLun
2 = ALUA; UARepLun, RTPG, SESLun
6 = Generic (legacy)
7 = HPUX (legacy); VolSetAddr
8 = AIX (legacy); NACA
9 = Egenera; SoftInq
10 = ONTAP (legacy); SoftInq
The number of volumes exported from the host.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Total Exported Size
The total size in GiB of exported data.
When displaying descriptor information, the Hosts tab appears as follows:
The following descriptor information is provided:
Column
Description
Name
The host name.
System
The system on which the host resides.
Domain
The domain in which the host resides.
Location
The location of the host.
IP Address
The host's IP address.
Operating System
The operating system type.
Model
The model of the host HBA.
Contact
Any contact information.
Comments
Any notes.
See also:
VLUN_Details
Host_Explorer_Details
320-200231 Rev A
191
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Host Explorer Tab
Note: The Host Explorer tab is displayed for systems running InForm OS
2.3.1 or higher. Additionally, host explorer information is displayed if the host
was created from explorer information.
The Host Explorer tab appears as follows:
The Host Explorer tab provides the following information:
Column
Description
Host Name
The host name.
Reported Host Name
The host name reported by the agent.
System Name (not shown)
The system on which the host resides.
Domain
The domain in which the host resides.
OS
The operating system type.
OS Version
The version of the operating system.
OS Patch
The patch level of the operating system.
IP Address
The host's IP address.
Multipath
The multipathing software in use on the host.
Multipath Version
The version of the multipathing software.
Cluster Software
The host clustering software in use on the host.
Cluster Software Version
The version of the host clustering software.
192
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Cluster ID
The host cluster ID.
Cluster Name
The host cluster name.
See also:
Host_Explorer_Details
Lower Pane
Information in the lower pane elaborates on specific hosts selected from the upper pane.
When selecting a host from the Hosts tab in the upper pane, the lower pane provides two
tabs, Summary and VLUNs, which provide summary and VLUN details about the selected
host. When selecting a host from the Host Explorer tab, the lower pane displays host
explorer details.
Host_Summary_Details
VLUN_Details
Host_Explorer_Details
Host Summary Details
Summary details are displayed in the Summary.
320-200231 Rev A
193
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information is displayed:
Group
Field
Description
Name
The host name.
ID
The host ID.
Domain
The domain in which the host resides.
Set
The number of hosts it the host set.
Host Ports
The host port.
InServ Ports
The InServ Storage Server port on which the host
is visible.
Node ID(s)
The node(s) connected to the host.
Volumes Exported
The number of volumes exported from the host.
Total Exported Size
The total size in GiB of exported data.
Location
The location of the host.
IP Address
The host's IP address.
Operating System
The operating system type.
Model
The model of the host HBA.
Contact
Contact information.
Comments
Any notes.
Column
Description
Host WWN/iSCSI
Name
The host or iSCSI name.
General
Description
Paths
194
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Persona
Type
The host adapter type.
Port
The InServ Storage Server port on which the host
is visible.
iSCSI IP Address
The iSCSI IP address.
Name
The persona name.
ID
The persona ID.
Capabilities
The persona capabilities.
See also:
Hosts_Tab
VLUN_Details
VLUN Details
VLUN details are displayed on three tabs, Active VLUNs, VLUN Templates, and Path
Summary.
Active VLUNs
The Active VLUNs tab appears as follows:
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
System Name (not shown)
The name of the system.
LUN
The exported LUN value.
320-200231 Rev A
195
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Domain
The domain in which the VLUN belongs.
Virtual Volume
The exported volume.
RAID Type
The volume's RAID type.
Host
The name of the host to which the VLUN is exported.
Port
The port to which the path is connected.
Host WWN/iSCSI Name
The host's World-Wide Name (WWN) or iSCSI name.
Exported Size
The size of the VLUN in GiB.
Type
The VLUN type.
See also:
Hosts_Tab
VLUN Templates
The VLUN Templates tab appears as follows:
196
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
System Name (not shown)
The name of the system.
LUN
The exported LUN value.
Domain
The domain in which the VLUN belongs.
Virtual Volume
The exported volume.
RAID Type
The volume's RAID type.
Host
The name of the host to which the VLUN is exported.
Port
The port to which the path is connected.
Type
The VLUN type.
Active VLUNs
The number of active VLUNs.
See also:
Hosts_Tab
Path Summary
The Path Summary tab appears as follows:
320-200231 Rev A
197
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
System Name (not
shown)
The name of the system.
LUN
The exported LUN value.
Virtual Volume
The exported volume.
Host
The name of the host to which the VLUN is exported.
Inactive Ports
WWNs reported by the host, but not visible to the InServ
Storage Server.
InServ Ports
The number of InServ Storage Server ports that can see the
host.
Available Paths
The total number of available distinct paths between the host
and the InServ Storage Server.
Healthy Paths
The number of paths seen by the InServ Storage Server and
reported "good" by the host.
Multipath
The multipathing method in use.
Failed Policy Path
The failed path monitoring method.
Monitoring Interval
The monitoring interval in seconds after which the host checks
for failed paths.
Host Device Name
The device name for the selected VLUN on the host.
See also:
Hosts_Tab
198
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Host Explorer Details
The host explorer detail screen in the lower pane provide detailed information about hosts
selected from the Host Explorer tab in the upper pane. Host explorer details appear as
follows:
The following information is provided:
Group
Field
Description
Host Name
The host name.
ID
The host ID.
Domain
The domain in which the host resides.
Reported Host
Name
The host name reported by the agent.
OS
The operating system type.
OS Patch
The patch level of the operating system.
IP
The host's IP address.
Multipath
The multipathing software in use on the host.
Cluster Software
The host clustering software in use on the host.
General
320-200231 Rev A
199
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Cluster ID
The host cluster ID.
Cluster Name
The host cluster name.
Column
Description
WWN
The WWN of the host HBA.
Vendor
The vendor of the host HBA.
Model
The model of the host HBA.
Firmware Version
The firmware version on the host HBA.
Driver Version
The host driver version.
Speed
The host speed.
Multiple Attach
Indicates if the host WWN is seen on multiple InServ
Storage Server ports.
Paths
See also:
Host_Explorer_Tab
Viewing Paths
To view host paths:
1. In the Manager pane, click Hosts.
2. In the Management tree, click Paths under the InServ Storage Server that contains the
host paths you wish to view.
200
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Paths screen appears as follows:
The Paths screen is divided into an upper pane and a lower pane. The upper pane displays a
summary of all host paths in the system. The lower pane displays detailed information
about a single host path selected from the upper pane.
Upper_Pane
Lower_Pane
Upper Pane
The upper pane of the Paths screen provides the following information:
Column
Description
Host WWN/iSCSI
Name
The host's World-Wide Name (WWN) or iSCSI name.
Host Name
The host name. If no name is displayed, the path is
unassigned.
Domain
The domain in which the host resides.
320-200231 Rev A
201
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Type
The type of path, Fibre Channel or iSCSI.
Port
The port to which the path is connected.
iSCSI IP Address
The IP address if an iSCSI path.
Lower Pane
The lower pane displays detailed information about a single host path selected from the
upper pane and is displayed on three tabs.
Active_VLUNs
VLUN_Templates
Path_Summary
Active VLUNs
The Active VLUNs tab appears as follows:
The following information is provided on the Active VLUNs tab:
Column
Description
LUN
The exported LUN value.
Domain
The domain in which the VLUN belongs.
202
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Virtual Volume
The exported volume.
RAID Type
The volume's RAID type.
Host
The name of the host to which the VLUN is exported.
Port
The port to which the path is connected.
Host WWN/iSCSI Name
The host's World-Wide Name (WWN) or iSCSI name.
Exported Size
The size of the VLUN in GiB.
Type
The VLUN type.
VLUN Templates
The VLUN Templates tab appears as follows:
The following information is provided on the VLUN Templates tab:
Column
Description
LUN
The exported LUN value.
Domain
The domain in which the VLUN belongs.
320-200231 Rev A
203
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Virtual Volume
The exported volume.
RAID Type
The volume's RAID type.
Host
The name of the host to which the VLUN is exported.
Port
The port to which the path is connected.
Type
The VLUN type.
Active VLUNs
The number of active VLUNs.
Path Summary
The Path Summary tab appears as follows:
The following information is provided on the Path Summary tab:
Column
Description
LUN
The exported LUN value.
Virtual Volume
The exported volume.
Host
The name of the host to which the VLUN is exported.
Inactive Ports
WWNs reported by the host, but not visible to the InServ Storage
Server.
204
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
InServ Ports
The number of InServ Storage Server ports that can see the host.
Available Paths
The total number of available distinct paths between the host and
the InServ Storage Server.
Healthy Paths
The number of paths seen by the InServ Storage Server and
reported "good" by the host.
Multipath
The multipathing method in use.
Failed Policy
Path
The failed path monitoring method.
Monitoring
Interval
The monitoring interval in seconds after which the host checks for
failed paths.
Host Device
Name
The device name for the selected VLUN on the host.
See also:
Hosts_Manager
Management Tree
Viewing Unassigned Paths
Viewing Unassigned Paths
To view unassigned host paths:
1. In the Manager pane, click Hosts.
2. In the Management tree, click Unassigned under the Paths node of the InServ
Storage Server that contains the unassigned host paths you wish to view.
320-200231 Rev A
205
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Unassigned paths screen appears as follows:
The information presented in the Unassigned paths screen is split into and upper pane and
lower pane, and is identical to the information displayed in the Paths screen.
See also:
Hosts_Manager
Management Tree
Viewing Paths
206
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Host Sets
To view a summary of host sets:
1. In the Manager pane, click Hosts.
2. In the Management tree, click Host Sets under the Hosts node for InServ Storage
Server that contains the host sets you wish to view.
The host set summary screen appears as follows:
The following information is provided:
Column
Description
Name
The name of the host set. Each name listed is a link to that host sets
details screen.
Domain
The domain in which the host set resides.
Members
The number of hosts belonging to the host set.
Comments
Any notes about the host set.
See also:
Hosts_Manager
Management Tree
Viewing Host Set Details
320-200231 Rev A
207
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Host Set Details
To view host set details:
1. In the Manager pane, click Hosts.
2. In the Management tree, click <host set name> under the Host Sets node for
InServ Storage Server that contains the host set you wish to view.
or
From the host set summary screen, click the name of the host set to view that host set's
details.
The host set details screen appears as follows:
The following information is provided:
Group
General
Active
VLUNs
208
Field
Description
Name
The host set name.
Domain
The domain in which the host set resides.
Hosts
The number of hosts it the host set.
Operating
Systems
Provides a breakdown of operating systems. If Host
Explorer is not running, this field displays Unknown.
Comments
Any notes.
Average per
Host
The average number of active VLUNs.
Column
Description
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Capacity
Exported
Host
The host name. Each name listed is a link to the Host
screen.
System
The system name.
Active VLUNs
The number of active VLUNs per host.
Average
Virtual Size
The average virtual size of exported capacity in GiB.
Column
Description
Host
The host name. Each name listed is a link to the Host
screen.
System
The system name.
Total Exported
Size
The exported size per host in GiB.
The additional tabs, Hosts, Paths, and Host Explorer are explained in the following:
Viewing Host Information
Viewing Paths
Host_Explorer_Tab
Host_Explorer_Details
See also:
Viewing Host Sets
Manager Pane
Management Tree
320-200231 Rev A
209
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Working with Hosts
The Host Manager allows the following operations:
Creating Hosts
Editing Hosts
Removing Hosts
Adding Hosts to Host Sets
Exporting Virtual Volumes
Note: If you are a domain user, only information within the domain(s) you
have access to, will be visible.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Creating Hosts
To create a host, access the Create Host wizard:
1. Click Hosts in the Manager Pane.
2. Click Create Host in the Common Actions Panel.
The Create Host wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the General group box:
a. System - Select the system to create the new host.
b. Domain - Select the domain in which to create the new host. Select <none> if not
applicable.
c. Name - Enter the host name.
d. Set Name - Select the host set in which to create the new host. Select <none> if
not applicable.
e. Persona - Select the host persona.
• 1 = Generic; UARepLun, SESLun
• 2 = ALUA; UARepLun, RTPG, SESLun
• 6 = Generic (legacy)
• 7 = HPUX (legacy); VolSetAddr
210
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
• 8 = AIX (legacy); NACA
• 9 = Egenera; SoftInq
• 10 = ONTAP (legacy); SoftInq
2. (Optional) In the Descriptors group box, enter the description information as desired
in the Location, IP Address, Operating System, Model, Contact, and Comments
fields.
3. Click Next, or click Finish to close the wizard and create the host with the information
entered.
Step 2. Fibre Channel
1. To assign available WWNs:
a. Select one or more WWNs from the Available WWNs list. This list displays WWNs
for all physically connected host paths not already assigned to hosts.
b. Click the left arrow to add the selected WWN(s) to the Assigned WWNs list.
2. To assign new WWNs, enter the WWN(s) for the host in the New WWN text box and
click Assign.
3. Click Next, or click Finish to close the wizard and create the host with the information
entered.
Step 3. iSCSI
1. In the iSCSI Host Paths group box:
a. Select one or more iSCSI names from the Available iSCSI Names list. This list
displays iSCSI names for all physically connected host paths not already assigned
to hosts.
b. Click the left arrow to add the selected iSCSI name(s) to the Assigned iSCSI
Names list.
c. To assign new iSCSI names, enter the iSCSI name(s) in the New iSCSI Name text
box and click Assign.
Note: Rules for the CHAP group box in the following step are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
When clicking the Initiator CHAP check box, CHAP Name is initialized
with the host name (default).
The Target CHAP checKiBox is enabled when the Initiator CHAP check
box is selected.
The CHAP Secret text box is required if a CHAP Name is entered.
Target CHAP is optional.
Target CHAP can only be populated if Initiator CHAP is populated.
2. In the CHAP group box:
a. Click the Initiator CHAP check box. The CHAP Name text box displays the host
name.
b. Enter a secret/password in the CHAP Secret text box.
320-200231 Rev A
211
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
c. If the CHAP Secret text box is entered in hexadecimal, click the Hex check box.
d. If required, click the Target CHAP check box. The CHAP Name text box displays
the InServ Storage Server name.
e. Enter a secret/password in the CHAP Secret text box.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish to close the wizard and
configure the host with the information gathered.
Step 4. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Host Information
Editing Hosts
To edit a host, access the Edit Host wizard:
1. Click Hosts in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Management Tree, click Hosts under the system where the host you wish to edit
resides.
3. Click the Hosts tab in the Hosts screen.
4. Right-click the host you wish to edit and then click Edit Host in the menu that appears.
The Edit Host wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the General group box:
a. Name - Enter a new host name.
b. Persona - Select a new host persona.
2. (Optional) In the Descriptors group box, edit the description information as desired in
the Location, IP Address, Operating System, Model, Contact, and Comments
fields.
3. Click Next, or click Finish to close the wizard and edit the host with the information
entered.
212
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 2. Fibre Channel
1. To assign available WWNs:
a. Select one or more WWNs from the Available WWNs list. This list displays WWNs
for all physically connected host paths not already assigned to hosts.
b. Click the left arrow to add the selected WWN(s) to the Assigned WWNs list.
c. To remove assigned WWNs, select one or more WWNs from the Assigned WWNs
list and click the right arrow.
2. To assign new WWNs, enter the WWN(s) for the host in the New WWN text box and
click Assign.
3. Click Next, or click Finish to close the wizard and edit the host with the information
entered.
Step 3. iSCSI
1. In the iSCSI Host Paths group box:
a. Select one or more iSCSI names from the Available iSCSI Names list. This list
displays iSCSI names for all physically connected host paths not already assigned
to hosts.
b. Click the left arrow to add the selected iSCSI name(s) to the Assigned iSCSI
Names list.
c. To remove assigned iSCSI names, select one or more iSCSI names from the
Assigned iSCSI Names list and click the right arrow.
d. To assign new iSCSI names, enter the iSCSI name(s) in the New iSCSI Name text
box and click Assign.
Note: Rules for the CHAP group box in the following step are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
When clicking the Initiator CHAP check box, CHAP Name is initialized
with the host name (default).
The Target CHAP checKiBox is enabled when the Initiator CHAP check
box is selected.
The CHAP Secret text box is required if a CHAP Name is entered.
Target CHAP is optional.
Target CHAP can only be populated if Initiator CHAP is populated.
2. In the CHAP group box:
a. Click the Initiator CHAP check box. The CHAP Name text box displays the host
name.
b. Enter a new secret/password in the CHAP Secret text box.
c. If the CHAP Secret text box is entered in hexadecimal, click the Hex check box.
d. If required, click the Target CHAP check box. The CHAP Name text box displays
the InServ Storage Server name.
e. Enter a new secret/password in the CHAP Secret text box.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish to close the wizard and edit
the host with the information gathered.
320-200231 Rev A
213
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 4. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Host Information
Creating Hosts
Selecting Multiple Items
Removing Hosts
To remove a host or multiple hosts:
1. Click Hosts in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Management Tree, click Hosts under the system where the host(s) you wish to
remove resides.
3. Click the Hosts tab in the Hosts screen.
4. Select the host(s) you wish to remove.
5. Right-click and then click Remove Host in the menu that appears.
The Remove Host dialog box appears.
6. (Optional) In the Remove Host dialog box, select Remove host even if there are
exported volumes.
7. Click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Host Information
Selecting Multiple Items
214
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Adding Hosts to Host Sets
Hosts can be added to existing host sets.
To add a host or multiple hosts to an existing host set, access the Add to Host Set dialog
box:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Hosts in the Manager Pane.
In the Management Tree, click Hosts under the system where the host(s) resides.
Click the Hosts tab in the Hosts screen.
Select the host(s) you wish to add.
Right-click and then click Add to Host Set in the menu that appears.
The Add to Host Set dialog box appears.
6. Select a host set from the host set list.
7. Click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Host Information
Selecting Multiple Items
Working with Host Sets
Exporting Virtual Volumes
To export a virtual volume, access the Export Virtual Volume wizard:
1. Click Hosts or Provisioning in the Manager Pane.
2. If you are working in the Hosts manager, in the Common Actions panel, click Export
Volume.
3. If you are working in the Provisioning manager:
a. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
b. Right-click the volume you wish to exort.
c. In the menu that appears, click Export.
The Export Virtual Volume wizard appears.
320-200231 Rev A
215
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 1. General
1. Perform the General group box:
a. System - Select a system from the list.
b. Domain - Select a domain from the list. If not applicable, select <none>.
c. Select either Virtual Volume or Virtual Volume Set.
d. From the virtual volume or virtual volume set list, select the volume(s) to export.
2. Click Next.
Step 2. Settings
1. In the Settings group box:
a. Select either Host or Host Set.
b. From the host or host set list, select the host(s) or host set(s) on which the volume
will be exported.
c. Port - Select a port from the list.
d. LUN - Select the Auto checKiBox for the system to select the LUN, or enter a
number.
e. (Optional) To allow overriding of lower priority templates, click the Override lower
priority templates checKiBox.
f. (Optional) To prevent the storage server from issuing a Loop Initialization Primitive
(LIP), or Registered State Change notification (RSCN), click After export, do not
issue VLUN change notification (no LIP or RSCN).
2. Click Finish if you wish to export the volume(s) as configured, or click Next to view the
summary.
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Selecting Multiple Items
Viewing Virtual Volumes
Creating VLUNs
216
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Working with Host Sets
Host sets allow users to create a name for a group of hosts. This allows a virtual volume to
be exported to the same set of hosts.
When working with host sets, the following operations are available:
Creating Host Sets
Editing Host Sets
Removing Host Sets
Exporting Virtual Volumes
Note: If you are a domain user, only information within the domain(s) you
have access to, will be visible.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Creating Host Sets
To create a host set, access the Create Host Set wizard:
1. Click Hosts in the Manager Pane.
2. Click Create Host Set in the Common Actions Panel.
The Create Host Set wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the General group box:
a. System - Select the system to create the new host set.
b. Domain - Select the domain in which to create the new host set. Select <none> if
not applicable.
c. Name - Enter the host set name.
d. Comments - Enter any notes.
2. Click Next, or click Finish to close the wizard and create the host set with the
information entered.
320-200231 Rev A
217
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 2. Hosts
1. To assign available hosts:
a. Select one or more WWNs from the Available hosts list.
b. Click the down arrow to add the selected WWN(s) to the Assigned hosts list.
2. Click Next, or click Finish to close the wizard and create the host set with the
information entered.
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Host Information
Editing Host Sets
To edit a host set, access the Edit Host Set wizard:
1. Click Hosts in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Management Tree, click Host Sets under the system where the host set you
wish to edit resides.
3. in the Host Sets screen, right-click the host set you wish to edit and then click Edit in
the menu that appears.
The Edit Host Set wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the General group box:
a. Name - Enter a new host set name.
b. Comments - Enter any notes.
2. Click Next, or click Finish to close the wizard and edit the host set with the information
entered.
218
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 2. Hosts
1. To assign available hosts:
a. Select one or more WWNs from the Available hosts list.
b. Click the down arrow to add the selected WWN(s) to the Assigned hosts list.
c. To remove hosts from the Assigned hosts list, select one or more hosts from the
Assigned host list and click the up arrow.
2. Click Next, or click Finish to close the wizard and editthe host set with the information
entered.
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Host Information
Creating Host Sets
Removing Host Sets
To remove a host set or multiple host sets:
1. Click Hosts in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Management Tree, click Host Sets under the system where the host set(s) you
wish to remove resides.
3. in the Host Sets screen, select the host set(s) you wish to remove.
4. Right-click and then click Remove in the menu that appears.
The Remove Host Set wizard appears.
5. Click OK.
320-200231 Rev A
219
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Host Information
Selecting Multiple Items
Exporting Virtual Volumes
To export a virtual volume, access the Export Virtual Volume wizard:
1. Click Hosts or Provisioning in the Manager Pane.
2. If you are working in the Hosts manager, in the Common Actions panel, click Export
Volume.
3. If you are working in the Provisioning manager:
a. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
b. Right-click the volume you wish to exort.
c. In the menu that appears, click Export.
The Export Virtual Volume wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. Perform the General group box:
a. System - Select a system from the list.
b. Domain - Select a domain from the list. If not applicable, select <none>.
c. Select either Virtual Volume or Virtual Volume Set.
d. From the virtual volume or virtual volume set list, select the volume(s) to export.
2. Click Next.
Step 2. Settings
1. In the Settings group box:
a. Select either Host or Host Set.
b. From the host or host set list, select the host(s) or host set(s) on which the volume
will be exported.
c. Port - Select a port from the list.
d. LUN - Select the Auto checKiBox for the system to select the LUN, or enter a
number.
e. (Optional) To allow overriding of lower priority templates, click the Override lower
priority templates checKiBox.
220
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
f.
(Optional) To prevent the storage server from issuing a Loop Initialization Primitive
(LIP), or Registered State Change notification (RSCN), click After export, do not
issue VLUN change notification (no LIP or RSCN).
2. Click Finish if you wish to export the volume(s) as configured, or click Next to view the
summary.
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Selecting Multiple Items
Viewing Virtual Volumes
Creating VLUNs
Working with the Provisioning Manager
The Provisioning Manager allows you to perform all provisioning tasks for your InServ
Storage Server. These tasks include:
Creating, editing, and maintaining virtual volumes, virtual volume sets, and virtual
volume templates, as well as exporting virtual volumes.
Creating,editing, and maintaining Common Provisioning Groups (CPGs) and CPG
templates.
Additionally, the Provisioning manager provides several ways to monitor the health of your
system's provisioning.
To learn how to use the Provisioning manager, see the following topics:
Viewing Provisioning for All Systems
Viewing Provisioning for a Single System
Working with Common Provisioning Groups
Working with Virtual Volumes
Working with Virtual Volume Sets
Working with VLUNs
Working with Templates
320-200231 Rev A
221
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: If you are a domain user, only information within the domain(s) you
have access to, will be visible.
If you are a domain user, you can perform any provisioning task via the Domains node in
the management tree. The information and procedures when working in the Domains node
are identical to those under the InServs node, except information is filtered by domain.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Provisioning for All Systems
To view provisioning for all connected systems:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Management Tree, click InServs.
The Provisioning screen appears in the Management Window.
The Provisioning screen provides information on two tabs, Summary and Alerts.
222
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Summary Tab
The Summary tab displays the general provisioning of all connected systems. The following
information is included:
Column
Description
System
The InServ Storage Server name.
Virtual Volumes
The number of virtual volumes on the system. Each value is a
link to that system's Virtual Volume screen.
Virtual Volume Sets
The number of virtual volume sets on the system.
Virtual Volume
Logical Capacity
The total amount of virtual volume logical capacity in GiB.
Virtual Volume Raw
Capacity
The total amount of virtual volume raw capacity in GiB.
CPGs
The number CPGs on the system. Each value is a link to that
system's CPGs screen.
CPG Logical Capacity
The total amount of CPG logical capacity in GiB.
CPG Raw Capacity
The total amount of CPG raw capacity in GiB.
The bottom row of the table displays the column totals.
320-200231 Rev A
223
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Alerts Tab
The Alerts tab displays provisioning-related alerts for all connected systems. The
information displayed in the provisioning Alerts tab is identical to the information contained
in the systems Alerts tab.
The Provisioning Alerts tab displays only provisioning-related alerts.
See Viewing System Alerts.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing Provisioning for a Single System
To view the provisioning for a single system:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Management Tree, click the system under the InServs node you wish to view.
The Provisioning screen appears in the Management Window, and provides information on
three tabs, Summary, Tasks, and Alerts.
224
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Summary Tab
The Summary tab provides information about all provisioning in the system.
The following information is displayed:
Group
General
Field
Description
CPGs
The total number of CPGs.
Virtual
Volumes
The total number of virtual volumes.
Base
Volumes
The total number of base volumes.
Thinly
Provisioned
The total number of thinly provisioned virtual volumes.
Fully
Provisioned
The total number of fully provisioned virtual volumes.
Virtual
Copies
The total number of virtual copies.
Physical
Copies
The total number of physical copies.
320-200231 Rev A
225
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
System
Capacity
Remote Copy
Volumes
The total number of Remote Copy virtual volumes.
Expired
Volumes
The total number of expired virtual volumes.
Unexported
Volumes
The total number of unexported virtual volumes.
Active VLUNs
The total number of active exported virtual volumes.
Device Type
Select the device type, Fibre Channel (FC), Near Line (NL),
or Solid State Device (SSD). The capacity and capacity
usage of the selected device type is displayed in graphical
form. You can also select All to display capacity and
capacity usage for all device types.
Virtual Volumes
Health
New Alerts
The number of new virtual volume alerts.
State
The current state of the system's virtual volumes. See the
Alert/Task/Connection Pane for new alerts.
CPGs
226
New Alerts
The number of new CPG alerts.
State
The current state of the system's CPGs. See the
Alert/Task/Connection Pane for new alerts.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Tasks Tab
The Tasks tab displays information about running and completed system provisioning tasks.
The Tasks tab is divided into an upper pane and lower pane. The upper pane displays a
summary of provisioning tasks for the storage server. The lower pane displays details about
a selected task from the upper pane.
Upper_Pane
Lower_Pane
Upper Pane
The upper pane provides the following information:
Column
Description
ID
The task ID.
Type
The task type.
Name
The virtual volume name on which the task was performed.
Status
The status of the task.
320-200231 Rev A
227
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Progress
A graphical representation of the percentage of the task that has
completed.
Start Time
The time the task started.
Finish
Time
The time the task finished.
Duration
The amount of time the task took to complete.
Lower Pane
The lower pane provides the following information:
Group
Field
Description
System
Name
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
System SN
The serial number of the InServ Storage Server.
ID
The task ID.
Type
The task type.
Name
The virtual volume name on which the task was
performed.
Status
The status of the task.
Progress
A graphical representation of the percentage of the task
that has completed.
Start Time
The time the task started.
Finish Time
The time the task finished.
Duration
The amount of time the task took to complete.
General
228
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Detailed
Status
Displays any details about the task as the task is running.
Alerts Tab
The Alerts tab displays provisioning-related alerts for the system. The information
displayed in the provisioning Alerts tab is identical to the information contained in the
systems Alerts tab, except for the following:
The provisioning Alerts tab displays only provisioning-related alerts.
See Viewing System Alerts.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Alert/Task/Connection Pane
Alert Severity Indicators
Viewing System Alerts
Working with Common Provisioning
Groups
The Provisioning Manager allows you to perform all tasks associated with system
Common Provisioning Groups (CPGs), from their creation, to their maintenance, and
ultimately, their removal. The following topics are provided:
Viewing Common Provisioning Groups
Creating Common Provisioning Groups
Editing a Common Provisioning Group
Creating Similar Common Provisioning Groups
Saving a Common Provisioning Group as a Template
Compacting a Common Provisioning Group
Removing a Common Provisioning Group
320-200231 Rev A
229
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Common Provisioning Groups
To view a system's Common Provisioning Groups (CPGs):
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Management Tree, click CPGs under the system node you wish to view.
The Provisioning-CPGs screen appears in the Management Window, provides information
about system CPGs on three tabs, Summary, CPGs, and Alerts, which are explained in the
following topics:
Viewing the Common Provisioning Group Summary Tab
Viewing the Common Provisioning Group CPGs Tab
Viewing the Common Provisioning Group Alerts Tab
Viewing the Common Provisioning Group
Summary Tab
To view the Common Provisioning Group (CPG) Summary tab:
1. Access the CPG screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the Summary tab.
230
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Summary tab provides information about CPGs in the system.
The following information is displayed:
Group
General
Health
Field
Description
CPGs
The total number of CPGs.
FC
The total number of Fibre Channel (FC) drives.
NL
The total number of Near Line (NL) drives.
SSD
The total number of Solid State Devices (SSD).
Virtual
Volumes
The total number of virtual volumes.
Thinly
Provisioned
The total number of thinly provisioned virtual volumes.
Fully
Provisioned
The total number of fully provisioned virtual volumes.
Alerts
The total number of alerts.
320-200231 Rev A
231
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
State
The current state. See System and Component Status
Icons.
Device Type
Select the device type, Fibre Channel (FC), Near Line (NL),
or Solid State Device (SSD). The capacity and capacity
usage of the selected device type is displayed in graphical
form. You can also select All to display capacity and
capacity usage for all device types.
Logical
Select to display logical capacity.
Raw
Select to display raw capacity.
Capacity
Allocated
Displays mapped and unmapped allocated space.
Mapped
Space
Displays the distribution of mapped space.
Viewing the CPGs Tab
To view the CPGs tab:
1. Access the CPG screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the CPGs tab.
The CPGs tab presents information in an upper pane and lower pane.
Upper_Pane
Lower_Pane
Upper Pane
The table displayed in the upper pane can be filtered to display Summary, Allocation,
Capacity, Raw Capacity, and Alert information.
Displaying Summary Information
To view summary information, select Summary from the filtering list. The summary
information appears as follows:
232
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Name
The volume name.
System
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
Domain
The domain to which the virtual volume belongs.
State
The state of the system.
RAID
The volume's RAID type.
Total Capacity
The CPG's total capacity in GiB.
Allocation
The percentage
Growth Warning
The CPG's growth size (in GiB) at which a warning alert is
generated.
Growth Limit
The size limit (in GiB) after which the CPG will not grow.
Total VV Count
The total number of VVs using the CPG.
User Space Usage
The total number of VVs whose user space is using the CPG.
Copy Space Usage
The total number of VVs whose copy space is using the CPG.
Growth Increment
The CPG grow size in GB.
320-200231 Rev A
233
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Allocation
Warning
If enabled, the allocation warning percentage.
Displaying Allocation Information
To view allocation information, select Allocation from the filtering list. The allocation
information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Name
The volume name.
System
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
Domain
The domain to which the virtual volume belongs.
State
The state of the system.
RAID
The volume's RAID type.
Growth Warning
The CPG's growth size (in GiB) at which a warning alert is
generated.
Growth Limit
The size limit (in GiB) after which the CPG will not grow.
Device Type
The type of physical disk, either Fibre Channel (FC), Near Line
(NL), or Solid State (SSD).
Device Speed
The disk speed.
NOTE: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
234
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
Growth Increment
Allocation Warning
Availability
The CPG grow size in GB.
If enabled, the allocation warning percentage.
The availability of Disk, Port, Cage, or Mag.
Displaying Capacity Information
To view capacity information, select Capacity from the filtering list. The capacity
information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Name
The volume name.
System
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
Domain
The domain to which the virtual volume belongs.
State
The state of the system.
Total Capacity
The CPG's total capacity in GiB.
User Size
The user space size in GiB.
Used User Size (%)
The amount of used user space in GiB.
320-200231 Rev A
235
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Copy Size
The copy space size in GiB.
Used Copy Size
The amount of used copy space in GiB.
Admin Size
The total amount of admin space in GiB.
Used Admin Size
The total amount of used admin space in GiB.
Displaying Raw Capacity Information
To view raw capacity information, select Raw Capacity from the filtering list. The raw
capacity information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Name
The volume name.
System
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
Domain
The domain to which the virtual volume belongs.
State
The state of the system.
Total Raw Capacity
The CPG's total raw capacity in GiB.
Raw User Size
The raw user space size in GiB.
Raw Used User Size
The amount of used raw user space in GiB.
236
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Raw Copy Size
The raw copy space size in GiB.
Raw Used Copy Size
The amount of used raw copy space in GiB.
Raw Admin Size
The total amount of raw admin space in GiB.
Raw Used Admin Size
The total amount of used raw admin space in GiB.
Displaying Alert Information
To view alert information, select Alerts from the filtering list. The alert information
appears as follows:
320-200231 Rev A
237
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Lower Pane
The lower pane displays detailed information about a single CPG selected from the upper
pane. The lower pane displays information on six tabs, Summary, Settings, Virtual
Volumes, Logical Disks, Layout, and Alerts.
Summary Tab
The lower pane's Summary tab appears as follows:
The following information is displayed on the Summary tab:
Group
General
238
Field
Description
Name
The Common Provisioning Group's (CPG's) name.
Domain
The domain in which the CPG resides.
Total VV
Count
The total number of TPVVs using the CPG.
Fully
Provisioned
The number of fully provisioned volumes.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Health
Thinly
Provisioned
The number of thinly provisioned volumes.
User Space
The total number of VVs whose user space is using the
CPG.
Copy Space
The total number of VVs whose copy space is using the
CPG.
New Alerts
The number of new CPG alerts.
State
The current state of the CPG. See Alert Severity Indicators.
State
Description
Description of the CPG's state.
Device Type
Select the device type, Fibre Channel (FC), Near Line (NL),
or Solid State Device (SSD). The capacity and capacity
usage of the selected device type is displayed in graphical
form.
Logical
Select to display logical capacity.
Raw
Select to display raw capacity.
Capacity
Allocated
Displays mapped and unmapped allocated space.
Mapped
Space
Displays the distribution of mapped space.
320-200231 Rev A
239
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Settings Tab
The lower pane's Settings tab appears as follows:
The following information is displayed on the lower pane's Settings tab:
Group
Copy
Growth
Admin
Growth
240
Field
Description
Growth Increment
The Common Provisioning Group's (CPG's) copy
space grow size in GiB.
Growth Warning
If enabled, the CPG's growth size (in GiB) at which
a warning alert is generated.
Growth Limit
If enabled, the size limit (in GiB) after which the
CPG will not grow.
Growth Increment
The admin space grow size in GiB.
Growth Warning
If enabled, the admin space's growth size (in GiB)
at which a warning alert is generated.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Copy Space
Allocation
Growth Limit
If enabled, the size limit (in GiB) after which the
admin space will not grow.
Device Type
Fibre Channel (FC), Nearline (NL), or Solid State
(SSD) drives.
Device Speed
Speed of the disk in K RPM.
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for
the drives without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation
of the performance difference between the drive and the other drives in the
system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a
performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an SSD drive, the
number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
and
Admin
Space
Allocation
RAID Type
The CPG's RAID type.
Availability
The availability of Disk, Port, Cage, or Mag.
Set Size
The set size.
Step Size
The number of contiguous bytes in KIB.
Disk Filter
The filtering used for the disks making up the CPG.
Virtual Volumes Tab
The Virtual Volumes tab displays the virtual volumes that make up the selected CPG. The
Virtual Volumes tab appears as follows:
320-200231 Rev A
241
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Name
The name of the virtual volume.
System
The system on which the volume resides.
Domain
The domain in which the volume resides.
State
The current state of the volume. See System and Component
Status Icons.
Type
The type of virtual volume.
Provisioning
Indicates if the selected volume is fully provisioned or a thinly
provisioned virtual volume.
User CPG
The name of the Common Provisioning Group (CPG) from which
user space is provisioned.
Copy CPG
The name of the CPG from which copy space is allocated.
RAID
The RAID type of the disk.
Device Type
The disk type, Fibre Channel (FC), Nearline (NL), or Solid State
(SSD).
Device Speed
The speed of the disk.
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
242
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Logical Disks Tab
The Logical Disks tab appears as follows:
The following information is displayed on the Logical Disks tab:
Column
Description
Name
The name of the logical disk.
System
The system on which the logical disk resides.
Domain
The domain in which the logical disk resides.
State
The current state of the logical disk. See System and Component
Status Icons.
Device Type
The disk type, Fibre Channel (FC),Nearline (NL), or Solid State
(SSD).
Device Speed
The speed of the disk in K RPM.
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
RAID
The logical disk's RAID type.
Total Capacity
The total logical disk size in GiB.
Used Capacity
The amount of logical disk space used in GiB.
320-200231 Rev A
243
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Write Through
Indicates if the logical disk is in write-through mode.
Mapped to VV
Indicates if the logical disk is mapped to a virtual volume.
Usage
Indicates the purpose for with the logical disk is used.
Owner
Specifies the owning nodes.
Layout Tab
The Layout tab displays the distribution of CPGs across physical disks and which chunklets
are used by each CPG. The Layout tab appears as follows:
Alerts Tab
The Alerts tab displays a table containing alert information for a single CPG selected from
the upper pane. The information displayed is identical to the information displayed in
system alerts table. See Viewing System Alerts for additional information.
244
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Common Provisioning Group
Layout Tab
To view the Common Provisioning Group (CPG) Layout tab:
1. Access the CPG screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the Layout tab.
The CPGs Layout tab displays the distribution of CPGs across physical disks and which
chunklets are used by each CPG.
Viewing the Common Provisioning Group
Alerts Tab
To view the Common Provisioning Group (CPG) Alerts tab:
1. Access the CPG screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the Alerts tab.
The Alerts tab displays CPG-related alerts for the system. The information displayed in the
provisioning Alerts tab is identical to the information contained in the systems Alerts tab.
The Provisioning Alerts tab displays only CPG-related alerts.
See Viewing System Alerts.
320-200231 Rev A
245
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Creating Common Provisioning Groups
To create a Common Provisioning Group (CPG) access the Create CPG wizard:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Common Actions panel, click Create CPG.
The Create CPG wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. System - Select the system where the CPG will be created.
2. Domain - Select the domain in which the CPG will reside. Select <none> if not
applicable.
3. Name - Enter a name for the new CPG.
4. Template - Select the CPG template to apply to the new CPG. If not required, select
<none>.
5. Allocation Warning - Click the Enabled checkbox and enter the appropriate
percentage.
6. Growth Increment - Click the Enabled checkbox, enter the appropriate value, and
click the unit list (MiB, GiB, TiB)
7. Growth Warning - Click the Enabled checkbox, enter the appropriate value, and click
the unit list (MiB, GiB, TiB).
8. Growth Limit - Click the Enabled checkbox, enter the appropriate value, and click the
unit list (MiB, GiB, TiB).
9. Device Type - Select FC for Fibre Channel drives, NL for Nearline drives, or SSD for
Solid State drives.
10. Device Speed - Select the appropriate speed or <default>.
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for
the drives without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of
the performance difference between the drive and the other drives in the
system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For an SSD drive, the number is to be
treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per
second, bandwidth, and the access time.
11. RAID Type - Select the RAID type for the volume.
12. Set Size - Select the set size.
13. If you wish to configure the CPG's allocation settings and list of disks, select Show
advanced options panel(s).
14. Click Next to configure Allocation Settings (if enabled), or click Finish.
246
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 2. Allocation Settings
1. From the Availability list, select Cage (default), Port, or Magazine.
2. From the Set Size list, select default, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 512 KiB. The default value
depends on raid type and device type used. If FC or NL drives are used, the step size
defaults to 256 KiB for RAID 0 and RAID 1, and 128 KiB for RAID 5. If SSD drives are
used, the step size defaults to 32 KiB for RAID 0 and RAID 1, and 64 KiB for RAID 5.
For RAID 6, the default is a function of the set size.
3. From the Preferred Chunklets list, select Fast (default) or Slow.
4. Click Next to use the Disk Filter (if enabled), or click Finish.
Step 3. Disk Filter
The Disk Filter displays the physical disks used. Pattern displays the parameters of the
disks used.
To modify the list of disks used:
1. Click the Filter icon.
2. See Filtering for details.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 4. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Filtering
Editing a Common Provisioning Group
To edit a Common Provisioning Group (CPG):
1. Access the CPGs tab.
2. Right-click the CPG you wish to edit.
3. In the menu that appears, click Edit.
The Edit CPG wizard appears.
320-200231 Rev A
247
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 1. General
1. Name - Enter a new name for the CPG (31 character maximum).
2. Growth Increment* - Click the Enabled checkbox, enter the appropriate value, and
click the unit list (MiB, GiB, TiB)
3. Growth Warning* - Click the Enabled checkbox, enter the appropriate value, and
click the unit list (MiB, GiB, TiB).
4. Growth Limit* - Click the Enabled checkbox, enter the appropriate value, and click
the unit list (MB, GB, TB).
5. Device Type - Select FC for Fibre Channel drives, NL for Nearline drives, or SSD for
Solid State drives.
6. Device Speed - Select the appropriate speed or <default>.
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for
the drives without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of
the performance difference between the drive and the other drives in the
system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to both a performance
measure and actual rotational speed. For an SSD drive, the number is to be
treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into account in I/O per
second, bandwidth, and the access time.
7. RAID Type - Select the RAID type for the volume.
8. Set Size - Select the set size.
9. If you wish to configure the CPG's allocation settings and list of disks, select Show
advanced options panel(s).
10. Click Next to configure Allocation Settings (if enabled), or click Finish.
*Appears only if the Show advanced options panel(s) is selected.
Step 2. Allocation Settings
1. From the Availability list, select Cage (default), Port, or Magazine.
2. From the Set Size list, select default, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 512 KiB. The default value
depends on raid type and device type used. If FC or NL drives are used, the step size
defaults to 256 KiB for RAID 0 and RAID 1, and 128 KiB for RAID 5. If SSD drives are
used, the step size defaults to 32 KiB for RAID 0 and RAID 1, and 64 KiB for RAID 5.
For RAID 6, the default is a function of the set size.
3. From the Preferred Chunklets list, select Fast (default) or Slow.
4. Click Next to use the Disk Filter (if enabled), or click Finish.
Step 3. Disk Filter
The Disk Filter displays the physical disks used. Pattern displays the parameters of the
disks used.
To modify the list of disks used:
248
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
1. Click the Filter icon.
2. See Filtering for details.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 4. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Viewing the CPGs Tab
Filtering
Creating Similar Common Provisioning
Groups
You can create new Common Provisioning Groups (CPGs) based on existing CPGs. To do
this:
1. Access the CPGs tab.
2. Right-click the CPG you wish to use as the basis for your new CPG.
3. In the menu that appears, click Create Similar.
The Create CPG wizard appears.
4. Follow the instructions in Creating Common Provisioning Groups.
See also:
Viewing the CPGs Tab
Creating Common Provisioning Groups
Saving a Common Provisioning Group as
a Template
You can save a Common Provisioning Groups (CPGs) as a template. To do this:
1. Access the CPGs tab.
2. Right-click the CPG you wish to save as a template.
320-200231 Rev A
249
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
3. In the menu that appears, click Save as Template.
The Create CPG Template wizard appears.
4. Follow the instructions in Creating Common Provisioning Group Templates.
See also:
Viewing the CPGs Tab
Creating Common Provisioning Group Templates
Compacting a Common Provisioning
Group
To compact a Common Provisioning Group (CPG):
1. Access the CPGs tab.
2. Right-click the CPG you wish to compact.
3. In the menu that appears, click Compact CPG.
The Compact CPG wizard appears.
4. System - Select the system on which on the CPG resides.
5. Domain - Select the domain in which the CPG resides. Select <none> if not
applicable.
6. CPG - Select the CPG to compact.
7. (Optional) Enable the Trim only option, which removes unused logical disk space
without performing any region moves.
8. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing the CPGs Tab
Removing a Common Provisioning Group
To remove a Common Provisioning Group (CPG):
1. Access the CPGs tab.
2. Right-click the CPG you wish to remove.
3. In the menu that appears, click Remove.
250
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Remove CPG dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing the CPGs Tab
Working with Virtual Volumes
The Provisioning Manager allows you to perform all tasks associated with system
volumes, from their creation, to their maintenance, and ultimately, their removal. The
following topics are provided:
Viewing Virtual Volumes
Creating Virtual Volumes
Editing Virtual Volumes
Creating Similar Virtual Volumes
Saving a Virtual Volume as a Template
Exporting Virtual Volumes
Creating a Remote Copy Group from Virtual Volumes
Adding a Virtual Volume to a Remote Copy Group
Moving a Virtual Volume to Another Domain
Removing Virtual Volumes
Tuning Virtual Volumes
Restarting Tuning a Virtual Volume
Rolling Back a Tuned Virtual Volume
Viewing Virtual Volumes
To view a system's virtual volumes:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Management Tree, click Virtual Volumes under the system node you wish to
view.
320-200231 Rev A
251
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Provisioning-Virtual Volumes screen appears in the Management Window, provides
information about system virtual volumes on three tabs, Summary, Virtual Volumes, and
Alerts, which are explained in the following topics:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Summary Tab
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Alerts Tab
Note: In addition to providing comprehensive information about a system's
virtual volumes, the InForm Management Console also allows you to view the
same type of information for specific types of volumes. Each child node under
the Virtual Volumes node in the Management Tree is a specific type of
virtual volume. These include Remote Copy volumes, Exported volumes,
Unexported volumes, volumes By Device Type, and volumes By RAID
Type. The format and type of the information displayed is identical to that
displayed under the Virtual Volumes node.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Summary
Tab
To view the virtual volume Summary tab:
1. Access the virtual volume screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the Summary tab.
252
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Summary tab provides information about virtual volumes in the system.
The following information is displayed:
Group
Field
Description
Virtual
Volumes
The total number of virtual volumes.
Base Volumes
The total number of base volumes.
Thinly
Provisioned
The number of thinly provisioned virtual volumes.
Fully
Provisioned
The number of fully provisioned virtual volumes
Virtual Copies
The total number of virtual copies.
Physical
Copies
The total number of physical copies.
Remote Copy
Volumes
The total number of Remote Copy virtual
volumes.
Expired
Volumes
The total number of expired virtual volumes.
General
320-200231 Rev A
253
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Unexported
Volumes
The total number of unexported virtual volumes.
New Alerts
The total number of new alerts.
State
The current state. See System and Component
Status Icons.
Capacity
Device Type
Select the device type, Fibre Channel (FC), Near
Line (NL), or Solid State Device (SSD). The
capacity and capacity usage of the selected
device type is displayed in graphical form.
Virtual Volume
Allocation
Displays the allocation of admin, copy, and user space.
Thinly Provisioned
Savings (Base
Volumes)
Displays the amount of space saved through thinly provisioned
virtual volumes.
Health
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Virtual Volumes
System and Component Status Icons
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
To view the Virtual Volumes tab:
1. Access the virtual volume screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the Virtual Volumes tab.
The Virtual Volumes tab presents information in an upper pane and lower pane.
Upper_Pane
Lower_Pane
254
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Upper Pane
The table in the upper pane can be filtered to display Summary, Allocation, Capacity, Raw
Capacity, History, and Remote Copy information.
Displaying Summary Information
To view summary information, select Summary from the filtering list. The summary
information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Name
The volume name.
System
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
Domain
The domain to which the virtual volume belongs.
State
The state of the system.
Type
Indicates if the volume is a base volume, physical copy, or virtual
copy.
Provisioning
Indicates if the volume is fully (Full) or thinly provisioned (TPVV).
RAID
The volume's RAID type.
Virtual Size
The size of the volume in GiB.
Reserved User
Size
The size of the volume's reserved user space in GiB.
320-200231 Rev A
255
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Used User Size
The percentage of used user space.
Reserved Copy
Size
The size of the volume's reserved copy space.
Used Copy Size
The percentage of used copy space.
Exported To
The host to which the volume is exported. A red entry indicates an
inactive VLUN. A blue entry indicates an active VLUN.
Virtual volumes are displayed in a parent/child hierarchy. A volume displayed with a plus
(+) icon indicates that there are virtual or physical copies (children) of that volume. The
child volumes can be displayed by clicking the plus icon.
Displaying Allocation Information
To view allocation information, select Allocation from the filtering list. The allocation
information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Name
The volume name.
System
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
Domain
The domain to which the virtual volume belongs.
State
The state of the system.
Type
Indicates if the volume is a base volume, physical copy, or virtual
copy.
256
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Provisioning
Indicates if the volume is fully (Full) or thinly provisioned (TPVV).
User CPG
The name of the Common Provisioning Group (CPG) used for user
space.
Copy CPG
The name of the Common Provisioning Group (CPG) used for copy
space.
RAID
The volume's RAID type.
Device Type
The type of physical disk, either Fibre Channel (FC), Near Line
(NL), or Solid State (SSD).
Device Speed
The disk speed.
NOTE: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
Displaying Capacity Information
To view capacity information, select Capacity from the filtering list. The capacity
information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Name
The volume name.
System
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
Domain
The domain to which the virtual volume belongs.
320-200231 Rev A
257
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
State
The state of the system.
Type
Indicates if the volume is a base volume, physical copy, or
virtual copy.
Provisioning
Indicates if the volume is fully (Full) or thinly provisioned
(TPVV).
RAID
The volume's RAID type.
Virtual Size
The size of the volume in GiB.
Reserved User Size
The size of the volume's reserved user space in GiB.
Used User Size
The amount of used user space in GiB.
Used User Size
(%)
The percentage of used user space.
Reserved Copy
Size
The size of the volume's reserved copy space in GiB.
Used Copy Size
The amount of used copy space in GiB.
Used Copy Size
(%)
The percentage of used copy space.
Total Reserved
The total amount of reserved space in GiB.
258
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Displaying Raw Capacity Information
To view raw capacity information, select Raw Capacity from the filtering list. The raw
capacity information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Name
The volume name.
System
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
Domain
The domain to which the virtual volume belongs.
State
The state of the system.
Type
Indicates if the volume is a base volume, physical copy, or
virtual copy.
Provisioning
Indicates if the volume is fully (Full) or thinly provisioned
(TPVV).
RAID
The volume's RAID type.
Virtual Size
The size of the volume in GiB.
Raw Reserved User
Size
The size of the volume's reserved raw user space in GiB.
Reserved User Size
The size of the volume's reserved user space in GiB.
Raw Reserved Copy
Size
The size of the volume's reserved raw copy space in GiB.
Reserved Copy Size
The size of the volume's reserved copy space in GiB.
320-200231 Rev A
259
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Total Raw Reserved
The total amount of reserved raw space in GiB.
Total Reserved
The total amount of reserved space in GiB.
Displaying History Information
To view history information, select History from the filtering list. The history information
appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Name
The volume name.
System
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
Domain
The domain to which the virtual volume belongs.
State
The state of the system.
Type
Indicates if the volume is a base volume, physical copy, or
virtual copy.
Creation Date
The date and time the volume was created.
Retention Time
If set during creation, the date and time the volume is
retained.
Expiration Time
If set during creation, The date and time the volume
expires.
Copy Space Calculation
Date
The date and time copy space was calculated.
Comments
Any comments about the volume.
260
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Displaying Remote Copy Information
To view Remote Copy information, select Remote Copy from the filtering list. The Remote
Copy information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Name
The volume name.
System
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
Domain
The domain to which the virtual volume belongs.
State
The state of the system.
Type
Indicates if the volume is a base volume, physical copy, or virtual copy.
Provisioning
Indicates if the volume is fully (Full) or thinly provisioned (TPVV).
RAID
The volume's RAID type.
Exported To
The host to which the volume is exported. A red entry indicates an
inactive VLUN. A blue entry indicates an active VLUN.
RC Status
The volume's Remote Copy status.
RC Group
The Remote Copy group to which the volume belongs.
Writable
LUNs
Writable LUNs, if any.
320-200231 Rev A
261
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Lower Pane
The lower pane displays detailed information about a single virtual volume selected from the
upper pane. The lower pane displays information on eight tabs, Summary, Settings,
Advanced, Logical Disks, SCSI Reservations, VLUNs, Layout, and Alerts.
Note: The Advanced, Logical Disks, and SCSI Reservations tabs are advanced
features and are only displayed if they have been set to display in your
preferences. See Setting Global Preferences.
Summary Tab
The lower pane's Summary tab appears as follows:
The following information is displayed in the lower pane's Summary tab:
Group
General
262
Field
Description
Name
The virtual volume's name.
ID
The virtual volume ID.
Domain
The domain in which the volume resides.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Set
The name of the volume set to which the
volume belongs.
Type
The type of volume (Base, Physical Copy,
Virtual Copy).
Provisioning
Indicates if the selected volume is fully
provisioned or a thinly provisioned virtual
volume.
WWN
The volume's World Wide Name (WWN).
Copy Of
The volume from which the selected volume
was copied.
Copies
The number of copies of the selected volume.
Mode
Indicates if the volume is read-only (RO) or
read-write (RW).
Exported To
Health
The host on which the volume is exported.
Writable LUNS
Indicates if the LUN is writable from the host.
Master
The master node of the volume (responsible for
assigning mapping zones).
New Alerts
The number of new virtual volume alerts.
State
The current state of the virtual volume. See
Alert Severity Indicators.
State
Description
Description of the virtual volume's state.
Device Type
Select the device type, Fibre Channel (FC),
Near Line (NL), or Solid State Device (SSD).
The capacity and capacity usage of the selected
device type is displayed in graphical form.
Logical
Select to display logical capacity.
Raw
Select to display raw capacity.
Capacity
Virtual Volume
Allocation
Displays the allocation of the volume's admin, copy, and user space.
Thinly Provisioned
Savings (Base
Displays the amount of space saved through thinly provisioned
virtual volumes.
320-200231 Rev A
263
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Volumes)
History
Creation Date
The volume's creation date.
Retention Time
The volume's retention time, if any.
Expiration Time
The volume's expiration date, if any.
Copy Space
Calculation
Date
The date on which the volume's copy space was
calculated.
Comments
Any comments about the volume.
Settings Tab
The lower pane's Settings tab appears as follows:
The following information is displayed in the lower pane's Settings tab:
Group
User Space
Provisioning
264
Field
Description
Provisioning
Indicates if the selected volume is fully
provisioned or a thinly provisioned virtual
volume.
CPG
The name of the Common Provisioning Group
(CPG) from which user space is provisioned.
Allocation Warning
If enabled, the allocation warning percentage.
Allocation Limit
If enabled, the allocation limit.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
User Space
Allocation
Copy Space
Provisioning
Admin Space
Allocation
320-200231 Rev A
Device Type
The disk type, Fibre Channel (FC), Nearline
(NL), or Solid State (SSD).
Device Speed
The speed of the disk.
NOTE: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed
for the drives without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough
estimation of the performance difference between the drive and the other
drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to
both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an SSD
drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark
that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access
time.
RAID Type
The RAID type of the disk.
Configured
Availability
The availability characteristics.
Availability
The availability of Disk, Port, Cage, or Mag.
Set Size
The set size.
Step Size
The number of contiguous bytes in KIB.
Provisioning
Indicates if the selected volume is fully
provisioned or a thinly provisioned virtual
volume.
CPG
The name of the Common Provisioning Group
(CPG) from which user space is provisioned.
Allocation Warning
If enabled, the allocation warning percentage.
Allocation Limit
If enabled, the allocation limit.
Device Type
The disk type, Fibre Channel (FC), Nearline (NL),
or Solid State (SSD).
Device Speed
The speed of the disk.
NOTE: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed
for the drives without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough
estimation of the performance difference between the drive and the other
drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number corresponds to
both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an SSD
drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark
that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access
time.
RAID Type
The RAID type of the disk.
Configured
Availability
The availability characteristics.
Availability
The availability of Disk, Port, Cage, or Mag.
Set Size
The set size.
265
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step Size
The number of contiguous bytes in KIB.
Advanced Tab
The lower pane's Advanced tab appears as follows:
The following information is displayed in the lower pane's Advanced tab:
Group
Field
Description
System Volume
Indicates if the volume is a system volume.
Allow stale snapshots
Indicates if stale snapshots are allowed.
Restrict export to one
host
Indicates if exporting is restricted to only one
host.
Zero-fill on partially
written data pages
Indicates if the zero-fill on partially written
data pages policy is enabled.
Sectors Per Track
The number of sectors per track.
Heads Per Cylinder
The number of heads per cylinder.
Sector Size
The size of each sector in MB.
Copy
The number of copy zones.
Free Copy
The number of free copy zones.
Admin
The number of admin space zones.
Free Admin
The number of free admin space zones.
Policies
Geometry
Zones
266
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Logical Disks Tab
The lower pane's Logical Disks tab appears as follows:
The following information appears in the lower pane's Logical Disks tab:
Column
Description
Name
The name of the logical disk.
System
The system on which the logical disk resides.
Domain
The domain in which the logical disk resides.
State
The current state of the logical disk. See System and Component
Status Icons.
Device Type
The disk type, Fibre Channel (FC),Nearline (NL), or Solid State
(SSD).
Device Speed
The speed of the disk in K RPM.
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
RAID
The logical disk's RAID type.
Total Capacity
The total logical disk size in GiB.
Used Capacity
The amount of logical disk space used in GiB.
320-200231 Rev A
267
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Write Through
Indicates if the logical disk is in write-through mode.
Mapped to VV
Indicates if the logical disk is mapped to a virtual volume.
Usage
Indicates the purpose for with the logical disk is used.
Owner
Specifies the owning nodes.
SCSI Reservations Tab
The SCSI Reservations tab provides two sub-tabs, SCSI-2 Reservations and SCSI-3
Reservations.
SCSI-2 Reservations Tab
The SCSI-2 Reservations tab appears as follows:
The following information is displayed in the SCSI-2 Reservations tab:
Column
Description
System
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
Domain
The domain to which the virtual volume belongs.
Virtual Volume
The name of the virtual volume.
Host
The name of the host with the SCSI-2 reservation.
Port
The port that received the SCSI-2 reservation.
Owner
The host's World-Wide Name (WWN).
268
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Third Party
Indicates whether the SCSI reservation is a third party reservation.
Third Party WWN
The WWN of the initiator that has a third party reservation.
SCSI-3 Reservations Tab
The SCSI-3 Reservations tab appears as follows:
The following information is displayed in the SCSI-3 Reservations tab:
Column
Description
System
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
Domain
The domain to which the virtual volume belongs.
Virtual Volume
The name of the virtual volume.
Host
The name of the host with the SCSI-3 reservation.
Port
The port with the SCSI-3 reservation.
Owner
The host's World-Wide Name (WWN).
Reservation Key
The service action reservation key.
Type
The persistent reservation type.
Persistent
Whether the reservation type is persistent.
Generation
the generation number of the most recent reservation.
320-200231 Rev A
269
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
VLUNs Tab
The lower pane's VLUNs tab provides three sub-tabs, Active LUNs, VLUN Templates, and
Path Summary.
Active LUNs Tab
The Active LUNs tab appears as follows:
The following information is displayed in the Active VLUNs tab:
Column
Description
System Name
Name of the InServ Storage Server configured by the system
administrator.
LUN
The exported Logical Unit Number (LUN) value.
Domain
The domain in which the VLUN resides.
Virtual Volume
The name of the exported virtual volume.
RAID Type
The VLUN RAID type.
Host
The name of the host to which the VLUN is exported.
Port
The InServ Storage Server port on which the VLUN is
exported.
Host WWN/iSCSI
Name
The logical disk's RAID type.
Exported Size
The VLUN's exported size.
Type
The VLUN type, Host Sees, Host In Set, or Matched Set.
270
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
VLUN Templates Tab
The VLUN Templates tab appears as follows:
The following information is displayed in the VLUNs Templates tab:
Column
Description
System Name
Name of the InServ Storage Server configured by the system
administrator.
LUN
The exported Logical Unit Number (LUN) value.
Domain
The domain in which the VLUN resides.
Virtual
Volume
The name of the exported virtual volume.
RAID Type
The VLUN RAID type.
Host
The name of the host to which the VLUN is exported.
Port
The InServ Storage Server port on which the VLUN is exported.
Type
The VLUN type, Host Sees, Host In Set, or Matched Set.
Active LUNs
The number of active LUNs.
320-200231 Rev A
271
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Path Summary Tab
The Path Summary tab appears as follows:
The following information is displayed in the Path Summary tab:
Column
Description
System Name
Name of the InServ Storage Server configured by the system
administrator.
LUN
The exported Logical Unit Number (LUN) value.
Virtual Volume
The name of the exported virtual volume.
Host
The name of the host to which the VLUN is exported.
Host Ports
The number of host WWNs visible to the InServ Storage Server.
Inactive Ports
WWNs reported by the host, but not visible to the InServ Storage
Server.
InServ Ports
The number of InServ Storage Server ports that can see the host.
Available Paths
The total number of distinct, available paths between the host and
the InServ Storage Server.
Healthy Paths
The number of paths seen by the InServ Storage Server reported
good by the host.
Multipath
The used multi-pathing method.
Failed Path
Policy
The failed path monitoring method.
Monitoring
Interval
The monitoring interval in seconds after which the host checks for
failed paths.
Host Device
Name
The device name for the selected VLUN on the host.
272
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Layout Tab
The Layout tab shows how chunklets are used by the selected logical disk. The lower
pane's Layout tab appears as follows:
See Viewing the Logical Disks Layout Screen for additional information.
Alerts Tab
The Alerts tab displays a table containing alert information for a single volume selected
from the upper pane. The information displayed is identical to the information displayed in
system alerts table. See Viewing System Alerts for additional information.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Virtual Volumes
System and Component Status Icons
Viewing System Alerts
320-200231 Rev A
273
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Layout Tab
To view the virtual volume Layout tab:
1. Access the virtual volume screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the Layout tab.
The virtual volumes Layout screen allows you to see the distribution of virtual volumes
across physical disks and which chunklets are used by each virtual volume.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Virtual Volumes
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Alerts Tab
To view the virtual volume Alerts tab:
1. Access the virtual volume screen.
2. In the Management Window, click the Alerts tab.
The Alerts tab displays virtual volume-related alerts for the system. The information
displayed in the provisioning Alerts tab is identical to the information contained in the
systems Alerts tab.
The Alerts tab displays only virtual volume-related alerts.
See Viewing System Alerts.
274
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Virtual Volumes
Viewing System Alerts
Creating Virtual Volumes
To create a virtual volume access the Create Virtual Volume wizard:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Common Actions panel, click Create Virtual Volume.
The Create Virtual Volume wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the General group box:
a. System - Select the system where the volume will be created.
b. Domain - Select the domain in which the volume will reside. Select <none> if not
applicable.
c. Name - Enter a name for the new volume.
d. Template - Select the volume template to apply to the new volume. If not
required, select <none>.
e. Comments - Enter any notes about the volume.
2. In the User Space group box:
a. Size - Enter the size of the volume. Change the Size list value to MiB or TiB as
applicable. The default is GiB.
Note: Minimum permitted volume size is 256MiB, maximum is 16TiB.
b. Provisioning - Select how the volume will be provisioned. Selecting Fully
Provisioned from CPGs results in the creation of a base volume. Selecting Thinly
Provisioned results in the creation of a Thinly Provisioned Virtual Volume (TPVV).
c. If you selected Fully Provisioned from CPGs, select a CPG from the CPG list.
d. If you selected Thinly Provisioned:
320-200231 Rev A
275
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
i.
ii.
CPG - Select a CPG.
In the Allocation Warning and Allocation Limit text boxes, enter the
appropriate information. If you do not want these options used, uncheck the
Enabled box.
3. In the Grouping group box:
a. Count - Enter the number of volumes to create.
b. Set Name - Select a virtual volume set name or if not required, select <none>.
4. If you wish to configure the virtual volume's policies and geometry, select Show
advanced options panel(s).
5. Click Next to configure Copy Space Settings, or click Finish.
Step 2. Copy Space Settings
1. From the CPG list, select the CPG to use for copy space, or select <none>.
2. In the Allocation Warning and Allocation Limit text boxes, enter the appropriate
information. If you do not want these options used, uncheck the Enabled box.
3. Click Next to configure Policies and Geometry (if enabled) or to view the summary
information, or click Finish.
Step 3. Policies & Geometry
1. In the Policies group box enable any of the following:
a. Allow stale snapshots.
b. Restrict export to one host.
c. (For TPVVs only) Zero-fill on partially written data pages.
d. Retention Time. If enabled, enter a value in the corresponding text box and then
select either day(s) or hour(s).
e. Expiration Time. If enabled, enter a value in the corresponding text box and the
select either day(s) or hour(s).
2. In the Geometry group box:
a. Enter the number of sectors per track, or accept the default value.
b. Enter the number of heads per cylinder, or accept the default value.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 4. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
276
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Creating Virtual Volumes (Fully
Provisioned from Physical Disks)
To create virtual volumes directly from physical disks, access the Create Virtual Volume
wizard:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Common Actions panel, click Create Virtual Volume.
The Create Virtual Volume wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the General group box:
a. System - Select the system where the volume will be created.
b. Domain - Select the domain in which the volume will reside. Select <none> if not
applicable.
c. Name - Enter a name for the new volume.
d. Template - Select the volume template to apply to the new volume. If not
required, select <none>.
e. Comments - Enter any notes about the volume.
2. In the User Space group box:
a. Size - Enter the size of the volume. Change the Size list value to MiB or TiB as
applicable. The default is GiB.
Note: Minimum permitted volume size is 256MiB, maximum is 16TiB.
b. Provisioning - Select Fully Provisioned from PDs.
c. Device Type - Select FC for Fibre Channel drives, NL for Nearline drives, or SSD
for Solid State drives.
d. Device Speed - Select the appropriate speed or <default>.
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational
speed for the drives without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a
rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive and
the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number
corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed.
For an SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance
benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and
the access time.
320-200231 Rev A
277
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
e. RAID Type - Select the appropriate RAID type for the volume.
f. Set Size - Select the appropriate set size.
3. In the Grouping group box:
a. Count - Enter the number of volumes to create.
b. Set Name - Select a virtual volume set name or if not required, select <none>.
4. If you wish to configure the virtual volume's allocation settings, disk information, and
policies and geometry, select Show advanced options panel(s).
5. Click Next to configure Copy Space Settings, or click Finish.
Step 2. Copy Space Settings
1. From the CPG list, select the CPG to use for copy space, or select <none>.
2. In the Allocation Warning and Allocation Limit text boxes, enter the appropriate
information. If you do not want these options used, uncheck the Enabled box.
3. Click Next to configure Allocation Settings (if enabled) or to view the summary
information, or click Finish.
Step 3. Allocation Settings
1. From the Availability list, select Cage, Port, or Magazine.
2. From the Step Size list, select default, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 512 KiB. The default value
depends on raid type and device type used. If FC or NL drives are used, the step size
defaults to 256 KiB for RAID 0 and RAID 1, and 128 KiB for RAID 5. If SSD drives are
used, the step size defaults to 32 KiB for RAID 0 and RAID 1, and 64 KiB for RAID 5.
For RAID 6, the default is a function of the set size.
3. Select the Preferred Chunklets as Fast or Slow.
4. Click Next to enter disk information, or click Finish.
Step 4. Disk Filter
The Disk Filter displays the physical disks used to create the volume. Pattern displays the
parameters of the disks used.
To modify the list of disks used:
1. Click the Filter icon.
2. See Filtering for filtering details.
3. Click Next to configure Policies and Geometry, or click Finish.
Step 5. Policies & Geometry
1. In the Policies group box enable any of the following:
a. Allow stale snapshots.
b. Restrict export to one host.
278
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
c. (For TPVVs only) Zero-fill on partially written data pages.
d. Retention Time. If enabled, enter a value in the corresponding text box and then
select either day(s) or hour(s).
e. Expiration Time. If enabled, enter a value in the corresponding text box and the
select either day(s) or hour(s).
2. In the Geometry group box:
a. Enter the number of sectors per track, or accept the default value.
b. Enter the number of heads per cylinder, or accept the default value.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 6. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Common Actions Panel
Editing Virtual Volumes
To edit a virtual volume, access the Edit Virtual Volume wizard.
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Right-click the volume you wish to edit.
3. In the menu that appears, click Edit.
The Edit Virtual Volume wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the General group box:
a. Name - Enter a new name for the volume.
b. Comments - Enter any notes about the volume.
2. In the User Space group box:
a. Size - Enter the size of the volume. Change the Size list value to MiB or TiB as
applicable. The default is GiB.
320-200231 Rev A
279
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: Minimum permitted volume size is 256MiB, maximum is 16TiB.
b. If the volume is Fully Provisioned from CPGs, select a CPG from the CPG list.
c. If the volume is Thinly Provisioned, in the Allocation Warning and Allocation
Limit text boxes, enter the appropriate information. If you do not want these
options used, uncheck the Enabled box.
3. If you wish to edit the virtual volume's policies and geometry, select Show advanced
options panel(s).
4. Click Next to configure Copy Space Settings, or click Finish.
Step 2. Copy Space Settings
1. From the CPG list, select the CPG to use for copy space, or select <none>.
2. In the Allocation Warning and Allocation Limit text boxes, enter the appropriate
information. If you do not want these options used, uncheck the Enabled box.
3. Click Next to configure Policies and Geometry (if enabled) or to view the summary
information, or click Finish.
Step 3. Policies & Geometry
1. In the Policies group box enable any of the following:
a. Allow stale snapshots.
b. Restrict export to one host.
c. Zero-fill on partially written data pages.
d. Retention Time. If enabled, enter a value in the corresponding text box and then
select either day(s) or hour(s).
e. Expiration Time. If enabled, enter a value in the corresponding text box and the
select either day(s) or hour(s).
2. In the Geometry group box:
a. Enter the number of sectors per track, or accept the default value.
b. Enter the number of heads per cylinder, or accept the default value.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 4. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
280
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Editing Virtual Volumes (Fully
Provisioned from Physical Disks)
To edit a virtual volume, access the Edit Virtual Volume wizard.
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Right-click the volume you wish to edit.
3. In the menu that appears, click Edit.
The Edit Virtual Volume wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the General group box:
a. Name - Enter a new name for the volume.
b. Comments - Enter any notes about the volume.
2. In the User Space group box:
a. Size - Enter the size of the volume. Change the Size list value to MiB or TiB as
applicable. The default is GiB.
Note: Minimum permitted volume size is 256MiB, maximum is 16TiB.
b. If the volume is Fully Provisioned from PDs:
i.
Device Type - Select FC for Fibre Channel drives, NL for Nearline drives, or
SSD for Solid State drives.
ii.
Device Speed - Select the appropriate speed or <default>.
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational
speed for the drives without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a
rough estimation of the performance difference between the drive and
the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the number
corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed.
For an SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance
benchmark that takes into account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and
the access time.
iii.
iv.
RAID Type - Select the appropriate RAID type for the volume.
Set Size - Select the appropriate set size.
320-200231 Rev A
281
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
3. If you wish to edit the virtual volume's allocation settings, disk information, and policies
and geometry, select Show advanced options panel(s).
4. Click Next to configure Copy Space Settings, or click Finish.
Step 2. Copy Space Settings
1. From the CPG list, select the CPG to use for copy space, or select <none>.
2. In the Allocation Warning and Allocation Limit text boxes, enter the appropriate
information. If you do not want these options used, uncheck the Enabled box.
3. Click Next to configure Allocation Settings (if enabled) or to view the summary
information, or click Finish.
Step 3. Policies & Geometry
1. In the Policies group box enable any of the following:
a. Allow stale snapshots.
b. Restrict export to one host.
c. (For TPVVs only) Zero-fill on partially written data pages.
d. Retention Time. If enabled, enter a value in the corresponding text box and then
select either day(s) or hour(s).
e. Expiration Time. If enabled, enter a value in the corresponding text box and the
select either day(s) or hour(s).
2. In the Geometry group box:
a. Enter the number of sectors per track, or accept the default value.
b. Enter the number of heads per cylinder, or accept the default value.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 4. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
282
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Creating Similar Virtual Volumes
You can create new virtual volumes based on existing virtual volumes. To do this:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Right-click the volume you wish to use as the basis for your new volume.
3. In the menu that appears, click Create Similar.
The Create VV wizard appears.
4. Follow the instructions in Creating Virtual Volumes.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Creating Virtual Volumes
Saving a Virtual Volume as a Template
You can save a virtual volume as a template. To do this:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Right-click the volume you wish save as a template.
3. In the menu that appears, click Save As Template.
The Create VV Template wizard appears.
4. Follow the instructions in Creating Virtual Volume Templates.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Creating Virtual Volume Templates
320-200231 Rev A
283
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Exporting Virtual Volumes
To export a virtual volume, access the Export Virtual Volume wizard:
1. Click Hosts or Provisioning in the Manager Pane.
2. If you are working in the Hosts manager, in the Common Actions panel, click Export
Volume.
3. If you are working in the Provisioning manager:
a. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
b. Right-click the volume you wish to exort.
c. In the menu that appears, click Export.
The Export Virtual Volume wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. Perform the General group box:
a. System - Select a system from the list.
b. Domain - Select a domain from the list. If not applicable, select <none>.
c. Select either Virtual Volume or Virtual Volume Set.
d. From the virtual volume or virtual volume set list, select the volume(s) to export.
2. Click Next.
Step 2. Settings
1. In the Settings group box:
a. Select either Host or Host Set.
b. From the host or host set list, select the host(s) or host set(s) on which the volume
will be exported.
c. Port - Select a port from the list.
d. LUN - Select the Auto checKiBox for the system to select the LUN, or enter a
number.
e. (Optional) To allow overriding of lower priority templates, click the Override lower
priority templates checKiBox.
f. (Optional) To prevent the storage server from issuing a Loop Initialization Primitive
(LIP), or Registered State Change notification (RSCN), click After export, do not
issue VLUN change notification (no LIP or RSCN).
2. Click Finish if you wish to export the volume(s) as configured, or click Next to view the
summary.
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
284
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Selecting Multiple Items
Viewing Virtual Volumes
Creating VLUNs
Creating a Remote Copy Group from
Virtual Volumes
Note: 3PAR Remote Copy requires a 3PAR Remote Copy license. For
additional information about the license, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts
Guide.
To create a Remote Copy group from virtual volumes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
Select the volumes from which you wish to create a Remote Copy group.
Right-click your selection.
In the menu that appears, click Create Remote Copy Group.
The Create Remote Group wizard appears.
5. Follow the directions in Creating Remote Copy Groups under Working with the Remote
Copy Manager.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Selecting Multiple Items
Creating Remote Copy Groups
320-200231 Rev A
285
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Adding a Virtual Volume to a Remote
Copy Group
Note: 3PAR Remote Copy requires a 3PAR Remote Copy license. For
additional information about the license, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts
Guide.
To add a virtual volume to a Remote Copy group:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
Select the volume(s) you wish to add to a Remote Copy group.
Right-click the selection.
In the menu that appears, click Add to Remote Copy Group.
The Add Volumes to Remote Group wizard appears.
4. Select the Remote Copy group(s) from the Group list.
5. (Optional) Select Start group after adding volumes if you wish to immediately start
the Remote Copy group after adding the selected volume.
6. (Optional) Select Do not perform initial sync if you do not want the Remote Copy
group to synchronize with its backup group after adding the volume.
7. In the Source Volume on list, select the volume you are adding to the group.
8. In the Backup Volume on list, select an existing backup volume, or click New to
create a new backup volume.
Note: When selecting volumes, you can filter the lists to include by clicking
the down arrow and selecting Virtual Volumes, Provisioning, and Virtual
Size. To clear the filter, click Clear.
9. If you clicked New:
a. Enter a volume name.
b. Select CPG for the user space.
c. Select a CPG for the copy space.
d. (Optional) If you wish to enter an allocation warning percentage and/or allocation
limit, click Enabled and enter a value.
Note: If you are creating a Remote Copy group for a Synchronous Long
Distance Remote Copy configuration, repeat steps 8 and/or 9 for the second
Backup Volume on list of virtual volumes.
10. Click Add.
286
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
11. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Selecting Multiple Items
Creating Remote Copy Groups
Moving a Virtual Volume to Another
Domain
Note: 3PAR Domains requires a 3PAR Domain license. For additional
information about the license, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts Guide.
If you are using 3PAR Domains and wish to move a volume from one domain to another,
follow the instructions in Moving Objects from One Domain to Another Domain.
Removing Virtual Volumes
To remove a virtual volume:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Right-click the volume you wish to remove.
3. In the menu that appears, click Remove.
The Remove Virtual Volume dialog box appears.
4. (Optional) Select to remove volumes and descendents without active VLUNs, associated
with inactive VLUNs, and from volume sets.
5. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
320-200231 Rev A
287
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Tuning Virtual Volumes
To tune a virtual volume, access the Tune Virtual Volume wizard:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Right-click the volume you wish to tune.
3. In the menu that appears, click Tune.
The Tune Virtual Volume wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the General group box:
a. System - Select the system containing the volume to be tuned.
b. Domain - Select the domain containing the volume to be tuned. If not applicable,
click <none>.
c. Allocation Space - Select User Space (Fully Provisioned from CPG), User
Space (Fully Provisioned from PDs), or Copy Space.
d. Virtual Volume(s) - Select the virtual volume(s) to be tuned.
e. If you selected User Space (Fully Provisioned from CPG), select a template
from the Template list.
2. In the Settings group box:
3. If you selected User Space (Fully Provisioned from PDs):
a. Device Type - Select FC for Fibre Channel drives, NL for Nearline drives, or SSD
for Solid State drives.
b. Device Speed - Select the appropriate speed or <default>.
4. If you selected User Space (Fully Provisioned from CPGs) or Copy Space, from the
Target list, select a target CPG.
5. If the volume is provisioned from physical disks, you can optionally display additional
tuning options by selecting Show advanced options panel(s).
6. Click Next to enter allocation settings or view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 2. Allocation Settings
1. From the Availability list, select Cage, Port, or Magazine.
2. From the Step Size list, select default, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 512 KiB. The default value
depends on raid type and device type used. If FC or NL drives are used, the step size
defaults to 256 KiB for RAID 0 and RAID 1, and 128 KiB for RAID 5. If SSD drives are
used, the step size defaults to 32 KiB for RAID 0 and RAID 1, and 64 KiB for RAID 5.
For RAID 6, the default is a function of the set size. S
3. elect the Preferred Chunklets as Fast or Slow.
4. Click Next to enter disk information, or click Finish.
Step 3. Disk Filter
The Disk Filter displays the physical disks used to create the volume. Pattern displays the
parameters of the disks used.
288
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
To modify the list of disks used:
1. Click the Filter icon.
2. See Filtering for filtering details.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 4. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Restarting Tuning a Virtual Volume
To restart a previously interrupted tune task on a virtual volume:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
Right-click the volume for which you wish to restart the tuning task.
In the menu that appears, click Restart Tune.
Click Yes.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Rolling Back a Tuned Virtual Volume
To roll back a previously tuned virtual volume to its previous state:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
Right-click the volume you wish to roll back.
In the menu that appears, click Rollback Tune.
Click Yes.
320-200231 Rev A
289
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Working with Virtual Volume Sets
When working with virtual volume sets, you can:
View Virtual Volume Sets
Create Virtual Volume Sets
Edit a Virtual Volume Set
Export Virtual Volume Sets
Remove a Virtual Volume Set
Adding a Virtual Volume to a Virtual Volume Set
Viewing Virtual Volume Sets
To view a system's virtual volume sets:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Management Tree, click Virtual Volume Sets under the system node you wish
to view.
The Virtual Volume Sets screen appears as follows:
The following information is displayed:
Column
Description
Name
The name of the virtual volume set. Each name is a link to that virtual
volume set's detail information. See
Viewing_a_Single_Virtual_Volume_Set.
System
The system on which the virtual volume set resides.
290
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Domain
The domain in which the virtual volume set resides.
Virtual
Volumes
The number of virtual volumes belonging to the virtual volume set.
Comments
Any comments.
Viewing a Single Virtual Volume Set
To view a single virtual volume set:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Management Tree, click Virtual Volume Sets under the system node you wish
to view.
3. Click the virtual volume set you wish to view under the Name column.
or
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Management Tree, click the virtual volume set under Virtual Volume Sets you
wish to view.
The single Virtual Volume Set screen appears as follows:
The type of information displayed is identical to the information displayed for virtual
volumes. See the Viewing Virtual Volumes topic and its sub-topics for additional
information.
320-200231 Rev A
291
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Virtual Volumes
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Summary Tab
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Layout Tab
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Alerts Tab
Creating Virtual Volume Sets
To create a virtual volume set:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Management Tree, click right-click Virtual Volume Sets under the system on
which you wish to create the volume set.
3. In the menu that appears, click Create Virtual Volume Set.
The Create Virtual Volume Set wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. System - Select the system to create the virtual volume set.
2. Domain - select the domain in which to create the new virtual volume set, or if not
required, select <none>.
3. Name - Enter a name for the new set.
4. Comments - Enter any notes about the virtual volume set.
5. Click Next to assign virtual volumes to the set.
Step 2. Volumes
1. To assign available volumes:
a. Select one or more volumes from the Available volumes list.
b. Click the down arrow to add the selected volume(s) to the Assigned volumes list.
2. Click Next.
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
292
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Virtual Volume Sets
Selecting Multiple Items
Editing a Virtual Volume Set
To edit a virtual volume set:
1. Access the Virtual Volume Sets screen.
2. Right-click the virtual volume set you wish to edit.
3. In the menu that appears, click Edit.
The Edit Virtual Volume Set wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. Name - Enter a name for the set.
2. Comments - Enter any notes about the virtual volume set.
3. Click Next to assign/unassign virtual volumes to/from the set.
Step 2. Volumes
1. To assign available volumes:
a. Select one or more volumes from the Available volumes list.
b. Click the down arrow to add the selected volume(s) to the Assigned volumes list.
2. To unassign volumes:
a. Select one or more volumes form the Assigned volumes list.
b. Click the up arrow to add the selected volume(s) to the Available volume list.
3. Click Next.
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
320-200231 Rev A
293
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Management Tree
Viewing Virtual Volume Sets
Selecting Multiple Items
Adding a Virtual Volume to a Virtual
Volume Set
To add a virtual volume to an existing virtual volume set:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Right-click the volume you wish to add to a virtual volume set.
3. In the menu that appears, click Add to Virtual Volume Set.
The Add to Virtual Volume Set dialog box appears.
4. Select a virtual volume set from the list.
5. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Exporting Virtual Volume Sets
To export a virtual volume set:
1. Access the Virtual Volume Sets screen.
2. Right-click the virtual volume set you wish to export.
The Export Virtual Volume wizard appears.
3. Follow the instructions in Exporting Virtual Volumes.
See also:
Viewing Virtual Volume Sets
Exporting Virtual Volumes
294
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Removing a Virtual Volume Set
To remove a virtual volume set:
1. Access the Virtual Volume Sets screen.
2. Right-click the virtual volume set you wish to remove.
Note: If you wish to remove multiple virtual volume sets (see Selecting
Multiple Items), select the volume sets you wish to remove before rightclicking.
3. In the menu that appears, click Remove.
The Remove Virtual Volume Sets dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing Virtual Volume Sets
Selecting Multiple Items
Working with VLUNs
When working with VLUNs, you can:
View VLUNs
Create VLUNs
Remove VLUNs
320-200231 Rev A
295
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing VLUNs
To view system VLUNs:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Management Tree, click VLUNs under the system node you wish to view.
The VLUNs screen provides VLUN information on three tabs, Active VLUNs, VLUN
Templates, and Path Summary.
Note: In addition to providing comprehensive information about a system's
VLUNs, the InForm Management Console also allows you to the same type of
information for Remote Copy VLUNs by selecting the Remote Copy child node
under the VLUNs node in the Management Tree.
Active VLUNs Tab
The Active VLUNs tab can be filtered to display Summary information and Remote Copy
information.
Displaying Summary Information
The Active VLUNs tab for summary information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed on the Active VLUNs tab:
Column
Description
System Name
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
LUN
The exported Logical Unit Number (LUN) value.
296
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Virtual Volume
The name of the virtual volume.
RAID Type
The VLUN RAID type.
Host
The name of the host to which the VLUN is exported.
Port
The InServ Storage Server port on which the VLUN is
exported.
Host WWN/iSCSI
Name
The WWN or iSCSI name of the host.
Exported Size
The VLUN's exported size in GiB.
Type
The VLUN type, Host Sees, Host In Set, or Matched Set.
Displaying Remote Copy Information
The Active VLUNs tab for Remote Copy information appears as follows:
The following information is displayed on the Active VLUNs tab for Remote Copy
information:
Column
Description
System Name
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
LUN
The exported Logical Unit Number (LUN) value.
Virtual Volume
The name of the virtual volume.
320-200231 Rev A
297
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
RAID Type
The VLUN RAID type.
Host
The name of the host to which the VLUN is exported.
Port
The InServ Storage Server port on which the VLUN is
exported.
Host WWN/iSCSI
Name
The WWN or iSCSI name of the host.
Exported Size
The VLUN's exported size in GiB.
Type
The VLUN type, Host Sees, Host In Set, or Matched Set.
RC Status
The Remote Copy Status
RC Group
(not shown)
The exported Remote Copy group.
Writable LUNs
(not shown)
The number of writable LUNs.
VLUN Templates Tab
The VLUN Templates tab appears as follows:
298
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The VLUN Templates tab is split into an upper tab and a lower tab. The upper tab displays
summary information about system VLUN templates. The lower pane displays active VLUN
information about a selected template from the upper pane.
Upper Pane
The following information is displayed in the upper pane:
Column
Description
System Name
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
LUN
The exported Logical Unit Number (LUN) value.
Domain
The domain in which the VLUN template resides.
Virtual Volume
The name of the virtual volume.
RAID Type
The VLUN RAID type.
Host
The name of the host to which the VLUN is exported.
Port
The InServ Storage Server port on which the VLUN is
exported.
Host WWN/iSCSI
Name
The WWN or iSCSI name of the host.
Exported Size
The VLUN's exported size in GiB.
Type
Active VLUNs
The VLUN type, Host Sees, Host In Set, or Matched Set.
The number of active VLUNs.
Lower Pane
The lower pane displays Active VLUNs for the selected template. See the
Active_VLUNs_Tab for details.
320-200231 Rev A
299
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Path Summary Tab
Note: Paths information is available for display for systems using InForm OS
version 2.3.1 and later.
The Path Summary tab appears as follows:
The following information is displayed in the Path Summary tab:
Column
Description
System Name
Name of the InServ Storage Server configured by the system
administrator.
LUN
The exported Logical Unit Number (LUN) value.
Virtual Volume
The name of the exported virtual volume. Each entry is a link to the
Virtual Volumes tab.
Host
The name of the host to which the VLUN is exported. Each entry is
a link to the Hosts tab.
Host Ports
The number of host WWNs visible to the InServ Storage Server.
Inactive Ports
WWNs reported by the host, but not visible to the InServ Storage
Server.
InServ Ports
The number of InServ Storage Server ports that can see the host.
Available Paths
The total number of distinct, available paths between the host and
the InServ Storage Server.
Healthy Paths
The number of paths seen by the InServ Storage Server reported
good by the host.
Multipath
The used multi-pathing method.
300
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Failed Path
Policy
The failed path monitoring method.
Monitoring
Interval
The monitoring interval in seconds after which the host checks for
failed paths.
Host Device
Name
The device name for the selected VLUN on the host.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Creating VLUNs
To create a VLUN:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Common Actions Panel, click Create VLUN.
The Export Virtual Volume wizard appears.
4. Follow the instructions in Exporting Virtual Volumes.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Exporting Virtual Volumes
320-200231 Rev A
301
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Removing VLUNs
To remove a VLUN:
1. Access the VLUNs screen.
2. Right-click the VLUN you wish to remove.
Note: If you wish to remove multiple VLUNs (see Selecting Multiple Items),
select the VLUNs you wish to remove before right-clicking.
3. In the menu that appears, click Remove.
The Remove VLUN(s) dialog box appears.
4. (Optional) In the Removal VLUN(s) dialog box that appears, click the After
removal... checKiBox to prevent the storage server from issuing a Loop Initialization
Primitive (LIP) or Registered State Change notification (RSCN) after removing the
VLUN.
5. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing VLUNs
Selecting Multiple Items
Working with Templates
The InForm Management Console allows you to create templates that enable you to apply a
set of parameters again and again to create virtual volumes or Common Provisioning
Groups (CPGs) with the same, or similar characteristics.
The following general rules apply to templates:
A property can either be included in a template or not included (unincluded). Properties
are Virtual Volume (VV) or Common Provisioning Group (CPG) attributes such as set size.
A property included in a template can have a defined value or have a value that is left
unspecified. A property with a defined value has had a specific value assigned to it (for
example, a set size of 2). A property with an unspecified value does not have a specific
value assigned to it. When you apply a template that includes a property with one ore
302
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
more unspecified values, the system will either use the default value (when applicable) or
calculate the optimized setting for you.
For all templates, you can either allow overrides of property values, or not. When you
allow overrides of a property, users can modify that property's value when applying the
template. When you do not allow overrides of a property, it is not possible to modify the
defined value, system default, or system-calculated value for that property when applying
the template.
Once you create a template, that template is saved on the system and can then be applied
to create new virtual volumes or common provisioning groups.
Instructions are provided for the following:
Viewing Templates
Creating Virtual Volume Templates
Editing a Virtual Volume Template
Creating Common Provisioning Group Templates
Editing a Common Provisioning Group Template
Copying a Template
Creating Similar Templates
Removing a Template
Viewing Templates
To view templates:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Management Tree, click Templates under the system node you wish to view.
Note: In addition to providing comprehensive information about a system's
templates, the InForm Management Console also allows you to the same type
of information for specific types of templates. Each child node under the
Templates node in the Management Tree is a specific type of template. These
include CPG templates, Virtual Volume templates, and LD (logical disk)
templates. In order to view logical disk template information, you must first
set your preferences to view logical disk information; see Setting Global
Preferences.
The Templates screen appears as follows:
320-200231 Rev A
303
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Templates screen is divided into an upper pane and lower pane. The upper pane
displays summary information about the system's templates. The lower pane displays
details about a template selected from the upper pane.
Upper Pane
The following information is displayed in the upper pane:
Column
Description
System
The name of the InServ Storage Server.
Name
The template name.
Type
The template type.
Description
User entered information about the template.
304
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Lower Pane
The following information is displayed in the lower pane:
Group
Field
Description
Name
The template name.
Type
The template type.
Description
User entered information about the template.
Override Unincluded
Properties
Indicates if non-default values for unincluded
properties when applying the template can be set.
Property
The attributes of the object.
Allow Override
Indicates if template overrides are allowed.
Defined Value
The value specified in the template for the
corresponding property.
General
Properties
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Creating Virtual Volume Templates
(Thinly Provisioned)
To create a virtual volume template:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Right-click the volume from which you wish to create a template.
3. In the menu that appears, click Save As Template.
or
4. After accessing the Virtual Volumes tab, in the Main Menu Bar, click Actions >
Provisioning > Template > Create VV Template.
320-200231 Rev A
305
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Create VV Template wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the Template group box:
a. System - Select the system on which the template will be created.
b. Name - Enter the template name.
c. (Optional) Description - Enter a template description.
d. (Optional) Click the Override Unincluded Properties checKiBox to allow users to
set non-default values for unincluded properties when applying the template.
2. In the User Space group box:
a. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include
properties in the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the
Defined Value column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to
define specific values to be used by the template. Checking the Allow Override
checKiBox allow users to modify that property's value when applying the template.
b. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a
VV template, User Space group box:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
Size
determine the size that the volume created with this template
presents to the host.
Provisioning
create a base volume template, select Thinly Provisioned.
CPG
select the CPG to use for user space.
Allocation
Warning
generate an alert when the copy space of the VV exceeds the
specified percentage of the VV size.
Allocation Limit
prevent the snapshot copy space from growing beyond the
specified percentage of the VV size.
3. Click Next to enter copy space information, or click Finish.
Step 2. Copy Space Settings
1. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include properties in
the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the Defined Value
column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to define specific values
to be used by the template. Checking the Allow Override checKiBox allow users to
modify that property's value when applying the template.
2. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a VV
template, Copy Space Settings screen:
306
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Property
Include in the template in order to...
CPG
select the CPG to use for copy space.
Allocation
Warning
generate an alert when the copy space of the VV exceeds the
specified percentage of the VV size.
Allocation Limit
prevent the copy space from growing beyond the specified
percentage of the VV size.
3. Click Next to enter policy and geometry information, or click Finish.
Step 3. Policies and Geometry
1. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include properties in
the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the Defined Value
column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to define specific values
to be used by the template. Checking the Allow Override checKiBox allow users to
modify that property's value when applying the template.
2. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a VV
template, Copy Settings screen:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
Allow stale snapshots
allows stale snapshots.
Restrict export to one host
Indicates whether the VV can export to multiple hosts.
Zero-fill on partially written
data pages
ensure that the host can never read old data from
deleted volumes or snapshots.
Sectors Per Track
specify the number of sectors to allow per track.
Heads Per Cylinder
specify the number of heads to use per cylinder.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 4. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
320-200231 Rev A
307
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Editing a Virtual Volume Template (Thinly Provisioned)
Editing a Virtual Volume Template
(Thinly Provisioned)
To edit a virtual volume template:
1. Access the Templates screen.
2. Right-click the virtual volume template you wish to edit.
3. In the menu that appears, click Edit.
The Edit VV Template wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the Template group box:
a. (Optional) Description - Enter a template description.
b. (Optional) Click the Override Unincluded Properties checKiBox to allow users to
set non-default values for unincluded properties when applying the template.
2. In the User Space group box:
a. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include
properties in the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the
Defined Value column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to
define specific values to be used by the template. Checking the Allow Override
checKiBox allow users to modify that property's value when applying the template.
b. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a
VV template, User Space group box:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
Size
determine the size that the volume created with this template
presents to the host.
Provisioning
create a base volume template, select Thinly Provisioned.
CPG
select the CPG to use for user space.
Allocation
Warning
generate an alert when the copy space of the VV exceeds the
specified percentage of the VV size.
308
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Allocation Limit
prevent the snapshot copy space from growing beyond the
specified percentage of the VV size.
3. Click Next to enter copy space information, or click Finish.
Step 2. Copy Space Settings
1. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include properties in
the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the Defined Value
column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to define specific values
to be used by the template. Checking the Allow Override checKiBox allow users to
modify that property's value when applying the template.
2. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a VV
template, Copy Space Settings screen:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
CPG
select the CPG to use for copy space.
Allocation
Warning
generate an alert when the copy space of the VV exceeds the
specified percentage of the VV size.
Allocation Limit
prevent the copy space from growing beyond the specified
percentage of the VV size.
3. Click Next to enter policy and geometry information, or click Finish.
Step 3. Policies and Geometry
1. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include properties in
the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the Defined Value
column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to define specific values
to be used by the template. Checking the Allow Override checKiBox allow users to
modify that property's value when applying the template.
2. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a VV
template, Copy Settings screen:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
Allow stale snapshots
allows stale snapshots.
Restrict export to one host
Indicates whether the VV can export to multiple hosts.
320-200231 Rev A
309
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Zero-fill on partially written
data pages
ensure that the host can never read old data from
deleted volumes or snapshots.
Sectors Per Track
specify the number of sectors to allow per track.
Heads Per Cylinder
specify the number of heads to use per cylinder.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 4. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
Creating a Virtual Volume Template
(Fully Provisioned from Physical Disks)
To create a virtual volume template:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Right-click the volume from which you wish to create a template.
3. In the menu that appears, click Save As Template.
or
4. After accessing the Virtual Volumes tab, in the Main Menu Bar, click Actions >
Provisioning > Template > Create VV Template.
The Create VV Template wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the Template group box:
a. System - Select the system on which the template will be created.
b. Name - Enter the template name.
c. (Optional) Description - Enter a template description.
d. (Optional) Click the Override Unincluded Properties checKiBox to allow users to
set non-default values for unincluded properties when applying the template.
2. In the User Space group box:
a. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include
properties in the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the
Defined Value column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to
310
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
define specific values to be used by the template. Checking the Allow Override
checKiBox allow users to modify that property's value when applying the template.
b. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a
VV template, User Space group box:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
Size
determine the size that the volume created with this template
presents to the host.
Provisioning
create a base volume template, select Fully Provisioned from
PDs.
Device Type
set the disk type, Fibre Channel (FC),Nearline (NL), or Solid State
(SSD).
Device Speed
set the speed of the disk in K RPM.
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
RAID Type
set the VV's RAID type.
Set Size
set the VV's set size.
3. Click Next to enter copy space information, or click Finish.
Step 2. Copy Space Settings
1. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include properties in
the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the Defined Value
column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to define specific values
to be used by the template. Checking the Allow Override checKiBox allow users to
modify that property's value when applying the template.
2. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a VV
template, Copy Space Settings screen:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
CPG
select the CPG to use for copy space.
Allocation
generate an alert when the copy space of the VV exceeds the
320-200231 Rev A
311
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Warning
specified percentage of the VV size.
Allocation Limit
prevent the copy space from growing beyond the specified
percentage of the VV size.
3. Click Next to enter policy and geometry information, or click Finish
Step 3. Allocation Settings
1. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include properties in
the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the Defined Value
column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to define specific values
to be used by the template (for example, a step size of 128 KIB). Checking the Allow
Override checKiBox allow users to modify that property's value when applying the
template.
2. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a CPG
template, Allocation Settings screen:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
Availability
set the level of failure tolerance for a volume created with this
template. Choices are Cage - default, Port, Magazine.
Step Size
determine the number of contiguous bytes that the system accesses
before moving to the next chunklet within logical disks supporting
volumes created with this template. From the Step Size list, select 32,
64, 128, 256, or 512 KiB. For RAID 6 you can select 32, 64, or 128.
Preferred
Chunklets
indicate whether the logical disks supporting volumes created with this
template should tend to use chunklets near the beginning of the
physical disks or the end of the physical disks. Choices are Fastdefault, Slow.
3. Click Next to enter disk filter information, or click Finish.
Step 4. Disk Filter
The Disk Filter displays the physical disks used. Pattern displays the parameters of the
disks used.
To modify the list of disks used:
1. Click the Filter icon.
2. See Filtering for details.
3. Click Next, or click Finish.
312
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 5. Policies and Geometry
1. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include properties in
the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the Defined Value
column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to define specific values
to be used by the template. Checking the Allow Override checKiBox allow users to
modify that property's value when applying the template.
2. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a VV
template, Copy Settings screen:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
Allow stale snapshots
allows stale snapshots.
Restrict export to one host
Indicates whether the VV can export to multiple hosts.
Sectors Per Track
specify the number of sectors to allow per track.
Heads Per Cylinder
specify the number of heads to use per cylinder.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 6. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Editing a Virtual Volume Template (Fully Provisioned from Physical Disks)
Editing a Virtual Volume Template (Fully
Provisioned from Physical Disks)
To edit a virtual volume template:
1. Access the Templates screen.
2. Right-click the virtual volume template you wish to edit.
3. In the menu that appears, click Edit.
320-200231 Rev A
313
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Edit VV Template wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the Template group box:
a. (Optional) Description - Enter a template description.
b. (Optional) Click the Override Unincluded Properties checKiBox to allow users to
set non-default values for unincluded properties when applying the template.
2. In the User Space group box:
a. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include
properties in the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the
Defined Value column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to
define specific values to be used by the template. Checking the Allow Override
checKiBox allow users to modify that property's value when applying the template.
b. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a
VV template, User Space group box:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
Size
determine the size that the volume created with this template
presents to the host.
Provisioning
create a base volume template, select Fully Provisioned from
PDs.
Device Type
set the disk type, Fibre Channel (FC),Nearline (NL), or Solid State
(SSD).
Device Speed
set the speed of the disk in K RPM.
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
RAID Type
set the VV's RAID type.
Set Size
set the VV's set size.
3. Click Next to enter copy space information, or click Finish.
314
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 2. Copy Space Settings
1. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include properties in
the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the Defined Value
column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to define specific values
to be used by the template. Checking the Allow Override checKiBox allow users to
modify that property's value when applying the template.
2. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a VV
template, Copy Space Settings screen:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
CPG
select the CPG to use for copy space.
Allocation
Warning
generate an alert when the copy space of the VV exceeds the
specified percentage of the VV size.
Allocation Limit
prevent the copy space from growing beyond the specified
percentage of the VV size.
3. Click Next to enter policy and geometry information, or click Finish
Step 3. Allocation Settings
1. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include properties in
the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the Defined Value
column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to define specific values
to be used by the template (for example, a step size of 128 KIB). Checking the Allow
Override checKiBox allow users to modify that property's value when applying the
template.
2. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a CPG
template, Allocation Settings screen:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
Availability
set the level of failure tolerance for a volume created with this
template. Choices are Cage - default, Port, Magazine.
Step Size
determine the number of contiguous bytes that the system accesses
before moving to the next chunklet within logical disks supporting
volumes created with this template. From the Step Size list, select 32,
64, 128, 256, or 512 KiB. For RAID 6 you can select 32, 64, or 128.
Preferred
Chunklets
indicate whether the logical disks supporting volumes created with this
template should tend to use chunklets near the beginning of the
physical disks or the end of the physical disks. Choices are Fastdefault, Slow.
320-200231 Rev A
315
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
3. Click Next to enter disk filter information, or click Finish.
Step 4. Disk Filter
The Disk Filter displays the physical disks used. Pattern displays the parameters of the
disks used.
To modify the list of disks used:
1. Click the Filter icon.
2. See Filtering for details.
3. Click Next, or click Finish.
Step 5. Policies and Geometry
1. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include properties in
the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the Defined Value
column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to define specific values
to be used by the template. Checking the Allow Override checKiBox allow users to
modify that property's value when applying the template.
2. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a VV
template, Copy Settings screen:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
Allow stale snapshots
allows stale snapshots.
Restrict export to one host
Indicates whether the VV can export to multiple hosts.
Sectors Per Track
specify the number of sectors to allow per track.
Heads Per Cylinder
specify the number of heads to use per cylinder.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 6. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Viewing Templates
Filtering
316
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Creating Common Provisioning Group
Templates
To create a Common Provisioning Group (CPG) template:
1. Access the CPGs tab.
2. Right-click the CPG from which you wish to create a template .
3. In the menu that appears, click Save As Template.
or
4. After accessing the CPGs tab, in the Main Menu Bar, click Actions > Provisioning >
Template > Create CPG Template.
The Create CPG Template wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the Template group box:
a. From the System list, select the system you want to create the volume on.
b. In the Name text box, enter the name of the new volume (31 character
maximum).
c. (Optional) In the Description text box, enter a description of the template (255
character maximum).
d. (Optional) Click the Override Unincluded Properties checKiBox to allow users to
set non-default values for unincluded properties when applying the template.
2. In the General group box:
a. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include
properties in the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the
Defined Value column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to
define specific values to be used by the template. Checking the Allow Override
checKiBox allow users to modify that property's value when applying the template.
b. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
Allocation
Warning
specify the percentage of used copy administration or copy space which
results in an alert.
Growth
Increment
set the growth increment, different than the default. The minimum growth
increment and default varies according to the number of controller nodes
in the system (see table):
320-200231 Rev A
# of
Nodes
Default
Minimum
317
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
1-2
32GB
8GB
3-4
64GB
16GB
5-6
96GB
24GB
7-8
128GB
32GB
Growth
Warning
set the threshold when the LD space exceeds this amount.
Growth Limit
set the threshold at which the system stops creating additional LDs to
support volumes that draw space from a CPG.
Device Type
set the disk type to Fibre Channel (FC), Nearline (NL), or Solid State
(SSD).
Device Speed
set the disk speed.
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
RAID Type
set the VV's RAID type.
Set Size
specify the VV's set size.
3. Click Next to enter allocation setting information, or click Finish.
Step 2. Allocation Settings
1. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include properties in
the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the Defined Value
column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to define specific values
to be used by the template (for example, a step size of 128 KIB). Checking the Allow
Override checKiBox allow users to modify that property's value when applying the
template.
2. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a CPG
template, Allocation Settings screen:
318
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Property
Include in the template in order to...
Availability
set the level of failure tolerance for a volume created with this
template. Choices are Cage - default, Port, Magazine.
Step Size
determine the number of contiguous bytes that the system accesses
before moving to the next chunklet within logical disks supporting
volumes created with this template. From the Step Size list, select 32,
64, 128, 256, or 512 KiB. For RAID 6 you can select 32, 64, or 128.
Preferred
Chunklets
indicate whether the logical disks supporting volumes created with this
template should tend to use chunklets near the beginning of the
physical disks or the end of the physical disks. Choices are Fastdefault, Slow.
3. Click Next to enter disk filter information, or click Finish.
Step 3. Disk Filter
The Disk Filter displays the physical disks used. Pattern displays the parameters of the
disks used.
To modify the list of disks used:
1. Click the Filter icon.
2. See Filtering for details.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 4. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Viewing the CPGs Tab
Filtering
320-200231 Rev A
319
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Editing a Common Provisioning Group
Template
To edit a Common Provisioning Group (CPG) template:
1. Access the Templates screen.
2. Right-click the CPG template you wish to edit.
3. In the menu that appears, click Edit
The Edit CPG Template wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. In the Template group box:
a. (Optional) In the Description text box, enter a description of the template (255
character maximum).
b. (Optional) Click the Override Unincluded Properties checKiBox to allow users to
set non-default values for unincluded properties when applying the template.
2. In the General group box:
a. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include
properties in the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the
Defined Value column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to
define specific values to be used by the template. Checking the Allow Override
checKiBox allow users to modify that property's value when applying the template.
b. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
Allocation
Warning
specify the percentage of used copy administration or copy space which
results in an alert.
set the growth increment, different than the default. The minimum growth
increment and default varies according to the number of controller nodes
in the system (see table):
# of
Nodes
Growth
Increment
320
Default
Minimum
1-2
32GB
8GB
3-4
64GB
16GB
5-6
96GB
24GB
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
7-8
128GB
32GB
Growth
Warning
set the threshold when the LD space exceeds this amount.
Growth Limit
set the threshold at which the system stops creating additional LDs to
support volumes that draw space from a CPG.
Device Type
set the disk type to Fibre Channel (FC), Nearline (NL), or Solid State
(SSD).
Device Speed
set the disk speed.
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
RAID Type
set the VV's RAID type.
Set Size
specify the VV's set size.
3. Click Next to enter allocation setting information, or click Finish.
Step 2. Allocation Settings
1. In the Include column on the left, check the appropriate boxes to include properties in
the template. The list of values for each property are listed in the Defined Value
column on the right. Include any properties for which you wish to define specific values
to be used by the template (for example, a step size of 128 KIB). Checking the Allow
Override checKiBox allow users to modify that property's value when applying the
template.
2. Use the following table as a guide when choosing which properties to include in a CPG
template, Allocation Settings screen:
Property
Include in the template in order to...
Availability
set the level of failure tolerance for a volume created with this
template. Choices are Cage - default, Port, Magazine.
Step Size
determine the number of contiguous bytes that the system accesses
before moving to the next chunklet within logical disks supporting
volumes created with this template. From the Step Size list, select 32,
320-200231 Rev A
321
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
64, 128, 256, or 512 KiB. For RAID 6 you can select 32, 64, or 128.
Preferred
Chunklets
indicate whether the logical disks supporting volumes created with this
template should tend to use chunklets near the beginning of the
physical disks or the end of the physical disks. Choices are Fastdefault, Slow.
3. Click Next to enter disk filter information, or click Finish.
Step 3. Disk Filter
The Disk Filter displays the physical disks used. Pattern displays the parameters of the
disks used.
To modify the list of disks used:
1. Click the Filter icon.
2. See Filtering for details.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 4. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Viewing Templates
Filtering
322
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Copying a Template
To copy a Common Provisioning Group (CPG) or virtual volume template:
1. Access the Templates screen.
2. Right-click the CPG or virtual volume template you wish to copy.
3. In the menu that appears, click Copy Template.
The Copy Template dialog box appears.
Note: In the Source group box, the System and Template fields are
populated from the template you selected to copy from. You can choose a
different template to copy.
4. In the Destination group box:
a. Select the system where you wish to copy the template.
b. Enter a name for the new template (31 character maximum) in the Template
Name text box.
5. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing Templates
Creating Similar Templates
You can create new Common Provisioning Group (CPG) and virtual volume templates based
on existing templates. To do this:
1. Access the Templates screen.
2. Right-click the CPG or virtual volume template you wish to use as the basis for your
new template.
3. In the menu that appears, click Create Similar.
The Create CPG Template or Create VV Template wizard appears.
4. Follow the instructions in Creating Common Provisioning Group Templates or Creating
Virtual Volume Templates.
See also:
Viewing Templates
Creating Common Provisioning Group Templates
Creating Virtual Volume Templates
320-200231 Rev A
323
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Removing a Template
To remove a template:
1. Access the Templates screen.
2. Right-click the template you wish to remove.
3. In the menu that appears, click Remove.
The Remove Template dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing Templates
Working with Virtual Copies
The InForm Management Console allows you to view, create, edit, remove, and promote
virtual copies.
Viewing Virtual Copies
Creating a Virtual Copy
Editing a Virtual Copy
Removing a Virtual Copy
Creating a Consistency Group Virtual Copy
Creating a Batch Virtual Copy
Promoting a Virtual Copy
324
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Virtual Copies
Virtual copies are displayed on the Virtual Volumes tab.
To view virtual copies, access the Virtual Volumes tab.
A volume name displaying a plus (+) sign to the left indicates that at least one virtual copy
of that volume exists. Clicking the plus sign expands the volume displaying the virtual copy.
See Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Viewing Physical Copies
Creating a Virtual Copy
To create a virtual copy:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Common Actions Panel, click Create Virtual Copy.
The Create Virtual Copy dialog box appears.
3. System - Select the system on which the virtual copy will be created.
4. (Optional) Domain - Select the domain in which the virtual copy will reside.
320-200231 Rev A
325
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
5. Parent Volume - Select the virtual copy's parent volume.
6. Destination Volume - Enter the destination volume's name.
Note: If you selected a virtual volume set from the Parent Volume list, the
Destination Volume field is automatically populated with @vvname@.copy,
meaning that @vvname@ is replaced with the names of the virtual volumes
belonging to the selected virtual volume set. For example, if your virtual
volume set contains virtual volumes named VV1, VV2, and VV3, the
destination virtual volumes will be named VV1.copy, VV2.copy, and
VV3.copy. If you wish to edit the way the destination volumes are named,
click the Edit button (
) to the right of the Destination Volume field to
access the Edit Volume Set Name dialog box.
7. Comments - Enter any notes.
8. If you wish to set a retention time, click the Retention Time checKiBox, enter a value
in the corresponding field, and select a unit of measure, day(s) or hour(s).
9. If you wish to set an expiration time, click the Expiration Time checKiBox, enter a
value in the corresponding field, and select a unit of measure, day(s) or hour(s).
10. Click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Editing a Virtual Copy
To edit a virtual copy:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Right-click the virtual copy you wish to edit and select Edit.
The Edit Virtual Copy dialog box appears.
3. Destination Volume - Enter a new destination volume.
4. Comments - Enter any notes about the virtual copy.
5. Retention Time - Select day(s) or hour(s) and then enter a value from 1 to 14, or 1
to 366, respectively.
6. Expiration Time - Select day(s) or hour(s) and then enter a value from 1 to 1,825,
or 1 to 43,800, respectively.
326
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
7. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing Virtual Copies
Removing a Virtual Copy
To remove a virtual copy:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Right-click the virtual copy you wish to remove.
3. In the menu that appears, click Remove.
The Remove Virtual Volume dialog box appears.
4. (Optional) Select to remove volumes and descendents without active VLUNs, associated
with inactive VLUNs, and from volume sets.
5. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing Virtual Copies
Creating a Consistency Group Virtual
Copy
To create a consistency group virtual copy:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
Select two or more virtual volumes with copy space.
Right-click the selected volumes.
In the menu that appears, click Create Consistency Group Virtual Copies.
The Create Consistency Group Virtual Copies dialog box appears.
5. If you wish to modify the name of a copy, double-click any name in the Name column
and then enter a new name.
320-200231 Rev A
327
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
6. If you wish to set a retention time, select the Retention Time checKiBox, enter a value
in the corresponding field, and select a unit of measure, day(s) or hour(s).
7. If you wish to set an expiration time, select the Expiration Time checKiBox, enter a
value in the corresponding field, and select a unit of measure, day(s) or hour(s).
8. Enter any notes in the Comments text box.
9. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Selecting Multiple Items
Creating a Batch Virtual Copy
To create a batch virtual copy:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
Select two or more virtual volumes with copy space.
Right-click the selected volumes.
In the menu that appears, click Create Batch Virtual Copy.
The Create Batch Virtual Copies dialog box appears.
5. If you wish to modify the name of a copy, double-click any name in the Name column
and then enter a new name.
6. Click the appropriate option button (Read Only or Read/Write).
7. (Optional) In the Suffix text box, enter a suffix to append the existing volume name if
you did not modify previously the name.
8. If you wish to set a retention time, select the Retention Time checKiBox, enter a value
in the corresponding field, and select a unit of measure, day(s) or hour(s).
9. If you wish to set an expiration time, select the Expiration Time checKiBox, enter a
value in the corresponding field, and select a unit of measure, day(s) or hour(s).
10. Enter any notes in the Comments text box.
11. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Selecting Multiple Items
328
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Promoting a Virtual Copy
To promote a virtual copy to a base volume:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab to view the system's virtual copies.
2. Right-click the virtual copy you wish to promote.
3. In the menu that appears, click Promote Virtual Copy.
The Promote Virtual Copy dialog box appears.
4. Select a target volume from the Target Virtual Volume list.
5. Click OK.
6. When prompted for confirmation to continue, click Yes.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Viewing Virtual Copies
Working with Physical Copies
The InForm Management Console allows you to view, create, edit, and manage physical
copies.
Viewing Physical Copies
Creating a Physical Copy
Editing a Physical Copy
Removing a Physical Copy
Creating a Consistency Group Physical Copy
Stopping a Physical Copy
Resynchronizing a Physical Copy
Promoting a Physical Copy
320-200231 Rev A
329
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Physical Copies
Physical copies are displayed on the Virtual Volumes tab.
To view physical copies, access the Virtual Volumes tab.
A virtual copy name displaying a plus (+) sign to the left indicates that at least one physical
copy exists. Clicking the plus sign expands the virtual copy displaying the physical copy.
See Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Viewing Virtual Copies
Creating a Physical Copy
To create a physical copy:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Provisioning.
2. In the Common Actions Panel, click Create Physical Copy.
The Create Physical Copy dialog box appears.
330
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
From the System list, select the system on which the physical copy will be created.
(Optional) From the Domain list, select the domain in which the copy will reside.
From Parent Volume list, select the volume to copy from.
From Destination Volume list, select the volume to copy to.
(Optional) If you want to save a snapshot of the physical copy, in order to
resynchronize the base volume and physical copy at a later point in time, click Save
snapshot for later resync.
8. Click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Editing a Physical Copy
To edit a physical copy:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Right-click the physical copy you wish to edit and select Edit.
The Edit Physical Copy dialog box appears.
3. Enter a new name in the Name field.
4. If you wish to save the snapshot for resynchronization, select Save snapshot for later
resync.
5. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing Physical Copies
320-200231 Rev A
331
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Removing a Physical Copy
To remove a physical copy:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Right-click the physical copy you wish to remove.
3. In the menu that appears, click Remove.
The Remove Virtual Volume dialog box appears.
4. (Optional) Select to remove volumes and descendents without active VLUNs, associated
with inactive VLUNs, and from volume sets.
5. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing Physical Copies
Creating a Consistency Group Physical
Copy
To create a consistency group physical copy:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Select two or more virtual volumes with copy space.
3. In the Main Menu Bar, click Actions > Provisioning > Virtual Volume > Create
Consistency Group Physical Copies.
The Create Consistency Group Physical Copies dialog box appears.
4. From the System list, select the system on which the physical copy will be created.
5. (Optional) From the Domain list, select the domain in which the physical copy will
reside.
6. From Parent Volume list, select the volume to copy from.
7. From Destination Volume list, select the volume to copy to.
8. (Optional) If you want to save a snapshot of the physical copy, in order to
resynchronize the base volume and physical copy at a later point in time, click Save
snapshot for later resync.
9. Click OK.
332
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Selecting Multiple Items
Stopping a Physical Copy
To stop a physical copy in progress:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Select the physical copy in progress that you wish to stop.
3. In the Main Menu Bar, click Actions > Provisioning > Virtual Volume > Stop
Physical Copy.
The Stop Physical Copy dialog box appears.
4. Click Yes.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Viewing Physical Copies
Resynchronizing a Physical Copy
To resynchronize a physical copy:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab.
2. Right-click the physical copy you wish to resynchronize.
3. In the menu that appears, click Resync Physical Copy.
The Resync Physical Copy dialog box appears.
4. From the System list, select the system on which the copy resides.
5. (Optional) From the Domain list, select the domain in which the copy is
resynchronized.
6. From the Physical Copy list, select the physical copy to which you wish to
resynchronize.
7. (Optional) If you want to save a snapshot of the physical copy, in order to
resynchronize the base volume and physical copy at a later point in time, click the Save
snapshot for later resync checKiBox.
320-200231 Rev A
333
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
8. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Viewing Physical Copies
Promoting a Physical Copy
To promote a physical copy:
1. Access the Virtual Volumes tab to view the system's physical copies.
2. Right-click the physical copy you wish to promote.
3. In the menu that appears, click Promote Physical Copy.
The Promote Physical Copy dialog box appears.
4. Click Yes to confirm the copy promotion.
See also:
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Viewing Physical Copies
334
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Working with the Layout Grid Manager
The Layout Grid Manager allows you to view layout grids showing patterns of physical
disk, logical disk, virtual volume, and Common Provisioning Group (CPG) usage. These grids
can be used to monitor resource allocation.
Note: Logical disk information only appears if you have set your preferences
in the InForm Management Console to display logical disk information. See
Setting Global Preferences.
The following topics discuss each layout grid:
Viewing Layout Information for All InServs
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Layout Screen
Viewing the CPGs Layout Screen
Viewing the Logical Disks Layout Screen
The following figure describes the structure of each layout grid:
All types of chunklet grid screens share the same basic features:
The far left column lists all physical disks in the storage server using the format:
<cage_ID>:<magazine_position>:<disk_position>
<cage_ID> can be 0 (left side of the drive chassis) or 1 (right side of the drive
chassis).
<magazine_position> can be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
<disk_position> can be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4, where 0 is the position closest to the
backplane.
320-200231 Rev A
335
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Each row represents the storage space of the disk indicated in the left column, with each
cell in the grid representing one chunklet, or 256 megabytes.
Markers indicating the quantity of chunklets in multiples of 10 appear along the top of the
grid.
Viewing Layout Information for All
InServs
To view layout information for all connected InServ Storage Servers:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Layout Grid.
2. In the Management Tree, click InServs.
The Layout screen displays information for each connected InServ Storage Server, including
the number of physical disks, chunklets, free chunklets, failed chunklets, and chunklet size
(in GiB) for each system.
Each system listed in the System column is a link to the layout grid for an individual
system.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
336
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Layout Grid for a Single
System
The layout grid for a single system is presented on three tabs, Virtual Volumes, CPGs,
and Logical Disks. The chunklets for all virtual volumes, Common Provisioning Groups
(CPGs), and logical disks are displayed.
Note: The Logical Disks tab only appears if you have set your preferences
in the InForm Management Console to display logical disk information. See
Setting Global Preferences.
Viewing_the_Virtual_Volume_Layout_Grid
Viewing_the_CPG_Layout_Grid
Viewing_the_Logical_Disk_Layout_Grid
Viewing the Virtual Volume Layout Grid
To view the virtual volume layout for a single system:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Layout Grid.
2. In the Management Tree, click the system with the volumes you wish to view.
3. In the Management Window, click the Virtual Volumes tab.
320-200231 Rev A
337
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the CPG Layout Grid
To view the CPG layout for a single system:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Layout Grid.
2. In the Management Tree, click the system with the CPGs you wish to view.
3. In the Management Window, click the CPGs tab.
Viewing the Logical Disk Layout Grid
To view the logical disk layout for a single system:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Layout Grid.
2. In the Management Tree, click the system with the logical disks you wish to view.
3. In the Management Window, click the Logical Disks tab.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Layout Information for All InServs
338
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Layout
Screen
The virtual volumes layout screen allows you to see the distribution of virtual volumes
across physical disks and which chunklets are used by each virtual volume. The virtual
volume layout screen is split into an upper pane, which shows a summary of virtual volumes
in the system, and a lower pane, which shows the chunklet layout details for a selected
volume from the upper pane.
To view the virtual volumes layout screen:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Layout Grid.
2. In the Management Tree, click Virtual Volumes under the system you wish to view.
The virtual volume layout screen appears as follows:
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
320-200231 Rev A
339
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the CPGs Layout Screen
The Common Provisioning Groups (CPGs) layout screen allows you to see the distribution of
CPGs across physical disks and which chunklets are used by each CPG. The CPG layout
screen is split into an upper pane, which shows a summary of CPGs in the system, and a
lower pane, which shows the chunklet layout details for a selected CPG from the upper
pane.
To view the CPGs layout screen:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Layout Grid.
2. In the Management Tree, click CPGs under the system you wish to view.
The CPGs layout screen appears as follows:
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
340
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Logical Disks Layout Screen
Note: Logical disk information only appears if you have set your preferences
in the InForm Management Console to display logical disk information. See
Setting Global Preferences.
The logical disks layout screen allows you to see how chunklets are used by the logical disks
in the system. The logical disks layout screen is split into an upper pane, which shows a
summary of logical disks in the system, and a lower pane, which shows the chunklet layout
details for a selected logical disk from the upper pane.
To view the logical disks layout screen:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Layout Grid.
2. In the Management Tree, click Logical Disks under the system you wish to view.
The logical disks layout screen appears as follows:
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
320-200231 Rev A
341
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the By Logical Disk Screen
To view logical disk usage for virtual volumes and Common Provisioning Groups (CPGs),
access the By Logical Disk screen.
1. In the
2. In the
view.
3. In the
CPG.
4. In the
Manager Pane, click Layout Grid.
Management Tree, click Virtual Volumes or CPGs under the system you wish to
virtual volumes layout screen or CPGs layout screen, select a virtual volume or a
Main Toolbar, click By Logical Disks.
The By Logical Disks screen for the selected object appears as follows:
Note: The following figures display the By Logical Disk screen for a virtual
volume. The layout of the By Logical Disks screen is similar for virtual
volumes and CPGs.
There are three elements of the By Logical Disks screen, a navigation tree, a summary
pane, and a logical disk layout pane.
342
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Navigation Tree
The navigation tree appears on the left side of the screen. At the top level is the selected
volume or CPG. Below the volume are logical disks. Below logical disks are the position in
set.
Summary Pane
Note: The summary pane only appears for logical disks and sets selected
from the navigation tree.
The summary pane displays information about the selected logical disk or set from the
navigation tree.
320-200231 Rev A
343
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Logical Disk Layout Pane
The logical disk layout pane displays details about how chunklets are laid out in the selected
logical disk or set.
344
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Working with the Remote Copy Manager
The Remote Copy Manager of the InForm Management Console allows you to create and
manage 3PAR Remote Copy configurations on your InServ Storage Servers. The following
topics are discussed:
Viewing Remote Copy Information
Configuring Remote Copy
Working with Remote Copy Groups
Working with Remote Copy Links
Working with Remote Copy Targets
Remote Copy Disaster Recovery
Note: 3PAR Remote Copy requires a 3PAR Remote Copy license. For
additional information about the license, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts
Guide.
Note: Working with 3PAR Remote Copy requires that all systems are
connected.
Viewing Remote Copy Information
The InForm Management Console allows you to view information about connected systems
using 3PAR Remote Copy. Use the InForm Management Console to view the following:
Available Remote Copy Systems
Remote Copy System Ports
Configured Remote Copy Systems
Remote Copy Groups
Remote Copy Virtual Volumes
Remote Copy Links
Remote Copy Targets
Note: 3PAR Remote Copy requires a 3PAR Remote Copy license. For
additional information about the license, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts
Guide.
320-200231 Rev A
345
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Available Remote Copy Systems
Remote Copy-ready systems are displayed under the Available InServs node in the
Management Tree.
Note: A Remote Copy-ready system means that the system has a Remote
Copy license, and has Remote Copy over Fibre Channel (RCFC) or Remote
Copy over IP (RCIP) ports, but has not yet set up Remote Copy.
To view available Remote Copy systems:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Remote Copy.
2. In the Management Tree, click Available InServs.
The Available InServs screen appears as follows in the Management Window:
The Available InServs screen displays systems with available Remote Copy over Fibre
Channel and/or Remote Copy over IP ports. Each numeric value displayed in blue under the
RCFC, RCIP, and Total columns is a link to that system's Remote Copy port information.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Remote Copy System Ports
346
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Remote Copy System Ports
To view a system's available Remote Copy ports:
Access the Available InServs screen and then click the numeric value under the RCFC,
RCIP, or Total column.
or
1. In the Manager Pane, click Remote Copy.
2. In the Management Tree, under Available InServs, click the Ports node under the
system whose Remote Copy ports you wish to view.
Information about a system's Remote Copy ports is displayed on four tabs, RC Ports,
RCIP, RCFC, and Inventory.
RC Ports Tab
The RC Ports tab displays a summary of all Remote Copy ports on a system.
The upper pane of the RC Ports tab displays summary information about the system's
Remote Copy ports. The lower pane displays details about a selected port from the upper
pane.
320-200231 Rev A
347
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The following information is displayed in the upper pane:
Column
Description
Position
The location of the port in node:slot:port format.
WWN/MAC
The World Wide Name (WWN) or Media Access Control (MAC) address
of the connected device.
State
The state of the port. See System and Component Status Icons.
Type
The type of port, either Remote Copy over IP (RCIP) or Remote Copy
over Fibre Channel (RCFC).
Connected
Device Type
Type of device that the port is connected to. Free, Disk, Host, or
InServ.
Connected
Device
Name of device that the port is connected to, e.g. host1, cage0.
Mode
Port firmware mode setting. Ports in Initiator mode are connected to
drive cages and ports in Target mode export to hosts. Suspended
mode is for target ports that have not yet been initialized by the
system (rare). Peer mode is for Ethernet ports.
For information about the lower pane, see RCIP_Tab and RCFC_Tab.
348
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
RCIP Tab
The RCIP tab displays a summary of all Remote Copy over IP (RCIP) ports on a system.
The upper pane of the RCIP tab displays summary information about the system's RCIP
ports. The lower pane displays details about a selected RCIP port from the upper pane.
The following information is displayed in the upper pane:
Column
Description
Position
The location of the port in node:slot:port format.
MAC
The Media Access Control (MAC) address of the connected device.
State
The state of the port. See System and Component Status Icons.
IP
Address
IP address of the RCIP port.
Subnet
Mask
Netmask address for the RCIP interface.
Gateway
The address of a local IP router on the same network as the InServ, used
to forward traffic to destinations beyond the local network.
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit. The greatest amount of data or "packet" size
that can be transferred in one physical frame on a network. MTU setting for
320-200231 Rev A
349
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
the iSCSI port. The default setting is 1500. When supported by the
network, an MTU value of 9000 should be used.
Rate
Rate that data can be transferred over the port (1 Gbps, 2 Gbps or 4
Gbps). When there is no specified value, no connection exists.
The following information is displayed in the lower pane:
Group
Field
Description
Location
Port location.
Type
Indicates whether the port is FC, iSCSI, RCIP, or RCFC.
Rate
Rate that data can be transferred over the port (1 Gbps, 2
Gbps or 4 Gbps). When there is no specified value, no
connection exists.
Connected
Device Type
Type of device that the port is connected to. Free, Disk,
Host, or InServ.
Connected
Device
Name of device that the port is connected to, e.g. host1,
cage0.
Mode
Port firmware mode setting. Ports in Initiator mode are
connected to drive cages and ports in Target mode export
to hosts. Suspended mode is for target ports that have
not yet been initialized by the system (rare). Peer mode is
for Ethernet ports.
State
Current state of the port.
MAC
The Media Access Control address for the Ethernet
interface.
IP Address
IP address of the RCIP port.
Gateway
The address of a local IP router on the same network as the
InServ, used to forward traffic to destinations beyond the
local network.
Subnet Mask
Netmask address for the RCIP interface.
General
IP
Settings
350
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Resources
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit. The greatest amount of data
or "packet" size that can be transferred in one physical
frame on a network. MTU setting for the iSCSI port. The
default setting is 1500. When supported by the network, an
MTU value of 9000 should be used.
Configured
Rate
The duplex speed, Half or Full.
Duplex
Model of the adapter that contains the port (for example,
Intel PRO/1000MT).
Adapter Type
The TCP port number used by the iSCSI or RCIP card.
Total Data
Throughput
The throughput in KIB/sec.
RCFC Tab
The RCFC tab displays a summary of all Remote Copy over Fibre Channel (RCFC) ports on a
system.
320-200231 Rev A
351
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The upper pane of the RCFC tab displays summary information about the system's RCFC
ports. The lower pane displays details about a selected RCFC port from the upper pane.
The following information is displayed in the upper pane:
Column
Description
Position
The port location in node:slot:port format.
State
The state of the port. See System and Component Status Icons.
Type
Indicates whether the port is FC, iSCSI, RCIP, or RCFC.
Mode
Port firmware mode setting. Ports in Initiator mode are connected to
drive cages and ports in Target mode export to hosts. Suspended
mode is for target ports that have not yet been initialized by the system
(rare). Peer mode is for Ethernet ports.
Topology
Type of connection (Private Loop, Public Loop, or Point-Point).
Rate
Rate that data can be transferred over the port (1 Gbps, 2 Gbps or 4
Gbps). When there is no specified value, no connection exists.
Remote
Port WWN
Remote
Node WWN
World Wide Name of the remote port.
World Wide Name of the remote node.
The following information is displayed in the lower pane:
Group
Field
Description
Location
Port location.
Port WWN
Port World Wide Name.
Node WWN
Node World Wide Name.
Type
Indicates whether the port is FC, iSCSI, RCIP, or RCFC.
Rate
Rate that data can be transferred over the port (1 Gbps,
2 Gbps or 4 Gbps). When there is no specified value,
no connection exists.
Connected
Device Type
Type of device that the port is connected to. Free, Disk,
Host, or InServ.
Connected
Device
Name of device that the port is connected to, e.g. host1,
cage0.
General
352
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Resources
Mode
Port firmware mode setting. Ports in Initiator mode are
connected to drive cages and ports in Target mode
export to hosts. Suspended mode is for target ports
that have not yet been initialized by the system (rare).
Peer mode is for Ethernet ports.
State
Current state of the port.
Total Data
Throughput
The throughput in KIB/sec.
Connection
Mode
The type of port connection.
Connection
Type
Connection type or port connection setting (Loop,
Point, or Loop-point). When the port is set to Looppoint, both loop and point-to-point connections are
enabled.
Configured
Rate
Data transfer rate setting (for example,
1 Gbps). Auto indicates that the system automatically
selects the rate.
Max Rate
Maximum rate of connection from the port.
Class 2
Indicates whether Fibre Channel service Class 2 is
Disabled, Ack 1 or Ack 0.
VCN
For fabric attached ports, indicates the VLUN change
notification setting. When set to Enabled, notices are
generated and sent to the fabric controller. When set to
Disabled, no notification is sent.
Unique Node
WWN
Indicates whether the node's WWN is Enabled or
Disabled.
Interrupt
Coalesce
If Disabled, each I/O generates a separate interrupt to
the HBA port driver rather than generating one interrupt
for multiple I/O completion.
Topology
Type of connection (Private Loop, Public Loop, or
Point-Point).
Class
Identifies which Fibre Channel classes of service are
enabled (2, 3, or 2/3). 2/3 indicates that both Class 2
and Class 3 are enabled.
Settings
Fibre
Channel
Settings
320-200231 Rev A
353
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Adaptor Type
Model of the Fibre Channel adapter that contains the
port (for example, QLOGIC 2302).
Remote Port
WWN
World Wide Name of the remote port.
Remote Node
WWN
World Wide Name of the remote node.
Mode Change
Indicates whether port mode change from initiator to
target or vice versa is Allowed or Prohibited. This
setting is configured using the InForm CLI command
controlport.
Link State
The state of the link.
Inventory Tab
The Inventory tab displays information about the Remote Copy ports on a system such as
the ports' manufacturer and firmware version. The upper pane of the Inventory tab
displays summary information about the system's RCFC and RCIP ports. The lower pane
displays details about a selected RCFC or RCIP port from the upper pane. For information
about the lower pane, see RCIP_Tab and RCFC_Tab.
354
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Remote Copy Links
Viewing Remote Copy Targets
Viewing Configured Remote Copy
Systems
To view configured Remote Copy systems:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Remote Copy.
2. In the Management Tree, click Remote Copy Configuration node for the Remote
Copy configuration you wish to view.
Information about the selected configured Remote Copy systems appears on three tabs,
Summary, Tasks, and Alerts, in the Management Window.
320-200231 Rev A
355
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Summary Tab
The Summary tab is divided into a left pane and right pane. The left pane presents a
graphical representation of Remote Copy setup between the systems. The right pane
displays the health of each system in the Remote Copy setup, any new alerts, running
tasks, a summary of the Remote Copy groups, and a Remote Copy Link performance chart.
Remote Copy Link Performance Chart
The Remote Copy Link performance chart can be set to graph the thoughput (KIBs/Sec) or
heartbeat (round trip in ms). The graph's legend is displayed in tabular format. Clicking any
of the rows in the legend results in that row's line becoming bold in the graph. Like other
charts in the InForm Management Console, you can customize the colors displayed in the
graph by clicking a color in the Color column and then selecting a new color from the color
palette that appears. At any time, you can play, pause, or stop the graph. Clicking pause or
stop causes data plotting to stop; however, data collection continues in the background.
Right-clicking the graph displays a menu, which allows you to perform actions such as
viewing and setting the chart's properties, copying the chart, and saving the chart.
356
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Tasks Tab
The Tasks tab is divided into an upper pane and lower pane. The upper pane displays a
summary of all Remote Copy tasks for the Remote Copy systems. The lower pane displays
details about a selected system from the upper pane. The format is similar to the format
described in Displaying Tasks.
Alerts Tab
The Alerts tab is divided into an upper and lower pane. The upper pane displays all Remote
Copy-related alerts. The lower pane displays the details about an alert selected from the
upper pane. The format is similar to the format described in Viewing System Alerts.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Remote Copy Links
Displaying Tasks
Viewing System Alerts
320-200231 Rev A
357
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Remote Copy Groups
A Remote Copy group is a group of virtual volumes on the same storage server that are
logically related, and on which Remote Copy operations are performed.
To view Remote Copy groups:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Remote Copy.
2. In the Management Tree, click Groups under the Remote Copy Configuration node
for the Remote Copy configuration you wish to view.
Information about Remote Copy groups appears on three panes in the Management
Window:
The left pane displays a graphical representation of the selected Remote Copy
configuration. The image includes the type of Remote Copy relationship (Remote Copy
over IP or Remote Copy over Fibre Channel) between the servers in the Remote Copy
configuration, the direction of replication (indicated with an arrow) between the servers,
the synchronization and Remote Copy status of the Remote Copy groups, and the number
of volumes being replicated. This image is updated for the Remote Copy group selected
from the upper right pane.
The upper right pane displays a table of the Remote Copy groups in the selected Remote
Copy configuration.
The lower right pane displays a table of the virtual volume(s) belonging to the selected
Remote Copy group from the upper right pane. The table can be filtered to display
information about virtual volume Pairs, the Source virtual volume, or the Backup virtual
volume.
Note: You can additionally view only synchronous Remote Copy groups or
asynchronous periodic Remote Copy groups by clicking either Synchronous
or Periodic, respectively, under the Groups node in the Management Tree.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Configured Remote Copy Systems
358
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Remote Copy Virtual Volumes
To view Remote Copy virtual volumes:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Remote Copy.
2. In the Management Tree, click Virtual Volumes under the Remote Copy
Configuration node for the Remote Copy volumes you wish to view.
Information about Remote Copy virtual volumes appears on two panes in the Management
Window:
All virtual volumes associated with the Remote Copy configuration you selected are
displayed in a table in the upper pane of the Management Window. The table displays
Remote Copy information such as where the volumes are exported, the volume's Remote
Copy status (if the volume is a primary or secondary volume), and to which Remote Copy
group the volume belongs.
The lower pane displays details about a single volume selected from the upper pane. The
detailed information is displayed on eight tabs, Summary, Settings, Advanced, Logical
Disks, SCSI Reservations, VLUNs, Layout, and Alerts. See Viewing the Virtual
Volumes Tab.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Configured Remote Copy Systems
Viewing the Virtual Volumes Tab
Viewing Remote Copy Links
Remote Copy links are associated with Remote Copy target definitions, and are used to
transmit and receive data between Remote Copy systems.
To view Remote Copy links:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Remote Copy.
2. In the Management Tree, click Links under the Remote Copy Configuration node for
the Remote Copy links you wish to view.
Information about the Remote Copy links appears on two panes in the Management
Window:
The left pane displays a graphical representation of the selected Remote Copy
configuration. The image includes the type of Remote Copy relationship (Remote Copy
over IP or Remote Copy over Fibre Channel) between the servers in the Remote Copy
320-200231 Rev A
359
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
configuration, the number of links between the Remote Copy systems, and the current
state of the links (whether the links are up or down).
You can optionally view the systems' physical connectivity by selecting the View Physical
Connectivity checKiBox at the lower left side of the pane. When selected, the image
displays the Remote Copy systems' port locations, the link IP addresses, and how the
ports are connected.
The right pane displays information about the Remote Copy links for each Remote Copy
system in tabular format. Transmitting links are displayed as the target system's name
under the Targets column. Receiving links are displayed as receive under the Targets
column. Additional information includes each link's port location, IP address, and status.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Configured Remote Copy Systems
Viewing Remote Copy Targets
Remote Copy target definitions are descriptors on one Remote Copy system that identify
another a Remote Copy system. In a Remote Copy server pair, the servers are each defined
as targets, relative to each other, for Remote Copy operations.
To view Remote Copy targets:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Remote Copy.
2. In the Management Tree, click Targets under the Remote Copy Configuration node
for the Remote Copy targets you wish to view.
Information about the Remote Copy targets appears on two panes in the Management
Window:
The left pane displays a graphical representation of the selected Remote Copy
configuration. The image includes the type of Remote Copy relationship (Remote Copy
over IP or Remote Copy over Fibre Channel) between the servers in the Remote Copy
configuration, the names of the Remote Copy systems, and the current state of the
targets.
You can optionally view the systems' target labels by selecting the Show Target Labels
checKiBox at the lower left side of the pane. When selected, the image displays the
Remote Copy systems' target labels adjacent to the InServ Storage Server graphic
representing each system. For example, in the following image, the target of the InServ
Storage Server labeled S424 (Lab2) is 4 (Lab1):
360
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The right pane displays information about the Remote Copy targets for each Remote Copy
system in tabular format. Information displayed for each system's targets includes the
target's name, target ID, connection type, status, backup system information, and active
policy.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Configured Remote Copy Systems
Configuring Remote Copy
The InForm Management Console allows you to setup several different configurations of
3PAR Remote Copy, as well as configure Remote Copy ports. The following types of Remote
Copy are supported:
1-to-1 Remote Copy - In 1-to-1 Remote Copy, data is mirrored between two InServ
Storage Servers.
1-to-N Remote Copy - In 1-to-N Remote Copy, a single InServ Storage Server uses
multiple InServ Storage Servers as backup servers.
N-to-1 Remote Copy - In an N-to-1 Remote Copy relationship, a maximum of four
primary (source) InServ Storage Servers use the same InServ Storage Server as backup
server.
Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy - In a Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy
configuration, a single Remote Copy group is copied directly to volumes on two other
InServ Storage Servers by admitting the volumes to groups with two targets. One copy is
in synchronous Remote Copy mode, the other copy is in asynchronous periodic Remote
Copy mode.
Use the Remote Copy configuration best suited to your needs. For setup information, refer
to the following topics:
Configuring Remote Copy Ports
Configuring 1-to-1 Remote Copy
Configuring 1-to-N Remote Copy
Configuring N-to-1 Remote Copy
320-200231 Rev A
361
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Configuring Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy
Pinging Remote Copy Links
Note: 3PAR Remote Copy requires a 3PAR Remote Copy license. For
additional information about the license, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts
Guide.
Configuring Remote Copy Ports
To configure a Remote Copy over Fibre Channel (RCFC) port or a Remote Copy over IP
(RCIP) port:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Remote Copy.
2. In the Common Actions Panel, click Configure RC Port.
The <Port Type> Configuration wizard appears.
3. Select a system from the System list.
The remaining fields in the wizard change to reflect RCFC or RCIP set up depending on
the system selected.
4. Select a port from the Port list.
5. The remaining fields are populated with the selected port's information.
6. Follow the directions in Configuring an RCFC Port or Configuring an RCIP Port to edit the
port information.
7. Click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Configuring an RCFC Port
Configuring an RCIP Port
Viewing Remote Copy System Ports
362
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Configuring 1-to-1 Remote Copy
Note: 3PAR Remote Copy requires a 3PAR Remote Copy license. For
additional information about the license, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts
Guide.
A 1-to-1 Remote Copy relationship involves two InServ Storage Servers. Depending on how
the 1-to-1 Remote Copy relationship is configured, one server can serve as the primary
(source) server and the other the backup server (unidirectional), or both servers can serve
as both the primary and backup servers (bidirectional).
Note: In order to configure 1-to-1 Remote Copy, you must have two
available InServ Storage servers with configured Remote Copy ports.
To configure 1-to-1 Remote Copy:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Remote Copy.
2. In the Common Actions panel, click New Configuration.
The New Remote Copy Configuration wizard appears.
Step 1. Targets
1. Under Select a Topology, click 1-1.
2. Under Assign Systems, click a storage server graphic. In the menu that appears,
select a storage server to assign. Repeat for the other storage server graphic.
Note: Only available InServ Storage Servers, which satisfy requirements
appear. See the 3PAR Remote Copy User's Guide for additional information.
3. (Optional) Under Update System's Location, enter a location for each storage server,
e.g. Lab 1, New York.
4. (Optional) Under Name Targets, the Target Name fields are automatically populated
with the storage server names. You can enter an alternate name if you wish.
5. Click Next.
320-200231 Rev A
363
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 2. Links
1. A graphical representation of each system's Remote Copy ports appears under Create
Links. Click and drag from one port on one system to a port on the other system.
Repeat for a second port.
2. For IP links, in the IP Settings groups for each system/port, all fields are automatically
populated based on the link relationship you established under Create Links.
a. (Optional) Enter the gateway address for each system/port.
b. (Optional) Click Apply to test the link configuration, or Ping to test the
communication between the links.
3. For Fibre Channel links, in the Settings groups for each system/port:
a. Connection Type - Select Point for point-to-point mode or Loop for arbitrated loop
mode.
b. Configured Rate - Select 1, 2, 4 Gbps, or Auto (default).
c. Click Apply to test the link configuration.
4. Click Next.
Note: If Fibre Channel ports are not displayed, the ports may not be zoned
correctly, or may not be physically connected. See Configuring Fibre Channel
Ports for RCFC for additional information.
Step 3. Groups
1. In the Source group:
a. System - Select the system on which the Remote Copy group will reside.
b. (Optional) Domain - Select the domain in which the Remote Copy group will
reside.
c. Group - Enter a name for the Remote Copy group.
d. (Optional) Start group after completion - Select if you want the Remote Copy
group to be started (start mirroring) after it is created.
e. (Optional) Do not perform initial sync - Select if you do not want the created
Remote Copy group to be synchronized with its backup group.
2. In the Backup group:
a. Name - The system NOT selected as the source system, automatically appears.
b. Mode - Select Synchronous or Periodic.
c. Sync Period - If you selected Periodic, select second(s), minute(s), hour(s),
or day(s) and enter a numeric value for when you wish the source and backup
groups to synchronize.
3. Click Add.
4. (Optional) Repeat steps 1 through 3 to create additional Remote Copy groups.
Note: When creating additional groups, if you select a server other than the
server selected during the first instance of group creation, you will create a
bidirectional Remote Copy relationship where each storage server will be both
the primary and backup servers to the other.
5. Click Next.
364
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 4. Virtual Volumes
1. Select a Remote Copy group from the Group list.
2. Under the Source Volume on list, select a virtual volume.
3. Under the Backup Volume on list:
a. Select either Existing or New.
b. If you selected Existing, select a backup virtual volume.
c. If you selected New:
i.
Name - Enter a name for the backup virtual volume.
ii.
CPG under User CPG - Select a CPG from which the volume's user space is
allocated.
iii.
CPG under Copy CPG - Select a CPG from which the volume's copy space is
allocated.
iv.
(Optional) In the Allocation Warning and Allocation Limit text boxes, enter
the appropriate information. If you do not want these options used, uncheck
the Enabled box.
Note: When selecting volumes, you can filter the lists to include by clicking
the down arrow and selecting Virtual Volumes, Provisioning, and Virtual
Size. To clear the filter, click Clear.
4. Click Add.
5. (Optional) Repeat steps 1 through 4 to add additional virtual volumes to your Remote
Copy group(s).
6. Click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Configured Remote Copy Systems
320-200231 Rev A
365
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Configuring 1-to-N Remote Copy
Note: 3PAR Remote Copy requires a 3PAR Remote Copy license. For
additional information about the license, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts
Guide.
In a 1-to-N Remote Copy relationship, a single primary (source) InServ Storage Server uses
multiple InServ Storage Servers as backup servers. 1-to-N Remote Copy configurations can
operate in either a combination of unidirectional and bidirectional (for a single Remote Copy
group pair), or in complete unidirectional functionality. For the current release, a 1-to-N
Remote Copy configuration can have a maximum of two backup servers.
Note: In order to configure 1-to-N Remote Copy, you must have at least two
available InServ Storage servers with configured Remote Copy ports.
To configure 1-to-N Remote Copy:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Remote Copy.
2. In the Common Actions panel, click New Configuration.
The New Remote Copy Configuration wizard appears.
Step 1. Targets
1. Under Select a Topology, click 1-N.
2. Under Assign Systems:
a. Select the total number of systems you are configuring for the 1-to-N setup.
b. Click a storage server graphic. In the menu that appears, select a storage server to
assign. Repeat for the other storage server graphics.
Note: Only available InServ Storage Servers,which satisfy requirements
appear. See the 3PAR Remote Copy User's Guide for additional information.
3. (Optional) Under Update System's Location, enter a location for each storage server,
e.g. Lab 1, New York.
4. (Optional) Under Name Targets, the Target Name fields are automatically populated
with the storage server names. You can enter an alternate name if you wish.
5. Click Next.
366
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 2. Links
1. A graphical representation of each system's Remote Copy ports appears under Create
Links. Click and drag from one port on one system to a port on the other system.
Repeat for the other Remote Copy ports.
2. For IP links, in the IP Settings groups for each system/port, all fields are automatically
populated based on the link relationship you established under Create Links.
a. (Optional) Enter the gateway address for each system/port.
b. (Optional) Click Apply to test the link configuration, or Ping to test the
communication between the links.
3. For Fibre Channel links, in the Settings groups for each system/port:
a. Connection Type - Select Point for point-to-point mode or Loop for arbitrated loop
mode.
b. Configured Rate - Select 1, 2, 4 Gbps, or Auto (default).
c. Click Apply to test the link configuration.
4. Click Next.
Note: If Fibre Channel ports are not displayed, the ports may not be zoned
correctly, or may not be physically connected. See Configuring Fibre Channel
Ports for RCFC for additional information.
Step 3. Groups
1. In the Source group:
a. System - Select the system on which the Remote Copy group will reside.
b. (Optional) Domain - Select the domain in which the Remote Copy group will
reside.
c. Group - Enter a name for the Remote Copy group.
d. (Optional) Start group after completion - Select if you want the Remote Copy
group to be started (start mirroring) after it is created.
e. (Optional) Do not perform initial sync - Select if you do not want the created
Remote Copy group to be synchronized with its backup group.
2. In the Backup group:
a. Name - The system(s) NOT selected as the source system, automatically appears.
Select a system.
b. Mode - Select Synchronous or Periodic.
c. Sync Period - If you selected Periodic, select second(s), minute(s), hour(s),
or day(s) and enter a numeric value for when you wish the source and backup
groups to synchronize.
3. Click Add.
4. (Optional) Repeat steps 1 through 3 to create additional Remote Copy groups.
Note: When creating additional groups, if you select a server other than the
server selected during the first instance of group creation, you will create a
bidirectional Remote Copy relationship where each storage server will be both
the primary and backup servers to the other. For N-to-1 Remote Copy, you
can only create a bidirectional configuration for one Remote Copy group pair.
320-200231 Rev A
367
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
5. Click Next.
Step 4. Virtual Volumes
1. Select a Remote Copy group from the Group list.
2. Under the Source Volume on list, select a virtual volume.
3. Under the Backup Volume on list:
a. Select either Existing or New.
b. If you selected Existing, select a backup virtual volume.
c. If you selected New:
i.
Name - Enter a name for the backup virtual volume.
ii.
CPG under User CPG - Select a CPG from which the volume's user space is
allocated.
iii.
CPG under Copy CPG - Select a CPG from which the volume's copy space is
allocated.
iv.
(Optional) In the Allocation Warning and Allocation Limit text boxes, enter
the appropriate information. If you do not want these options used, uncheck
the Enabled box.
Note: When selecting volumes, you can filter the lists to include by clicking
the down arrow and selecting Virtual Volumes, Provisioning, and Virtual
Size. To clear the filter, click Clear.
4. Click Add.
5. (Optional) Repeat steps 1 through 4 to add additional virtual volumes to your Remote
Copy group(s).
6. Click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Configured Remote Copy Systems
368
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Configuring N-to-1 Remote Copy
Note: 3PAR Remote Copy requires a 3PAR Remote Copy license. For
additional information about the license, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts
Guide.
In an N-to-1 Remote Copy relationship, a maximum of four primary (source) InServ Storage
Servers use the same InServ Storage Server as backup server. N-to-1 Remote Copy
configurations can operate in either a combination of unidirectional and bidirectional (for a
single Remote Copy group pair), or in complete unidirectional functionality.
Note: In order to configure N-to-1 Remote Copy, you must have at least two
available InServ Storage servers with configured Remote Copy ports.
To configure N-to-1 Remote Copy:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Remote Copy.
2. In the Common Actions panel, click New Configuration.
The New Remote Copy Configuration wizard appears.
Step 1. Targets
1. Under Select a Topology, click N-1.
2. Under Assign Systems:
a. Select the total number of systems you are configuring for the N-to-1 setup.
b. Click a storage server graphic. In the menu that appears, select a storage server to
assign. Repeat for the other storage server graphics.
Note: Only available InServ Storage Servers, which satisfy requirements
appear. See the 3PAR Remote Copy User's Guide for additional information.
3. (Optional) Under Update System's Location, enter a location for each storage server,
e.g. Lab 1, New York.
4. (Optional) Under Name Targets, the Target Name fields are automatically populated
with the storage server names. You can enter an alternate name if you wish.
5. Click Next.
320-200231 Rev A
369
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 2. Links
1. A graphical representation of each system's Remote Copy ports appears under Create
Links. Click and drag from one port on one system to a port on the other system.
Repeat for the other Remote Copy ports.
2. For IP links, in the IP Settings groups for each system/port, all fields are automatically
populated based on the link relationship you established under Create Links.
a. (Optional) Enter the gateway address for each system/port.
b. (Optional) Click Apply to test the link configuration, or Ping to test the
communication between the links.
3. For Fibre Channel links, in the Settings groups for each system/port:
a. Connection Type - Select Point for point-to-point mode or Loop for arbitrated loop
mode.
b. Configured Rate - Select 1, 2, 4 Gbps, or Auto (default).
c. Click Apply to test the link configuration.
4. Click Next.
Note: If Fibre Channel ports are not displayed, the ports may not be zoned
correctly, or may not be physically connected. See Configuring Fibre Channel
Ports for RCFC for additional information.
Step 3. Groups
1. In the Source group:
a. System - Select the system on which the Remote Copy group will reside.
b. (Optional) Domain - Select the domain in which the Remote Copy group will
reside.
c. Group - Enter a name for the Remote Copy group.
d. (Optional) Start group after completion - Select if you want the Remote Copy
group to be started (start mirroring) after it is created.
e. (Optional) Do not perform initial sync - Select if you do not want the created
Remote Copy group to be synchronized with its backup group.
2. In the Backup group:
a. Name - The system NOT selected as the source system, automatically appears.
b. Mode - Select Synchronous or Periodic.
c. Sync Period - If you selected Periodic, select second(s), minute(s), hour(s),
or day(s) and enter a numeric value for when you wish the source and backup
groups to synchronize.
3. Click Add.
4. (Optional) Repeat steps 1 through 3 to create additional Remote Copy groups.
Note: When creating additional groups, if you select a server other than the
server selected during the first instance of group creation, you will create a
bidirectional Remote Copy relationship where each storage server will be both
the primary and backup servers to the other. For 1-to-N Remote Copy, you
can only create a bidirectional configuration for one Remote Copy group pair.
370
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
5. Click Next.
Step 4. Virtual Volumes
1. Select a Remote Copy group from the Group list.
2. Under the Source Volume on list, select a virtual volume.
3. Under the Backup Volume on list:
a. Select either Existing or New.
b. If you selected Existing, select a backup virtual volume.
c. If you selected New:
i.
Name - Enter a name for the backup virtual volume.
ii.
CPG under User CPG - Select a CPG from which the volume's user space is
allocated.
iii.
CPG under Copy CPG - Select a CPG from which the volume's copy space is
allocated.
iv.
(Optional) In the Allocation Warning and Allocation Limit text boxes, enter
the appropriate information. If you do not want these options used, uncheck
the Enabled box.
Note: When selecting volumes, you can filter the lists to include by clicking
the down arrow and selecting Virtual Volumes, Provisioning, and Virtual
Size. To clear the filter, click Clear.
4. Click Add.
5. (Optional) Repeat steps 1 through 4 to add additional virtual volumes to your Remote
Copy group(s).
6. Click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Configured Remote Copy Systems
320-200231 Rev A
371
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Configuring Synchronous Long Distance
Remote Copy
Note: 3PAR Remote Copy requires a 3PAR Remote Copy license. For
additional information about the license, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts
Guide.
In a Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy configuration, a single Remote Copy group is
copied directly to volumes on two other InServ Storage Servers by admitting the volumes to
groups with two targets. Synchronous mode Remote Copy is used between the primary
(source) and backup server that are physically closer to each other where a high
bandwidth/low latency connection is shared. Asynchronous periodic (periodic) Remote Copy
is used between the primary server and backup server that are physically farther apart
sharing a lesser connection. The synchronous connection must be a Fibre Channel
connection, while the asynchronous periodic connection can be either all Fibre Channel (over
an IP network) or all IP. Only unidirectional functionality is allowed between Remote Copy
pairs.
Note: In order to configure Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy, you
must have three available InServ Storage servers with configured Remote
Copy ports. At least two of the servers must have Fibre Channel ports.
To configure Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Remote Copy.
2. In the Common Actions panel, click New Configuration.
The New Remote Copy Configuration wizard appears.
Step 1. Targets
1. Under Select a Topology, click Synchronous Long Distance.
2. Under Assign Systems:
a. Click a storage server graphic. In the menu that appears, select a storage server to
assign. Repeat for the other storage server graphics.
Note: Only available InServ Storage Servers, which satisfy requirements
appear. See the 3PAR Remote Copy User's Guide for additional information.
3. (Optional) Under Update System's Location, enter a location for each storage server,
e.g. Lab 1, New York.
372
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
4. (Optional) Under Name Targets, the Target Name fields are automatically populated
with the storage server names. You can enter an alternate name if you wish.
5. Click Next.
Step 2. Links
1. A graphical representation of each system's Remote Copy ports appears under Create
Links. Click and drag from one port on one system to a port on the other system.
Repeat for the other Remote Copy ports.
Note: You must use Fibre Channel links for the servers you plan to configure
with synchronous mode Remote Copy.
2. For IP links, in the IP Settings groups for each system/port, all fields are automatically
populated based on the link relationship you established under Create Links.
a. (Optional) Enter the gateway address for each system/port.
b. (Optional) Click Apply to test the link configuration, or Ping to test the
communication between the links.
3. For Fibre Channel links, in the Settings groups for each system/port:
a. Connection Type - Select Point for point-to-point mode or Loop for arbitrated loop
mode.
b. Configured Rate - Select 1, 2, 4 Gbps, or Auto (default).
c. Click Apply to test the link configuration.
4. Click Next.
Note: If Fibre Channel ports are not displayed, the ports may not be zoned
correctly, or may not be physically connected. See Configuring Fibre Channel
Ports for RCFC for additional information.
Step 3. Groups
1. In the Source group:
a. System - Select the system on which the Remote Copy group will reside.
b. (Optional) Domain - Select the domain in which the Remote Copy group will
reside.
c. Group - Enter a name for the Remote Copy group.
d. (Optional) Start group after completion - Select if you want the Remote Copy
group to be started (start mirroring) after it is created.
e. (Optional) Do not perform initial sync - Select if you do not want the created
Remote Copy group to be synchronized with its backup group.
2. In the first Backup group:
a. Name - The system NOT selected as the source system, automatically appears.
b. Mode - Select Synchronous or Periodic.
320-200231 Rev A
373
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
c. Syn Period - If you selected Periodic, select second(s), minute(s), hour(s), or
day(s) and enter a numeric value for when you wish the source and backup groups
to synchronize.
3. In the second Backup group:
a. Name - The system NOT selected as the source system, automatically appears.
b. Mode - Select Synchronous or Periodic.
c. Syn Period - If you selected Periodic, select second(s), minute(s), hour(s), or
day(s) and enter a numeric value for when you wish the source and backup groups
to synchronize.
Note: The synchronous connection must be a Fibre Channel connection.
4. Click Add.
5. (Optional) Repeat steps 1 through 4 to create additional Remote Copy groups.
6. Click Next.
Step 4. Virtual Volumes
1. Select a Remote Copy group from the Group list.
2. Under the Source Volume on list, select a virtual volume.
3. Under the first Backup Volume on list:
a. Select either Existing or New.
b. If you selected Existing, select a backup virtual volume.
c. If you selected New:
i.
Name - Enter a name for the backup virtual volume.
ii.
CPG under User CPG - Select a CPG from which the volume's user space is
allocated.
iii.
CPG under Copy CPG - Select a CPG from which the volume's copy space is
allocated.
iv.
(Optional) In the Allocation Warning and Allocation Limit text boxes, enter
the appropriate information. If you do not want these options used, uncheck
the Enabled box.
4. Under the second Backup Volume on list:
a. Select either Existing or New.
b. If you selected Existing, select a backup virtual volume.
c. If you selected New:
i.
Name - Enter a name for the backup virtual volume.
ii.
CPG under User CPG - Select a CPG from which the volume's user space is
allocated.
iii.
CPG under Copy CPG - Select a CPG from which the volume's copy space is
allocated.
iv.
(Optional) In the Allocation Warning and Allocation Limit text boxes, enter
the appropriate information. If you do not want these options used, uncheck
the Enabled box.
374
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: When selecting volumes, you can filter the lists to include by clicking
the down arrow and selecting Virtual Volumes, Provisioning, and Virtual
Size. To clear the filter, click Clear.
5. Click Add.
6. (Optional) Repeat steps 1 through 5 to add additional virtual volumes to your Remote
Copy group(s).
7. Click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Configured Remote Copy Systems
Pinging RCIP Links
When creating Remote Copy over IP (RCIP) links, you are provided the opportunity to
configure and ping the link ports to verify their validity and communication.
When pinging RCIP link ports:
You can click Details in the Port Configuration or Ping dialog boxes to show or hide
details about the configuration or ping operation, respectively.
If the MTU value of the ports is different, for example one value 1500 and the other value
9000, the lower packet size (1500) is used during the ping operation.
If both ports' MTU values are 9000, Jumbo Ping is displayed as the Ping group box title.
Configuring and Pinging the Remote Copy Links
Clicking Apply after entering or changing the requested link information during Remote
Copy link creation results in the entered configuration first being tested to check its validity,
and then proceeding with the ping operation to check communication between the link
ports. The ping is not executed if the configuration fails.
320-200231 Rev A
375
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Pinging the Remote Copy Links
Clicking Ping after entering or changing the requested link information during Remote Copy
link creation results in a ping operation on the entered link ports.
See also:
Creating Remote Copy Links
Configuring 1-to-1 Remote Copy
Configuring 1-to-N Remote Copy
Configuring N-to-1 Remote Copy
Configuring Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy
Adding to a Remote Copy Configuration
Working with Remote Copy Groups
When you have created a Remote Copy relationship between your InServ Storage Servers,
you can add and create new Remote Copy groups, as well as edit and manage existing
Remote Copy groups.
Creating Remote Copy Groups
Starting Remote Copy Groups
Stopping Remote Copy Groups
Editing Remote Copy Groups
Removing Remote Copy Groups
Creating Remote Copy Groups
To create a Remote Copy group:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Remote Copy.
2. In the Management Tree, select the Remote Copy Configuration to which you want
to add a Remote Copy group.
3. In the Common Actions Panel, click Create Remote Copy Group.
The Create Remote Copy Group wizard appears.
4. In the Source group:
376
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
a. System - Select the primary (source) system on which the Remote Copy group will
be created.
b. (Optional) Domain - Select the domain in which the Remote Copy group will
reside.
c. Group - Enter a name for the group.
d. (Optional) Start group after completion - Select if you want the Remote Copy
group to be started (start mirroring) after it is created.
e. (Optional) Do not perform initial sync - Select if you do not want the created
Remote Copy group to be synchronized with its backup group.
5. In the Backup group:
a. Name - The system(s) NOT selected as the source system, automatically appears.
b. Mode - Select Synchronous or Periodic.
c. (Optional) Sync Period - If you selected Periodic, select this checKiBox and select
second(s), minute(s), hour(s), or day(s) and enter a numeric value for when
you wish the source and backup groups to synchronize their data. If not selected,
no period is used.
6. In the Source Volume on list, select a source virtual volume from the virtual volume
list.
7. In the Backup Volume on list, select a backup virtual volume from the virtual volume
list, or click New to create a new backup volume.
Note: When selecting volumes, you can filter the lists to include by clicking
the down arrow and selecting Virtual Volumes, Provisioning, and Virtual
Size. To clear the filter, click Clear.
8. If you clicked New:
a. Enter a volume name.
b. Select CPG for the user space.
c. Select a CPG for the copy space.
d. (Optional) If you wish to enter an allocation warning percentage and/or allocation
limit, click Enabled and enter a value.
Note: If you are creating a Remote Copy group for a Synchronous Long
Distance Remote Copy configuration, repeat steps 7 and 8 for the second
Backup Volume on list of virtual volumes.
9. Click Add.
10. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to create additional Remote Copy groups.
11. Click OK.
320-200231 Rev A
377
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Starting Remote Copy Groups
Starting a stopped Remote Copy group resumes mirroring of the selected group between
InServ Storage Servers.
To start a Remote Copy group:
1. Access the Remote Copy Groups screen.
2. In the upper pane, select the stopped group(s) you wish to start.
3. Right-click the selection and click Start Remote Copy Group(s).
The Start Remote Copy Group(s) dialog box appears.
4. (Optional) If you do not wish the source and backup groups to synchronize upon
restart, select Do not perform initial sync.
5. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Groups
Selecting Multiple Items
Stopping Remote Copy Groups
Stopping a Remote Copy group stops mirroring of the selected group between InServ
Storage Servers.
To stop a Remote Copy group:
1. Access the Remote Copy Groups screen.
2. In the upper pane, select the group(s) you wish to stop.
3. Right-click the selection and click Stop Remote Copy Group(s).
The Stop Remote Copy Group(s) dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Groups
Selecting Multiple Items
378
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Synching Remote Copy Groups
To synchronize source and backup Remote Copy groups:
1. Access the Remote Copy Groups screen.
2. In the upper pane, select the group(s) you wish to synchronize.
3. Right-click the selection and select Sync Remote Copy Group(s).
The Sync Remote Copy Group(s) dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Groups
Editing Remote Copy Groups
To edit a Remote Copy group:
1. Access the Remote Copy Groups screen.
2. In the upper pane, right-click the group you wish to edit.
3. Click Edit Remote Copy Group.
The Edit Remote Copy Group wizard appears.
Step 1. Groups
1. (Optional) If you wish to display advanced editing options, select Show advanced
options.
2. In the Backup group:
a. Mode - Select Synchronous or Periodic.
b. (Optional) Sync Period - If you selected Periodic, select this checKiBox and then
select second(s), minute(s), hour(s), or day(s) and enter a numeric value for
when you wish the source and backup groups to synchronize their data. If not
selected, no period is used.
c. Stop group - Select to stop the Remote Copy group (stop mirroring) for editing.
d. (Optional) Start group after completion - Select if you want the Remote Copy
group to be started (start mirroring) after it is created.
e. (Optional) Do not perform initial sync - Select if you do not want the created
Remote Copy group to be synchronized with its backup group.
f. *(Optional) Auto Recover - Select if you want the group to be restarted
automatically after Remote Copy links come back up should the links go down.
320-200231 Rev A
379
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
g. *(Optional) Over Period Alert - Select if you want an alert to be generated if the
synchronization of a periodic group takes longer than its set synchronization period.
This option is not available for groups in synchronous mode.
3. Click Next.
*Displayed if Show advanced options is selected.
Step 2. Virtual Volumes
1. In the Source Volume on list, select a source virtual volume from the virtual volume
list.
2. In the Backup Volume on list, select a backup virtual volume from the virtual volume
list, or click New to create a new backup volume.
Note: When selecting volumes, you can filter the lists to include by clicking
the down arrow and selecting Virtual Volumes, Provisioning, and Virtual
Size. To clear the filter, click Clear.
3. If you clicked New:
a. Enter a volume name.
b. Select CPG for the user space.
c. Select a CPG for the copy space.
d. (Optional) If you wish to enter an allocation warning percentage and/or allocation
limit, click Enabled and enter a value.
Note: If you are creating a Remote Copy group for a Synchronous Long
Distance Remote Copy configuration, repeat steps 2 and 3 for the second
Backup Volume on list of virtual volumes.
4. Click Add.
5. If you wish to remove a volume from the group, select a volume from the volume list at
the bottom of the wizard and click Remove.
6. Click Next to review a summary of changes, or click Finish.
380
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information and when satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Groups
Removing Remote Copy Groups
To remove a Remote Copy group:
1. Access the Remote Copy Groups screen.
2. In the upper pane, select the group(s) you wish to remove.
3. Right-click the selection and click Remove Remote Copy Group(s).
The Remove Remote Copy Group(s) dialog box appears.
4. Click Stop group(s) in order to remove the associated Remote Copy targets.
5. When prompted for confirmation, click Yes to continue.
6. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Groups
Selecting Multiple Items
Working with Remote Copy Links
The InForm Management Console allows you to create and remove Remote Copy links.
Creating Remote Copy Links
Removing Remote Copy Links
Pinging Remote Copy Links
320-200231 Rev A
381
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Creating Remote Copy Links
Note: Only two Remote Copy links are allowed.
To add a Remote Copy link:
1. Access the Remote Copy Links screen.
2. In the right pane, right-click in the table of the system on which you wish to create a
link and select Create Link.
The Create Remote Copy Link dialog box appears.
3. A graphical representation of each system's Remote Copy ports appears under Create
Links. Click and drag from one port on one system to a port on the other system.
Repeat for a second port.
4. For IP links, in the IP Settings groups for each system/port, all fields are automatically
populated based on the link relationship you established under Create Links.
a. (Optional) Enter the gateway address for each system/port.
b. (Optional) Click Apply to test the link configuration, or Ping to test the
communication between the links.
5. For Fibre Channel links, in the Settings groups for each system/port:
a. Connection Type - Select Point for point-to-point mode or Loop for arbitrated loop
mode.
b. Configured Rate - Select 1, 2, 4 Gbps, or Auto (default).
c. Click Apply to test the link configuration.
6. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Links
Removing Remote Copy Links
To remove a Remote Copy link:
1. Access the Remote Copy Links screen.
2. In the right pane, select the link(s) you wish to remove.
3. Right-click the selection and then click Remove Link.
The Remove Remote Copy Link(s) dialog box appears.
4. (Optional) If you wish to remove the selected link and its peers at the same time, select
Remove peer Remote Copy links.
5. Click OK.
382
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Links
Selecting Multiple Items
Pinging RCIP Links
When creating Remote Copy over IP (RCIP) links, you are provided the opportunity to
configure and ping the link ports to verify their validity and communication.
When pinging RCIP link ports:
You can click Details in the Port Configuration or Ping dialog boxes to show or hide
details about the configuration or ping operation, respectively.
If the MTU value of the ports is different, for example one value 1500 and the other value
9000, the lower packet size (1500) is used during the ping operation.
If both ports' MTU values are 9000, Jumbo Ping is displayed as the Ping group box title.
Configuring and Pinging the Remote Copy Links
Clicking Apply after entering or changing the requested link information during Remote
Copy link creation results in the entered configuration first being tested to check its validity,
and then proceeding with the ping operation to check communication between the link
ports. The ping is not executed if the configuration fails.
Pinging the Remote Copy Links
Clicking Ping after entering or changing the requested link information during Remote Copy
link creation results in a ping operation on the entered link ports.
See also:
Creating Remote Copy Links
Configuring 1-to-1 Remote Copy
Configuring 1-to-N Remote Copy
Configuring N-to-1 Remote Copy
Configuring Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy
320-200231 Rev A
383
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Working with Remote Copy Targets
Remote Copy target definitions are descriptors on one Remote Copy system that identify
another a Remote Copy system. In a Remote Copy server pair, the servers are each defined
as targets, relative to each other, for Remote Copy operations. The InForm Management
Console allows you to perform the following:
Create Remote Copy Targets
Edit Remote Copy Targets
Remove Remote Copy Targets
Creating Remote Copy Targets
You can add Remote Copy targets to your existing Remote Copy configuration(s).
If you add a new target to an existing 1-to-1 Remote Copy configuration, you will
effectively create a 1-to-N or N-to-1, Remote Copy configuration.
If you add a new target to an existing 1-to-N or N-to-1 Remote Copy configuration, you
will be adding an additional backup or primary target, respectively.
You cannot add new targets to a Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy configuration.
The following restrictions apply:
For the current release, a 1-to-N Remote Copy configuration can have a maximum of two
backup servers.
In an N-to-1 Remote Copy relationship, a maximum of four primary (source) InServ
Storage Servers use the same InServ Storage Server as backup server.
In order to configure Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy, at least two of the
servers must have Fibre Channel ports. The synchronous connection must be a Fibre
Channel connection, while the asynchronous periodic connection can be either all Fibre
Channel (over an IP network) or all IP. Only unidirectional functionality is allowed
between Remote Copy pairs.
To create a Remote Copy target:
1. Access the Remote Copy Targets screen.
2. Right-click the system for which you wish to create a new Remote Copy target, and
then select Create Target.
The Create Remote Copy Target wizard appears.
384
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 1. Targets
1. Click a storage server graphic. In the menu that appears, select a storage server to
assign.
Note: Only available InServ Storage Servers appear.
2. (Optional) Under Update System's Location, enter a location for each storage server,
e.g. Lab 1, New York.
3. (Optional) Under Name Targets, the Target Name fields are automatically populated
with the storage server names. You can enter an alternate name if you wish.
4. Click Next.
Step 2. Links
1. A graphical representation of each system's Remote Copy ports appears under Create
Links. Click and drag from one port on one system to a port on the other system.
Repeat for the other Remote Copy ports.
2. In the IP Settings groups for each system/port, all fields are automatically populated
based on the link relationship you established under Create Links.
3. (Optional) Enter the gateway address for each system/port.
4. (Optional) Click Apply to test the link configuration, or Ping to test the communication
between the links.
5. Click Finish.
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Targets
Pinging Remote Copy Links
Configuring 1-to-N Remote Copy
Configuring N-to-1 Remote Copy
Configuring Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy
320-200231 Rev A
385
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Editing Remote Copy Targets
To edit a Remote Copy target:
1. Access the Remote Copy Targets screen.
2. Right-click the Remote Copy target you wish to edit, and then select Edit Target.
The Edit Remote Copy Target dialog box appears.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click Advanced.
Enter a value in the Bandwidth field.
Enter a value in the Latency field.
Click OK.
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Targets
Removing Remote Copy Targets
To remove a Remote Copy target:
1. Access the Remote Copy Targets screen.
2. Select one or more Remote Copy targets to remove.
3. Right-click the selection, and then select Remove Target.
The Remove Remote Copy Target dialog box appears.
4. (Optional) If you wish to remove Remote Copy groups associated with the selected
target(s), and dismiss the target(s) from groups with additional targets, select Remove
or dismiss targets from groups.
5. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Targets
Selecting Multiple Items
386
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Remote Copy Disaster Recovery
When a system in a Remote Copy setup becomes unavailable, you can perform disaster
recovery operations to continue writing data to the available system(s).
The disaster recovery sequence is as follows:
1. Failover Remote Copy groups to the backup server.
2. Recover the Remote Copy groups to the primary (source) server once the source server
has been brought back up and is running normally.
3. Restore the Remote Copy groups to their normal operation.
The following topics provide instructions on performing disaster recovery:
Failover Remote Copy Groups
Switch Failover Remote Copy Groups
Recover Remote Copy Groups
Restore Remote Copy Groups
The InForm Management Console also provides the flexibility to "undo" a disaster recovery
failover operation. This is described in Revert Remote Copy Groups.
Failover Remote Copy Groups
When the source server in a Remote Copy setup becomes unavailable, you can perform a
failover operation on the Remote Copy groups in order to continue your normal operations
on the backup server(s) while the primary server is down.
To failover Remote Copy groups:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Navigate to the Remote Copy Groups screen.
In the right pane, select the Remote Copy group(s) you wish to failover.
Right-click and select Stop Remote Copy Group(s).
Select the stopped groups.
Right-click and select Failover Remote Copy Group(s).
The Remote Copy Failover dialog box appears.
When performing failover on Remote Copy groups, the groups on the backup server
reverse roles to become primary groups, i.e. data is written directly to those groups as
data would normally be written to groups on the primary server.
6. (Optional) Click Advanced to display additional failover options.
7. If you clicked Advanced:
a. If you do not want to sync the groups after role reversal has occurred, select Do
not sync group after role reversal is completed.
320-200231 Rev A
387
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
b. If you do not want to promote the snapshots to base volumes, select Do not
promote snapshots to base volumes.
c. If you do not want to continue taking snapshots during failover, select Do not take
snapshots.
8. Click OK.
9. Click Yes when prompted for confirmation.
In the right pane of the Remote Copy Groups screen:
Primary-Rev is displayed under the Backup Role column indicating that the groups on
the backup server are currently acting as the primary groups. Any data is written to the
groups on the backup server.
The DR state column displays Failover.
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Groups
Selecting Multiple Items
Recover Remote Copy Groups
Switch Failover Remote Copy Groups
Note: The switch failover operation is only allowed for Synchronous Long
Distance Remote Copy setups.
For Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy, the InForm Management Console allows you
to switch failover of Remote Copy groups from one backup server to the other backup
server. For example, in a Synchronous Long Distance Remote Copy setup where source
server A is backed up to backup servers B and C, if Remote Copy groups are failed over
from source server A to backup server B, you can switch failover from backup server B to
backup server C.
Note: The following procedure assumes that failover has already been
performed on one backup system.
To switch failover Remote Copy groups:
1. Navigate to the Remote Copy Groups screen.
2. In the left pane, right-click the graphic of the system on which you wish to switch
failover and select Switch Failover Groups from <original failover system>.
The Remote Copy Switch Failover dialog box appears.
388
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
3. (Optional) Click Advanced to display additional failover options.
4. (If you clicked Advanced) If you do not want to continue taking snapshots during
failover, select Do not take snapshots.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Yes when prompted for confirmation.
In the right pane of the Remote Copy Groups screen:
Primary-Rev is displayed under the Backup Role column for the server you switched
failover to, indicating that the groups on the backup server are currently acting as the
primary groups. Any data is written to the groups on the backup server.
The DR state column displays Failover.
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Groups
Selecting Multiple Items
Revert Remote Copy Groups
You can undo a failover operation by reverting the Remote Copy groups to their normal
state. For example, you may wish to revert the groups if you have failed over the groups to
the backup server, but the source server has come back online and there has not been any
new data written to the backup server.
To revert Remote Copy groups:
1. Navigate to the Remote Copy Groups screen.
2. In the right pane, select the Remote Copy group(s) on which you performed failover.
3. Right-click and select Revert Failover Remote Copy Group(s).
The Remote Copy Revert Failover dialog box appears.
4. (Optional) Click Advanced to display additional revert options.
a. If you do not want to promote the snapshots to base volumes, select Do not
promote snapshots to base volumes.
b. If you do not want to continue taking snapshots, select Do not take snapshots.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Yes when prompted for confirmation.
In the right pane of the Remote Copy Groups screen:
Primary is displayed under the Source Role column and Secondary is displayed under
the Backup Role column indicating that the Remote Copy groups have been restored to
their original roles.
The DR state column displays Normal.
320-200231 Rev A
389
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
A green arrow is displayed under the Replication column indicating the original direction
of data replication.
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Groups
Selecting Multiple Items
Recover Remote Copy Groups
If you performed failover on your Remote Copy groups due to a source server failure, you
must recover the groups to the source server once the source server is brought back up.
To recover Remote Copy groups:
1. Navigate to the Remote Copy Groups screen.
2. In the right pane, select the Remote Copy group(s) on which you performed failover.
3. Right-click and select Recover Remote Copy Group(s).
The Remote Copy Recover dialog box appears.
4. (Optional) Click Advanced to display additional recover options. If you do not want to
sync the groups after role reversal has occurred, select Do not sync group after role
reversal is completed.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Yes when prompted for confirmation.
In the right pane of the Remote Copy Groups screen:
Secondary-Rev is displayed under the Source Role column indicating that the groups
on the source server are currently acting as backup to the groups on the backup server.
Any data is written to the groups on the backup server and then replicated on the source
server.
The DR state column displays Recover.
A yellow arrow is displayed under the Replication column indicating the reversed
direction of data replication.
To restore the original source/backup server relationship where data is written to the groups
on the source server, you must restore the Remote Copy groups.
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Groups
Selecting Multiple Items
Restore Remote Copy Groups
390
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Restore Remote Copy Groups
If you recovered your Remote Copy groups, you must restore the groups in order to restore
the original Remote Copy relationship between your source and backup server(s).
To restore Remote Copy groups:
1. Navigate to the Remote Copy Groups screen.
2. In the right pane, select the recovered Remote Copy group(s).
3. Right-click and select Restore Remote Copy Group(s).
The Remote Copy Restore dialog box appears.
4. (Optional) Click Advanced to display additional restore options.
a. If you do not want to sync the groups after role reversal has occurred, select Do
not sync group after role reversal is completed.
b. If you do not want to continue taking snapshots, select Do not take snapshots.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Yes when prompted for confirmation.
In the right pane of the Remote Copy Groups screen:
Primary is displayed under the Source Role column and Secondary is displayed under
the Backup Role column indicating that the Remote Copy groups have been restored to
their original roles.
The DR state column displays Normal.
A green arrow is displayed under the Replication column indicating the original direction
of data replication.
See also:
Viewing Remote Copy Groups
Selecting Multiple Items
320-200231 Rev A
391
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Working with the Performance Manager
The Performance Manager provides pre-defined performance charts for physical disks,
host ports, and disk ports. In addition, the Performance Manager allows you create, edit,
and save your own customized performance charts.
Viewing Performance
Creating a New Chart
Saving a Chart
Editing a Chart
Viewing Performance
The InForm Management Console provides pre-defined performance charts for physical disk
usage, disk port, and host ports.
To view a pre-defined performance chart:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Performance.
2. In the Management Tree, click either the Physical Disks or Ports (Data) node under
the system for which you wish to view performance.
3. Click PD Usage - Total IOPS, Disk Ports - Total Throughput, or Hosts Ports Total Throughput.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for any additional performance charts you wish to view.
A performance chart for each selected chart type is displayed in the Management
window and data collection and chart generation begins.
392
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Performance Over Time
The Disk Ports and Host Ports charts display line graphs, which show performance over
time.
Each started chart is tabbed at the top of the Management window. Simply click the tab for
the chart you wish to view.
At any time, you can use the controls at the upper right corner of each chart to pause or
stop the generation of the performance chart.
Pausing the chart will stop the plotting of data, but data collection will still occur in
the background.
Stopping the chart stops both data collection and plotting.
The lower pane of the chart provides a legend indicating color/plot association. Clicking a
row in the legend results in the corresponding plot becoming highlighted.
If you wish to change the color of a plot, click the color under the Color column and then
choose a new color in the menu that appears.
320-200231 Rev A
393
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Instantaneous Statistics
The PD Usage performance chart displays the latest updated physical disk IOPs statistics.
Instead of a line graph, a bar graph is displayed, which shows the physical disk performance
at the moment.
See also:
Exporting Data
394
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Creating a New Chart
To create a new performance chart, access the Chart Configuration wizard:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Performance.
2. In the Common Tasks panel, click New Chart.
Step 1. Chart Selection
1. Select either Template or Custom.
2. If you selected Template, select the type of objects to plot by choosing PD Usage
under Physical Disk, or Disk Ports, Host Ports, RCFC Ports, or RCIP Ports under
Ports (Data).
3. If you selected Custom:
a. Name - Enter a name for your chart.
b. (Optional) Description - Enter a description.
c. Polling Interval - Enter a value from 5 to 3,600 seconds.
4. Click Next.
Step 2. Object Selection
1. Select a system from the System list.
2. By default, all objects will be plotted in the chart. If you wish to choose objects,
deselect the All checKiBox and then select objects to plot in the objects list.
3. Click Next to view the summary, or click Finish.
If you previously selected Custom in Chart Selection:
1. Select a system from the System list.
2. Select an object from the Category list.
3. By default, all objects will be plotted in the chart. If you wish to choose objects,
deselect the All checKiBox and then select objects to plot in the objects list.
4. If you selected individual objects:
a. (Optional) If you do not want a plot that combines all selected objects, uncheck the
Create a plot that aggregate all selected objects checKiBox.
b. (Optional) If you want to display the aggregate, but not an individual plot for the
selected objects, uncheck the Create an individual plot for each selected
object checKiBox.
5. From the Y-Axis list, select a performance metric.
6. From the Type list, select a value. (Total Read/Write = plot both reads and writes,
Read = plot reads only, Write = plot writes only)
7. To change the default color shown, click the Color button and select a new color for the
plot.
8. Click Add to add the new plot to the Plots list.
9. If you wish to add additional plots, repeat steps 1 through 8.
10. Click Next to view the summary, or click Finish.
320-200231 Rev A
395
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information. When satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Performance
Editing a Chart
Saving a Chart
Saving a Chart
To save a chart:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Create a new chart.
In the Main Menu Bar, click Actions > Performance > Save Chart.
Enter a name for the chart and select a save location.
Click Save.
The saved chart will appear under the Save Charts tree node once saved.
Note: When saving a chart, only the chart configuration data is saved. The
plot data is not saved.
See also:
Manager Pane
Viewing Performance
Creating a New Chart
Editing a Chart
396
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Editing a Chart
To edit a chart, access the Edit Chart Configuration wizard:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Performance.
2. In the Management Tree, select a chart under the Saved Charts node.
3. In the Main Menu Bar, click Actions > Performance > Edit Chart.
Step 1. Chart Selection
1. Enter a new Name, Description, and/or Polling Interval.
2. Click Next.
Step 2. Object Selection
1. Select a system from the System list.
2. By default, all objects will be plotted in the chart. If you wish to choose objects,
deselect the All checKiBox and then select objects to plot in the objects list.
3. Click Next.
If you are editing a custom chart:
1. Select a system from the System list.
2. Select an object from the Category list.
3. By default, all objects will be plotted in the chart. If you wish to choose objects,
deselect the All checKiBox and then select objects to plot in the objects list.
4. If you selected individual objects:
a. (Optional) If you do not want a plot that combines all selected objects, uncheck the
Create a plot that aggregate all selected objects checKiBox.
b. (Optional) If you want to display the aggregate, but not an individual plot for the
selected objects, uncheck the Create an individual plot for each selected
object checKiBox.
5. From the Y-Axis list, select a performance metric.
6. From the Type list, select a value. (Total Read/Write = plot both reads and writes,
Read = plot reads only, Write = plot writes only)
7. To change the default color shown, click the Color button and select a new color for the
plot.
8. Click Add to add the new plot to the Plots list.
9. If you wish to add additional plots, repeat steps 1 through 8.
10. Click Next to view the summary, or click Finish.
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information. When satisfied, click Finish.
320-200231 Rev A
397
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Viewing Performance
Creating a New Chart
Saving a Chart
Working with the Event Manager
The Event Manager allows you to view system alerts for individual systems and all
connected systems, and individual system events.
Viewing the Alerts Summary
Viewing System Alerts
Viewing System Events
See also:
Managing Alerts
Viewing the Alerts Summary
The alerts summary screen provides an overview of the health of all connected InServ
Storage Servers.
To view the alerts summary:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Events.
2. In the Mangement Tree, click InServs.
3. In the Management Window, click the Summary tab.
398
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The alerts summary appears as follows:
The New Alerts row provides a count of each alert type for all connected systems. Each
alert count and type listed in blue is a link to the Alerts tab, which displays only the
selected alert type.
Under Alerts by Severity and All Alerts by Category, each alert count listed in blue is
a link to the alerts screen for an individual system.
See also:
Manager Pane
Alert Severity Indicators
Alert/Task/Connection Pane
Viewing System Alerts
Viewing System Events
Exporting Data
320-200231 Rev A
399
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing System Alerts
To view system alert information, access the Systems screen and then click the Alerts
tab.
or
1. In the Manager Pane, click Events.
2. In the Management Tree, click the InServs node or a system node.
3. In the Management Window, click the Alerts tab.
The Alerts tab is split into an upper pane and lower pane. The upper pane display a
summary of the alerts. The lower pane displays the details of an alert selected in the upper
pane.
The information displayed in the Alerts tab is nearly identical between the information
displayed for all connected systems and information displayed for a single system, with the
only exception being an additional System column appears in the upper pane for all
connected systems. The following figure displays the Alerts tab for all connected systems.
The upper and lower panes are described in greater detail below.
Upper Pane
Lower Pane
400
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Upper Pane
The upper pane of the Alerts tab displays the following:
Column
Description
System
The system on which the alert occurred.
Severity
The severity of the alert. See Alert Severity Indicators.
ID
The alert ID.
State
The alert state.
Last Time
The last occurrence of the alert.
Message
A brief description of the alert.
Repeat Count
The number of times the alert has been issued.
First Time
The first occurrence of the alert.
Lower Pane
The lower pane of the Alerts tab displays detailed information about an alert selected in the
upper pane. The lower pane displays the following information:
Group
General
320-200231 Rev A
Field
Description
Severity
The alert severity. See Alert Severity Indicators.
Type
The alert type.
Message
A brief description of the alert.
ID
The alert ID.
State
The alert state.
Message Code
The alert message code.
Sequence
The alert sequence.
401
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Node ID
The controller node ID.
Component
The component for which the alert was issued.
Severity
The alert severity. See Alert Severity Indicators.
Type
The alert type.
Sequence
The alert sequence.
Time
The time the alert was resolved.
Message
A brief description of the alert.
System
The name of the server that generated the alert.
System SN
The server's serial number.
Node ID
The node ID.
Component
The affected system components.
Repeat Count
The number of times the alert was issued.
Last time
The last occurrence of the alert.
First time
The first occurrence of the alert.
Resolved by Event
Component
Frequency
See also:
Alert Severity Indicators
Alert/Task/Connection Pane
Viewing the Alerts Summary
Managing Alerts
Viewing System Events
402
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Exporting Data
Removing System Alerts
To remove system alerts:
1. Access the system Alerts tab.
2. Select the alert(s) you wish to remove.
3. Right-click your selection and click Remove.
The Remove Alert(s) dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.
See also:
Viewing System Alerts
Selecting Multiple Items
Viewing System Events
To view system events:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In the Manager Pane, click Events.
In the Management Tree, click the system node for which you wish to view events.
In the Management Window, click the Events tab.
In the Last text box, enter the appropriate number to narrow the displayed events.
Select the drop-down list increment, day(s), hour(s), minute(s).
Click Get Events.
320-200231 Rev A
403
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The events tab appears as follows:
The events tab is divided into an upper pane and a lower pane. The upper pane displays a
summary of events on the system. The lower pane displays details about a selected event
from the upper pane.
Filtering Events
To view a events with finer granularity:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the Manager Pane, click Events.
In the Management Tree, click the system node for which you wish to view events.
In the Management Window, click the Events tab.
Click Advanced>>.
In the Start Time box, enter a date and time (the entered value will display events
greater than or equal to this time).
6. (Optional) Click the End Time checKiBox and enter a date and time (the entered value
will display events less than or equal to this time).
7. Click Get Events.
See also:
Alert Severity Indicators
Viewing System Alerts
404
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Alerts Summary
Exporting Data
Working with the Task Manager
The Task Manager allows you to retrieve, remove, and cancel tasks on InServ Storage
Servers.
Viewing the Tasks Summary
Displaying Tasks
Removing Tasks
Cancelling Tasks
Viewing the Tasks Summary
The InForm Management Console allows you to view a summary of tasks for all connected
systems or for a single connected system.
To view the tasks summary:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Tasks.
2. In the Management Tree, click InServs.
3. (Optional) If you wish to view tasks for a single system, select a system under the
InServs node.
4. In the Management Window, click the Summary tab.
5. If you wish to view tasks from the last hour, select Last Hour Only. If you wish to view
system tasks, select Include System Tasks.
320-200231 Rev A
405
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The tasks Summary tab appears as follows.
Note: If you selected a specific InServ Storage Server under the InServs
node in the Management Tree, the Tasks by System group will not be
displayed on the tasks Summary tab.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Displaying Tasks
Displaying Tasks
The InForm Management Console allows you to display completed, running, failed, and
canceled tasks within a specified time period.
To display tasks:
1. In the Manager Pane, click Tasks.
2. In the Management Tree, click InServs.
3. (Optional) If you wish to display tasks for a single system, select a system under the
InServs node.
4. In the Management Window, click the Tasks tab.
5. In the Show tasks that are list, select in any state, Completed, Running,
Canceled, or Failed.
406
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
6. In the within last text box and list, enter the number and select either hour(s) or
day(s).
7. (Optional). Select Include System Tasks to also retrieve system tasks.
8. Click the Get Tasks button.
The upper pane of the Tasks tab displays task information per your entered parameters.
The lower pane of the Tasks tab displays detailed information about a selected task from
the upper pane. The Tasks tab appears as follows:
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Removing Tasks
Cancelling Tasks
320-200231 Rev A
407
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Removing Tasks
To remove tasks:
1. Access the Tasks tab.
2. In the upper pane of the Tasks tab, select the task(s) you wish to remove.
3. Right-click the selection and then click Remove Task in the menu that appears.
The Remove Task(s) dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.
See also:
Displaying Tasks
Selecting Multiple Items
Cancelling Tasks
To cancel tasks:
1. Access the Tasks tab.
2. In the upper pane of the Tasks tab, select the task(s) you wish to cancel.
3. Right-click the selection and then click Cancel Task in the menu that appears.
The Cancel Task(s) dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.
See also:
Displaying Tasks
Selecting Multiple Items
408
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Working with the Security Manager
The Security Manager allows you to create and manage users and domains, as well as
view users, domains, and connections on the InServ Storage Server.
Viewing the Security System Summary Screen
Working with Users
Working with Domains
Working with Connections
Note: 3PAR Domains requires a 3PAR Domain license. For additional
information about the license, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts Guide.
Note: For further information about 3PAR Domains and users, see the 3PAR
InForm OS Concepts Guide.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing the Security System Summary
Screen
The Security System Summary Screen provides an overview of all users, user connections,
domains, domain sets, and connections.
To access the Security System summary screen:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Security Management Tree, select a system.
The Security System summary screen appears in the Management Window. The
following figure depicts the Security System summary screen for InServ system S424:
320-200231 Rev A
409
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Security System summary screen provides the following information:
Group
Field
Description
General
Users
The total number of system users.
The Users heading is a link to the Users Screen.
Domains
The number of domains residing on the system.
The Domains heading is a link to the Domains
Screen.
Domain Sets
The number of domain sets on the system.
The Domains Sets heading is a link to the Domain
Sets screen.
Connections
The number of user connections to the system.
The Connections heading is a link to the User
Connections screen.
Domain
The domain name.
Size
The size (in GiB) of the domain.
Top 10
ChecKiBox. If selected, only the largest (in GB) 10
system domains are displayed.
Domain
Capacity
410
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Users
My Session
Global
The number of non-domain users. This is broken
down by the number of users per access privilege
type (super, edit, browse).
Domain
The number of domain users. This is broken down
by the number of users per domain access privilege
type (edit, browse).
User Name
The user name for the current InForm Management
Console session.
Client IP
Address
The client IP address.
Status
The session status, either Active or Inactive.
Secure
Connection
Indicates whether a secure connection is being
used.
Connected
Since
The date and time the current connected session
was started.
See also:
Viewing Users
Viewing Domains
Viewing Domain Sets
Viewing User Connections
Management Tree
Manager Pane
Management Window
320-200231 Rev A
411
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Working with Users
The Security Manager provides functionality to view and work with InServ Storage Server
users.
Viewing Users
Creating Users
Editing Users
Removing Users
See also:
Manager Pane
Viewing Users
The Users summary screen provides an overview of an InServ Storage Server's users.
To access the Users summary screen:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Security Management Tree, select the Users node for the system whose users
you wish to view.
The Users summary screen is displayed in the Management Window.
412
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Users summary screen provides the following information:
Column
Description
User Name
The user name.
Domain
The domain to which the user belongs.
Default
Domain
Whether or not the domain listed in the Domain column is the
default domain for the user.
Privilege
The user's domain privilege level (super, edit, browse).
Note: 3PAR Domains requires a 3PAR Domain license. For additional
information about the license, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts Guide.
Note: For further information about 3PAR Domains and users, see the 3PAR
InForm OS Concepts Guide.
See also:
Viewing Domains
Viewing Domain Sets
Viewing User Connections
Management Tree
Manager Pane
Management Window
320-200231 Rev A
413
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Creating Users
To create a user, access the Create User wizard:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. Click Create User in the Common Actions Panel.
The Create User wizard appears.
Step 1. Authentication
1. From the Systems group box, select the system on which the user will be created.
2. In the Credentials group box, enter the user name, password, and confirm the
password.
Note: The password must be between six and eight characters.
3. Click Next.
Step 2. Authorization
1. In the Privilege group box, select the following:
a. Domain - select a domain from the list.
Note: 3PAR Domains requires a 3PAR Domain license. For additional
information about the license, and for information about 3PAR Domains and
users, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts Guide.
b. Privilege - select the new user's privilege level in the selected domain.
2. Click Add to add the new user's selected privilege settings to the list in the Domain
group box.
3. (Optional) Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add access to other domains.
4. (Optional) To remove a row from the Domain group box, select the row and click
Remove.
5. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
414
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information. When satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Editing Users
Removing Users
Viewing Users
Viewing the Security System Summary Manager
Editing Users
To edit a user, access the Edit User wizard:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. Right-click the user you wish to edit in the User summary screen.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit User wizard appears.
Step 1. Authentication
Note: Steps 1 and 2 are optional. If you do not wish to change the user's
password, click Next to go to Authorization.
1. From the Credentials group box, select the Change Password checKiBox.
2. Enter the current password, new password, and then confirm the new password.
Note: The password must be between six and eight characters.
3. Click Next.
320-200231 Rev A
415
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 2. Authorization
1. In the Privilege group box, select the following:
a. Domain - select a domain from the list.
Note: 3PAR Domains requires a 3PAR Domain license. For additional
information about the license, and for information about 3PAR Domains and
users, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts Guide.
b. Privilege - select the new user's privilege level in the selected domain.
2. Click Add to add the new user's selected privilege settings to the list in the Domain
group box.
3. (Optional) Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add access to other domains.
4. (Optional) To remove a row from the Domain group box, select the row and click
Remove.
5. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information. When satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Creating Users
Removing Users
Viewing Users
Viewing the Security System Summary Manager
416
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Removing Users
To remove a user:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. Right-click the user you wish to remove in the User summary screen.
Note: If you wish to remove multiple users (see Selecting Multiple Items),
select the users you wish to remove before right-clicking.
3. Click Remove.
4. In the Remove User dialog box, click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Creating Users
Editing Users
Selecting Multiple Items
Viewing Users
Viewing the Security System Summary Manager
Working with Domains
The Security Manager provides functionality to view and work with domains and domain
sets, as well as objects belonging to domains.
Viewing Domains
Creating Domains
Editing Domains
Removing Domains
Viewing Domain Sets
Creating Domain Sets
Editing Domain Sets
Removing Domain Sets
Moving Objects from One Domain to Another Domain
320-200231 Rev A
417
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: 3PAR Domains requires a 3PAR Domain license. For additional
information about the license, see the 3PAR InForm OS Concepts Guide.
Note: For further information about 3PAR Domains and users, see the 3PAR
InForm OS Concepts Guide.
See also:
Manager Pane
Viewing Domains
You can view information about domains for all connected InServ Storage Servers or a
single InServ Storage Server.
Viewing Domains for All InServs
To view domain information about all connected InServ Storage Severs:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Security Management Tree, click InServs.
3. In the Management Window, click the Domains tab.
The Domains tab can be filtered to display Summary and Capacity information about
the domains in all connected systems.
•
Summary information includes the system on which each domain resides and each
domain's domain sets, number of CPGs, virtual volumes, hosts, and active VLUNs,
and each domain's total capacity.
•
Capacity information includes:
418
•
the size of each domain's base volume user, copy, and admin space.
•
the size of each domain's CPG user, copy, and admin space.
•
the size of each domain's unmapped space.
•
the total size of each domain.
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Domains for a Single Server
The Domains screen provides summary and detail information for an InServ Storage
Server's domains.
To access the Domain screen:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Security Management Tree, select the Domains node for the system whose
users you wish to view.
The Domains screen is displayed in the Management Window and provides a
Summary tab (default) and a Domains tab.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing the Domains Summary Tab
Viewing the Domains Tab
Viewing the Domains Summary Tab
After accessing the Domains screen, the Summary tab is displayed by default. The
Domains Summary tab displays all objects and capacity information for all system
domains (cumulative view). To view information about a single domain, see Viewing the
Domains Tab.
320-200231 Rev A
419
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Domains Summary tab provides the following information:
Group
Field
Description
General
Domains
The number of domains residing on the system.
CPGs
The number of CPGs associated with the domains in
the system.
FC
The number of Fibre Channel objects associated with
the domains in the system.
NL
The number of Near Line objects associated with the
domains in the system.
SSD
The number of Solid State Disks associated with the
domains in the system.
Virtual Volumes
The total number of virtual volumes associated with
the domains in the system.
Base Volumes
The number of base volumes associated with the
domains in the system.
Objects in
Domains
420
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Domain
Capacity
Thinly
Provisioned
The number of Thinly Provisioned virtual volumes
associated with the domains in the system.
Fully
Provisioned
The number of fully provisioned virtual volumes
associated with the domains in the system.
Virtual Copies
The total number of virtual copies associated with the
domains in the system.
Physical Copies
The total number of virtual copies associated with the
domains in the system.
Expired
Volumes
The total number of expired virtual volumes
associated with the domains in the system.
Unexported
Volumes
The total number of unexported virtual volumes
associated with the domains in the system.
Remote Copy
Volumes
The total number of Remote Copy virtual volumes
associated with the domains in the system.
Virtual Volume
Sets
The total number of virtual volumes sets associated
with the domains in the system.
Active VLUNs
The total number of exported virtual volumes
associated with the domains in the system.
Hosts
The total number of hosts associated with the
domains in the system.
Host Sets
The total number of host sets associated with the
domains in the system.
Domain
The name of the domain.
Size
The size (in GiB) of the selected domain.
Top 10
ChecKiBox. Selecting this option results in the display
of the ten domains in the system with the greatest
capacity.
320-200231 Rev A
421
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Domains Tab
After accessing the Domains screen, the Summary tab is displayed by default.
Click the Domains tab to view its contents.
The Domains tab is divided into an upper and lower pane. The upper pane can be filtered
to display summary or capacity information. The lower pane displays the details of items
selected in the upper pane.
Summary Information
Capacity Information
Summary Information
To display summary information on the Domains tab, select Summary from the view list.
422
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The upper pane displays the following information:
Column
Description
Domain
The domain name.
CPGs
The total number of CPGs associated with the domain.
Virtual
Volumes
The total number of virtual volumes associated with the domain.
Hosts
The total number of hosts associated with the domain.
Active VLUNs
The total number of exported virtual volumes associated with the
domain.
Total Capacity
The total capacity (in GiB) of the domain.
Comments
Any user entered notes when the domain was created.
The lower pane displays the following information:
Group
General
Field
Description
Domain
The domain name.
Creation Time
The date and time the domain was created.
Maximum Volume
Retention Time
The maximum time a volume will be retained in the
domain.
Comments
Any user-entered notes during the creation of the
domain.
Objects in
Domains
The information in the Objects in Domains group is identical to the
information displayed in the Objects in Domains group of the Domains
Summary Tab, except the information listed here is per selected domain,
rather than per all system domains (cumulative).
Capacity
Device Type
List. Select the device type, Fibre Channel (FC),
NearLine (NL), or Solid State Disk (SSD), for which
the capacity chart is displayed.
See also:
Viewing the Domains Summary Tab
320-200231 Rev A
423
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Capacity Information
To display capacity information on the Domains tab, select Capacity from the view list.
The upper pane displays the following information:
Column
Description
Domain
The domain name.
Base Volume User Size
The size (in GiB) of the base volume's user space.
Base Volume Copy Size
The size (in GiB) of the base volume's copy space.
Base Volume Admin
Size
The size (in GiB) of the base volume's admin space.
424
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
CPG User Size
The size (in GiB) of the Common Provisioning Group's
(CPG's) user space.
CPG User Used Size
The size (in GiB) of the CPG's used user space.
CPG User Used
Percentage
The percentage of the CPG's used user space.
CPG Admin Size
The size (in GiB) of the CPG's admin space.
CPG Admin Used Size
The size (in GiB) of the CPG's used admin space.
CPG Admin Used
Percentage
The percentage of the CPG's used admin space.
Unmapped Space
The size (in GiB) of unmapped space.
Total Size
The total size (in GiB) of the domain.
The lower pane displays the same information as the lower pane of the Summary
Information screen.
Creating Domains
To create a domain, access the Create Domain wizard:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. Click Create Domain in the Common Actions Panel.
The Create Domain wizard appears.
3. Select a storage server on which the domain will be created from the InServs list.
4. Enter a domain name.
5. (Optional) Select whether to impose a Maximum Volume Retention Time.
The default retention time is 14 days.
a. If you wish to change the retention time, click Override System.
b. Select Days or Hours.
c. Enter a retention time: 1 to 1,825 for Days, 1 to 43,800 for Hours.
6. Enter any notes in the Comments field.
7. Click Add.
320-200231 Rev A
425
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The new domain appears in the Domains list.
8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 if you wish to create additional domains.
9. Click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Domains
Editing Domains
Creating Domain Sets
Removing Domains
Editing Domains
To edit an existing domain, access the Edit Domain wizard:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. From the Management Tree, select the Domain node under the system in which the
domain resides.
3. In the Domains screen, click the Domains tab.
4. Right-click the domain you wish to edit and then click Edit.
The Edit Domain wizard appears.
5. Enter a new domain name.
6. (Optional) Select whether to impose a Maximum Volume Retention Time.
The default retention time is 14 days.
a. If you wish to change the retention time, click Override System.
b. Select Days or Hours.
c. Enter a retention time: 1 to 1,825 for Days, 1 to 43,800 for Hours.
7. Enter any notes in the Comments field.
8. Click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
426
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Domains
Viewing the Domains Tab
Creating Domains
Creating Domain Sets
Removing Domains
Removing Domains
To remove an existing domain:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. From the Management Tree, select the Domain node under the system in which the
domain resides.
3. In the Domains screen, click the Domains tab.
4. Right-click the domain you wish to remove.
Note: If you wish to remove multiple domains (see Selecting Multiple Items),
select the domains you wish to remove before right-clicking.
5. Click Remove.
6. In the Remove Domain dialog box, click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Selecting Multiple Items
Viewing Domains
Viewing the Domains Tab
320-200231 Rev A
427
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing Domain Sets
To view information about domain sets residing in a system:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. From the Management Tree, select the Domain Sets node under the system in where
domain sets reside.
The Domain Sets screen appears.
The Domain Sets screen is divided into an upper pane, which displays a summary of all
domain sets in the system, and a lower pane, which displays detail information about a
selected domain set from the upper pane.
The upper pane of the Domain Sets screen provides the following information:
Column
Description
Name
The name of the domain set.
Domains
The number of domains belonging to the domain set.
Comments
Any user entered notes when the domain set was created.
428
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The lower pane of the Domain Sets screen provides details about the selected domain set in
the upper pane:
Column
Description
Domain
The name domains belonging to the selected
domain set.
Creation Time
The date and time the domain was created.
Maximum Volume Retention
Time
The domain's maximum volume retention time (if
any).
Comments
Any user entered notes when the domain was
created.
See also:
Creating Domain Sets
Editing Domain Sets
Removing Domain Sets
Viewing Domains
Management Tree
Manager Pane
Creating Domain Sets
To create a domain set, access the Create Domain Set wizard:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. Click Create Domain Set in the Common Actions Panel.
The Create Domain Set wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select a storage server on which the domain set will be created from the System list.
Enter a domain set name.
(Optional) Enter any notes in the Comments field.
Click Next.
320-200231 Rev A
429
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 2. Domains
1. From the Available list, select the domains you wish to add to the domain set.
Note: You can select multiple domains at one time to add to the domain set
(see Selecting Multiple Items).
2. Click the down arrow to move the selected domains to the Assigned list.
3. Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information. When satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Selecting Multiple Items
Viewing Domains
Viewing Domain Sets
Editing Domain Sets
To edit an existing domain set, access the Edit Domain Set wizard:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. From the Management Tree, select the Domain Sets node under the system in which
the domain set resides.
3. In the Domains Sets screen right-click the domain set you wish to edit.
The Edit Domain Sets wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. Enter a new domain set name.
2. (Optional) Enter any notes in the Comments field.
3. Click Next.
430
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Step 2. Domains
1. From the Available list, select the domains you wish to add to the domain set.
Note: You can select multiple domains at one time to add to the domain set
(see Selecting Multiple Items).
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click the down arrow to move the selected domains to the Assigned list.
From the Assigned list, select the domains you wish to remove from the domain set.
Click the up arrow to move the selected domains to the Available list.
Click Next to view summary information, or click Finish.
Step 3. Summary
Review the summary information. When satisfied, click Finish.
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Selecting Multiple Items
Viewing Domains Sets
Removing Domain Sets
To remove an existing domain set:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. From the Management Tree, select the Domain Sets node under the system in which
the domain set resides.
3. In the Domains Sets screen right-click the domain set you wish to remove.
Note: If you wish to remove multiple domain sets (see Selecting Multiple
Items), select the domain sets you wish to remove before right-clicking.
5. Click Remove.
320-200231 Rev A
431
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
6. In the Remove Domain Sets dialog box, click OK.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Selecting Multiple Items
Viewing Domains Sets
Moving Objects from One Domain to
Another Domain
To move objects from one domain to another domain, access the Move to Domain wizard:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. Click Move to Domain in the Common Actions Panel.
The Move to Domain wizard appears.
Step 1. General
1. From the Systems list, select the system to which objects will be moved.
2. From the Source Domain list, select the domain on which the object to be moved
currently resides.
3. From the Destination Domain list, select the domain to which the object will be
moved.
4. From the Type list, select the type of object (Host, CPG, or Virtual Volume) to be
moved.
5. From the Object list, select the object to be moved.
6. Click Next.
Step 2. Associated Objects
All objects (Hosts, CPGs, Virtual Volumes, and Virtual Volumes Sets) associated with the
selected object, which will be affected by the domain move, are displayed.
Review the summary information. When satisfied, click Finish.
432
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Common Actions Panel
Viewing Domains
Working with Connections
The InForm Management Console allows you to view and remove user connections.
Viewing User Connections
Removing User Connections
Viewing User Connections
To view user connections:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. From the Management Tree, select the Connections node under the system in which
the domain resides.
The Connections screen appears.
The Connections screen provides the following information:
Column
Description
Connection ID
The InServ Storage Server ID.
User Name
The user name.
320-200231 Rev A
433
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Client IP
Address
The IP address where the connection exists.
Domain
The domain to which the user belongs.
Privilege
The user's domain privilege level (super, edit, browse).
Status
The user status on the InServ Storage Server; either Active or
Inactive.
Connected
Since
The connection duration since the displayed date and time.
My Session
Indicates with a check mark the connection for the current running
IMC instance.
Client
Indicates if the client is local or remote.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing Users
Removing Users Connections
Removing User Connections
To remove a user connection:
1. Click Security in the Manager Pane.
2. From the Management Tree, select the Connections node under the system in which
the domain resides.
3. In the Connections screen, right-click the connection you wish to remove.
Note: If you wish to remove multiple connections (see Selecting Multiple
Items), select the connections you wish to remove before right-clicking.
4. Click Remove User Connection.
5. In the Remove User Connection dialog box, click OK.
434
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Viewing User Connections
Working with the Hardware Inventory
Manager
The Hardware Inventory Manager provides information about all hardware used in the
connected InServ Storage Servers.
The Hardware Inventory screen provides four tabs: Summary, Node Subsystems,
Cage Subsystems, and All. These tabs are discussed further in the following topics:
Viewing the Summary Tab
Viewing the Node Subsystems Tab
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Tab
Viewing the All Tab
To access the Hardware Inventory screen:
1. Click Hardware Inventory in the Manager Pane.
2. From the Management Tree, select either the InServs node to view the hardware
inventory for all connected InServ Storage Servers, or select one of InServ Storage
Server nodes (for example S424) to view hardware inventory for that server.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
320-200231 Rev A
435
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Hardware Inventory
Summary Tab
The Hardware Inventory Summary tab provides quick summary information about
hardware used in all connected InServ Storage Servers.
To access the Hardware Inventory Summary tab;
1. Click Hardware Inventory in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Management Tree, select the InServs node.
The Hardware Inventory Summary tab appears in the Management Window.
Note: The Hardware Inventory Summary tab is only available if the
InServs node is selected in the Management Tree.
The Hardware Inventory Summary tab provides the following information:
Column
436
Description
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
System Name
The system name.
System SN
The system serial number.
Model
The InServ Storage Server model type.
Nodes
The number of controller nodes in the system.
Adapter Cards
The number of adapter cards in the system.
Cages
The number of drive cages in the system.
Magazines
The number of drive magazines in the system.
Disks
The number of disk drives in the system.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Node Subsystems Tab
The Hardware Inventory Node Subsystems tab provides information about controller
node components. The information is included on eight additional tabs, which are discussed
in the following topics:
Viewing the Node Subsystems Controller Nodes Tab
Viewing the Node Subsystems CPUs Tab
Viewing the Node Subsystems Internal Drives Tab
Viewing the Node Subsystems Physical Memory Tab
Viewing the Node Subsystems Adapter Cards Tab
Viewing the Node Subsystems SFPs Tab
Viewing the Node Subsystems Power Supplies Tab
Viewing the Node Subsystems Batteries Tab
320-200231 Rev A
437
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
To access the Hardware Inventory Node Subsystems tab:
1. Click Hardware Inventory in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Management Tree, select the InServs node, or select a specific system node (for
example, s424).
3. In the Management Window, click the Node Subsystems tab.
Note: In the following topics, each subsystem tab has been accessed from
the InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the Management
Tree. The resulting depicted screen output display data for all connected
systems.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Node Subsystems Controller
Nodes Tab
The Node Subsystems Controller Nodes tab displays information about the system's
controller node pairs.
To access the Node Subsystems Controller Nodes tab, click the Controller Nodes tab
after accessing the Node Subsystem tab.
438
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Node Subsystems Controller Nodes tab displays the following information:
Column
Description
Name
The controller node name.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of the controller node.
Model/Part Number
The model and/or part number of the controller node.
Serial Number
The controller node serial number.
Position
The position (0 or 1) of the controller node in the node chassis.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Node Subsystems Tab
320-200231 Rev A
439
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Node Subsystems CPUs Tab
The Node Subsystems CPUs tab displays information about the system's controller node
CPUs.
To access the Node Subsystems CPUs tab, click the CPUs tab after accessing the Node
Subsystem tab.
Note: In the screen output above, the CPUs tab has been accessed from the
InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the Management Tree. If
the CPUs tab was accessed from the Management Tree via a specific server
node (for example, s424), the resulting information displayed on the CPU tab
does not display the System column.
The Node Subsystems CPUs tab displays the following information:
Column
Description
System
The system on which the CPU resides.
Name
The CPU name.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of the CPU.
Model/Part
Number
The model and/or part number of the CPU.
Serial Number
The CPU's serial number.
Family
The family, as noted by the manufacturer, to which the CPU
belongs.
Stepping
The number of design changes, as noted by the manufacturer, to
which the CPU has advanced from its original design.
440
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Speed
The speed (in MHz) of the CPU.
Node Position
The position (0 or 1) of the controller node in the node chassis.
Position
The position of the CPU (0, 1, 2, or 3) in the controller node.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Node Subsystems Tab
Viewing the Node Subsystems Internal
Drives Tab
The Node Subsystems Internal Dives tab displays information about the system's
controller node internal disk drives.
To access the Node Subsystems Internal Drives tab, click the Internal Drives tab
after accessing the Node Subsystem tab.
Note: In the screen output above, the Internal Drives tab has been
accessed from the InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the
Management Tree. If the Internal Drives tab was accessed from the
Management Tree via a specific server node (for example, s424), the
resulting information displayed on the Internal Drives tab does not display
the System column.
The Node Subsystems Internal Drives tab displays the following information:
320-200231 Rev A
441
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Column
Description
System
The system on which the drive resides.
Name
The drive name.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of the drive.
Model/Part Number
The model and/or part number of the drive.
Serial Number
The drive's serial number.
Type
The type of drive, either SATA or ATA.
Firmware Version
The drive firmware version.
Size
The size (in GiB) of the drive.
Node Position
The position (0 or 1) of the controller node in the node chassis.
Position
The position of the drive in the controller node.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Node Subsystems Tab
442
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Node Subsystems Physical
Memory Tab
The Node Subsystems Physical Memory tab displays information about the system's
physical memory.
To access the Node Subsystems Physical Memory tab, click the Physical Memory tab
after accessing the Node Subsystem tab.
Note: In the screen output above, the Physical Memory tab has been
accessed from the InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the
Management Tree. If the Physical Memory tab was accessed from the
Management Tree via a specific server node (for example, s424), the
resulting information displayed on the Physical Memory tab does not display
the System column.
The Node Subsystems Physical Memory tab displays the following information:
Column
Description
System
The system on which the DIMM resides.
Name
The DIMM name.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of the DIMM.
Model/Part Number
The model and/or part number of the DIMM.
320-200231 Rev A
443
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Serial Number
The DIMM's serial number.
Riser
The riser card type on which the DIMM is connected.
Slot ID
The slot in which the DIMM is connected.
Usage
The DIMM's usage, either Data cache or Control cache.
Type
The type of DIMM, either FB-DIM or DDR SDRAM.
Size
The size of the DIMM (in GiB).
Revision
The revision level of the DIMM.
Node Position
The position (0 or 1) of the controller node in the node chassis.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Node Subsystems Tab
Viewing the Node Subsystems Adapter
Cards Tab
The Node Subsystems Physical Memory tab displays information about the system's
physical memory.
To access the Node Subsystems Physical Memory tab, click the Physical Memory tab
after accessing the Node Subsystem tab.
444
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: In the screen output above, the Adpater Cards tab has been accessed
from the InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the
Management Tree. If the Adapter Cards tab was accessed from the
Management Tree via a specific server node (for example, s424), the
resulting information displayed on the Adapter Cards tab does not display
the System column.
The Node Subsystems Adapter Cards tab displays the following information:
Column
Description
System
The system on which the adapter resides.
Name
The adapters name, shown in node:slot format.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of the adapter.
Model/Part
Number
The model and/or part number of the adapter.
Serial Number
The adapter's serial number.
Type
The type of adapter, either FC (Fibre Channel), Ethernet, or
iSCSI.
Revision
The revision level of the adapter.
Firmware Revision
The firmware revision on the adapter.
Max Rate
The SFP's maximum speed, in Gbps.
320-200231 Rev A
445
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Node Subsystems Tab
Viewing the Node Subsystems SFPs Tab
The Node Subsystems SFPs tab displays information about the system's physical
memory.
To access the Node Subsystems SFPs tab, click the SFPs tab after accessing the Node
Subsystem tab.
Note: In the screen output above, the SFPs tab has been accessed from the
InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the Management Tree. If
the SFPs tab was accessed from the Management Tree via a specific server
node (for example, s424), the resulting information displayed on the SFPs
tab does not display the System column.
The Node Subsystems SFPs tab displays the following information:
Column
Description
System
The system on which the SFP resides.
446
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Name
The SFP's name, shown in node:slot:port format.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of the SFP.
Model/Part Number
The model and/or part number of the SFP.
Serial Number
The SFP's serial number.
Max Rate
The maximum rate (in Gbps) of the SFP.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Node Subsystems Tab
Viewing the Node Subsystems Power
Supplies Tab
The Node Subsystems Power Supplies tab displays information about the system's
physical memory.
To access the Node Subsystems Power Supplies tab, click the Power Supplies tab
after accessing the Node Subsystem tab.
320-200231 Rev A
447
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: In the screen output above, the Power Supplies tab has been
accessed from the InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the
Management Tree. If the Power Supplies tab was accessed from the
Management Tree via a specific server node (for example, s424), the
resulting information displayed on the Power Supplies tab does not display
the System column.
The Node Subsystems Power Supplies tab displays the following information:
Column
Description
System
The system on which the power supply resides.
Name
The power supply's name.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of the power supply.
Model/Part Number
The model and/or part number of the power supply.
Serial Number
The power supply's serial number.
Node Position
The position (0 or 1) of the node in the node chassis.
Position
The position (0 or 1) of the power supply in the node chassis.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Node Subsystems Tab
448
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Node Subsystems Batteries
Tab
The Node Subsystems Batteries tab displays information about the system's physical
memory.
To access the Node Subsystems Batteries tab, click the Batteries tab after accessing
the Node Subsystem tab.
Note: In the screen output above, the Batteries tab has been accessed from
the InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the Management
Tree. If the Batteries tab was accessed from the Management Tree via a
specific server node (for example, s424), the resulting information displayed
on the Batteries tab does not display the System column.
The Node Subsystems Batteries tab displays the following information:
Column
Description
System
The system on which the battery resides.
Name
The battery's name.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of the battery.
Model/Part Number
The model and/or part number of the battery.
Serial Number
The battery's serial number.
Expiration Time
The battery's expiration date.
Node Position
The position (0 or 1) of the node in the node chassis.
320-200231 Rev A
449
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Power Supply
Position
The position (0 or 1) of the power supply in the node
chassis.
Position
The position of the battery in the system.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Node Subsystems Tab
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Tab
The Hardware Inventory Cage Subsystems tab provides information about system drive
cage components. The information is included on six additional tabs, which are discussed in
the following topics:
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Dive Cages Tab
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Interface Cards Tab
Viewing the Cage Subsystems SFPs Tab
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Magazines Tab
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Physical Disks Tab
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Power Supplies Tab
To access the Hardware Inventory Cage Subsystems tab:
1. Click Hardware Inventory in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Management Tree, select the InServs node, or select a specific system node (for
example, s424).
3. In the Management Window, click the Cage Subsystems tab.
Note: In the following topics, each subsystem tab has been accessed from
the InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the Management
Tree. The resulting depicted screen output display data for all connected
systems.
450
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Drive
Cages Tab
The Cage Subsystems Drive Cages tab displays information about the system's drive
cages.
To access the Cage Subsystems Drive Cages tab, click the Drive Cages tab after
accessing the Cage Subsystem tab.
Note: In the screen output above, the Drive Cages tab has been accessed
from the InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the
Management Tree. If the Drive Cages tab was accessed from the
Management Tree via a specific server node (for example, s424), the
resulting information displayed on the Drive Cages tab does not display the
System column.
The Cage Subsystems Drive Cages tab displays the following information:
Column
Description
System
The InServ Storage Server name.
Name
The drive cage name.
320-200231 Rev A
451
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Manufacturer
Model/Part Number
The manufacturer of the drive cage.
The model and/or part number of the drive cage.
Serial Number
The drive cage serial number.
Firmware Version
The drive cage firmware version.
Cage Type
The type of drive cage (DC2, DC3, or DC4)
Cage Position
The position (0 or 1) of the drive cage in the drive chassis.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Tab
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Interface
Cards Tab
The Cage Subsystems Interface Cards tab displays information about the system's
interface cards.
To access the Cage Subsystems Interface Cards tab, click the Interface Cards tab
after accessing the Cage Subsystem tab.
452
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: In the screen output above, the Interface Cards tab has been
accessed from the InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the
Management Tree. If the Interface Cards tab was accessed from the
Management Tree via a specific server node (for example, s424), the
resulting information displayed on the Interface Cards tab does not display
the System column.
The Cage Subsystems Interface Cards tab displays the following information:
Column
Description
System
The InServ Storage Server name.
Cage
The drive cage in which the interface card resides.
Name
The interface card name.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of the interface card.
Model/Part Number
The model and/or part number of the interface card.
Serial Number
The interface card serial number.
Firmware Version
The interface card firmware version.
Cage Type
The type of drive cage (DC2, DC3, or DC4)
Cage Position
The position (0 or 1) of the drive cage in the drive chassis.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Tab
320-200231 Rev A
453
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Cage Subsystems SFPs Tab
The Cage Subsystems SFPs tab displays information about the system's SFPs.
To access the Cage Subsystems SFPs tab, click the SFPs tab after accessing the Cage
Subsystem tab.
Note: In the screen output above, the SFPs tab has been accessed from the
InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the Management Tree. If
the SFPs tab was accessed from the Management Tree via a specific server
node (for example, s424), the resulting information displayed on the SFPs
tab does not display the System column.
The Cage Subsystems SFPs tab displays the following information:
Column
Description
System
The InServ Storage Server name.
Cage Name
The drive cage in which the SFP resides.
Name
The SFP name in node:slot format.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of the SFP.
Model/Part Number
The model and/or part number of the SFP.
Serial Number
The SFP serial number.
Max Rate
The SFP's maximum speed, in Gbps.
454
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Port Name
The name of the port on which the SFP resides.
Cage Position
The position (0 or 1) of the drive cage in the drive chassis.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Tab
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Magazines
Tab
The Cage Subsystems Magazines tab displays information about the system's drive
magazines.
To access the Cage Subsystems Magazines tab, click the Magazines tab after
accessing the Cage Subsystem tab.
320-200231 Rev A
455
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: In the screen output above, the Magazines tab has been accessed
from the InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the
Management Tree. If the Magazines tab was accessed from the Management
Tree via a specific server node (for example, s424), the resulting information
displayed on the Magazines tab does not display the System column.
The Cage Subsystems Magazines tab displays the following information:
Column
Description
System
The InServ Storage Server name.
Name
The drive magazine name, in node:slot format.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of the drive magazine.
Model/Part
Number
The model and/or part number of the drive magazine.
456
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Serial Number
The serial number of the drive magazine.
Cage Type
The drive cage type (DC2, DC3, or DC4) in which the drive
magazine resides.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Tab
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Physical
Disks Tab
The Cage Subsystems Physical Disks tab displays information about the system's
physical disk drives.
To access the Cage Subsystems Physical Disks tab, click the Physical Disks tab after
accessing the Cage Subsystem tab.
320-200231 Rev A
457
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Note: In the screen output above, the Physical Disks tab has been accessed
from the InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the
Management Tree. If the Physical Disks tab was accessed from the
Management Tree via a specific server node (for example, s424), the
resulting information displayed on the Physical Disks tab does not display
the System column.
The Cage Subsystems Physical Disks tab displays the following information:
Column
Description
System
The InServ Storage Server name.
Name
The disk name in node:slot:port format.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of the disk.
Model/Part Number
The model and/or part number of the disk.
Serial Number
The disk's serial number.
Firmware Version
The disk's firmware version.
Device Type
The type of physical disk; Fibre Channel (FC), Solid State
(SSD), or Nearline (NL).
Device Speed
The speed of the disk, in K.
Note: The Device Speed number does not represent a rotational speed for the drives
without spinning media (SSD). It is meant as a rough estimation of the performance
difference between the drive and the other drives in the system. For FC and NL drives, the
number corresponds to both a performance measure and actual rotational speed. For an
SSD drive, the number is to be treated as relative performance benchmark that takes into
account in I/O per second, bandwidth, and the access time.
Total Capacity
The total capacity of the disk, in GiB.
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Tab
458
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Power
Supplies Tab
The Cage Subsystems Power Supplies tab displays information about the system's
physical disk drives.
To access the Cage Subsystems Power Supplies tab, click the Power Supplies tab
after accessing the Cage Subsystem tab.
Note: In the screen output above, the Power Supplies tab has been
accessed from the InServs node (all connected storage server) level on the
Management Tree. If the Power Supplies tab was accessed from the
Management Tree via a specific server node (for example, s424), the
resulting information displayed on the Power Supplies tab does not display
the System column.
The Cage Subsystems Power Supplies tab displays the following information:
Column
Description
System
The InServ Storage Server name.
Cage Name
The drive cage name.
Name
The power supply name.
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of the power supply.
Model/Part Number
The model and/or part number of the power supply.
320-200231 Rev A
459
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Serial Number
The power supply's serial number.
Cage Type
The type of drive cage (DC2, DC3, or DC4).
Cage Position
The position of the drive cage in the drive chassis (0 or 1).
Position
The position of the power supply (0, 1, 2, or 3).
See also:
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
Viewing the Cage Subsystems Tab
Viewing the All Tab
The Hardware Inventory All tab provides an overview of all hardware components used in
all connected InServ Storage Servers.
To access the Hardware Inventory All tab:
1. Click Hardware Inventory in the Manager Pane.
2. In the Management Tree, select the InServs node.
3. In the Management Window, click the All tab.
460
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
The Hardware Inventory All tab provides the following information:
Column
Description
System Name
The system name.
Name
The name of the hardware component.
Manufacturer
The manufacture of the hardware component.
Model/Part Number
The model and/or part number of the hardware component.
Serial Number
The serial number of the hardware component.
Type
The type of hardware component.
See also:
320-200231 Rev A
461
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Manager Pane
Management Tree
Management Window
462
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Glossary
3
3PAR Domains: A 3PAR feature that is used to create distinct domains with domainspecific users and objects in an InServ Storage Server.
3PAR Remote Copy: A 3PAR product that allows you to copy virtual volumes from one
InServ Storage Server to another. The copy can be used for disaster recovery,
backup, or data migration.
3PAR Thin Provisioning: A 3PAR product that allows the user to allocate only the physical
resources that are actually needed while presenting an arbitrarily large volume that
can have its physical resources allocated on demand.
A
active VLUN: The connection of a virtual volume and a LUN for a particular host on a
particular port. An active VLUN is created when a VLUN template is applied to the
current system state. See also VLUN template.
admin space: See snapshot administration space.
admin volume: The base volume that is used by the system to store administration data
such as the system event log. The admin volume is created as part of the storage
server installation and setup process.
administration space: See snapshot administration space.
alert: A system event requiring immediate operator activity.
alert pane: The alert pane, located at the bottom of the InForm Management Console main
window, displays information about system alerts.
allocation limit: User-defined threshold that can be set for thinly provisioned virtual
volumes (TPVVs) to cap their potential size. See also allocation warning.
allocation warning: User-defined threshold that can be set for thinly provisioned virtual
volumes (TPVVs) to alert users when they reach a certain size. See also allocation
limit.
availability: Level of fault tolerance for a logical disk. For example, Magazine level
availability means that the logical disk can tolerate a drive magazine failure. Cage
availability level means that the logical disk can tolerate a drive cage failure.
B
backup server: In a Remote Copy setup, the storage server on which the copied volume
groups reside.
base volume: Virtual volume type that forms the root of all virtual and physical snapshot
functionality. Base volumes are the only type of volume that have snapshot data
space and snapshot administration space used by snapshots to track changes to the
base volume. See also thinly provisioned virtual volumes (TPVVs).
320-200231 Rev A
463
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
C
cache memory page (CMP): A 16-KIB block of control cache memory where I/O requests
are stored.
Cage availability: Creates a virtual volume that can tolerate a drive cage failure because
its RAID sets use chunklets from different drive cages.
child volume: A virtual volume (virtual or physical copy) made from a parent volume.
chunklet: A 256MB block of contiguous space on a physical disk.
clean chunklet: A chunklet to which no data has been written.
cluster: A group of controller nodes connected via the same storage server backplane. The
nodes in a cluster operate as a unified system, separate from any other clusters that
may share the same service processor.
CMP: See cache memory page.
common provisioning group (CPG): A set of logical disks from which you can create
virtual volumes and virtual copies that are capable of allocating storage on demand.
control cache: Memory modules that support the microprocessors located in a controller
node.
controller node: An individual device that works together with other controller nodes to
cache and manage data in a storage server and to provide hosts with a coherent,
virtualized view of the storage.
copy data: Data that occupies the snapshot data space on a virtual volume. See also
snapshot data space.
Copy of RCIP: Remote Copy over IP. The use of 3PAR Remote Copy with two storage
servers that are connected via Ethernet ports. See also 3PAR Remote Copy.
copy size: The size of the snapshot data space in a virtual volume, which is the amount of
logical disk space reserved for snapshots. See also snapshot data space.
CPG template: Common provisioning group template. The template contains a set of
common provisioning group and logical disk parameters that can be applied again
and again to create common provisioning groups with the same characteristics using
the InForm Management Console.
D
data cache: The dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs) that support the 3PAR ASIC located
in a controller node.
data space: See snapshot data space.
DC2 drive cage: A storage server component consisting of a drive cage midplane, two
drive cage FCAL modules, four power supplies, and up to 40 physical disks in a
maximum of ten drive magazines.
DC3 drive cage: A storage server component consisting of a drive cage, two drive cage
FCAL modules, two power supplies, and up to 16 physical disks.
DC4 drive cage: A storage server component consisting of a drive cage midplane, two
drive cage FCAL modules, four power supplies, and up to 40 physical disks in a
maximum of ten drive magazines.
464
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
destination volume: The virtual volume to which data is copied during a physical copy
operation.
drive cage: See DC2, DC3, and DC4 drive cage.
drive cage FCAL: An interface module, located in a drive chassis, connecting a drive cage
to a controller node or to another drive cage.
E
enclosure services interface: Interface on the DC2 and DC4 drive cages through which
the node software communicates to the cage enclosure services controller to obtain
status and control the cage behaviors.
ESI: See enclosure services interface.
event: Logs created by the system which allow you to view the day-to-day health of your
system.
export: To make a virtual volume available to a particular instance of a host (that is, a host
WWN that is actually present on a port) by creating an association between the
name of the virtual volume and a LUN for that host on that port. See also LUN,
VLUN, and VLUN template.
F
FCAL: Fibre Channel-Arbitrated Loop. FCAL is a fast serial bus interface standard used to
connect storage devices to servers.
Fibre Channel adapter: A Fibre Channel PCI host bus adapter (HBA) located in a controller
node. The Fibre Channel adapter connects a controller node to a host or to a drive
chassis.
filtering: In the InForm Management Console, filtering a table temporarily removes table
entries that do not meet the specified criteria.
G
grow: To expand a base volume manually by increasing the user space, snapshot
administration space, or snapshot data space.
growth increment: The unit of storage by which additional logical disks are created and
allocated to a common provisioning group (CPG). The growth increment is used to
automatically create and allocate space on demand as additional resources are
required by the volumes that draw from the logical disk pool. The default growth
increment is fixed at 32 GB, but the minimum growth increment varies according to
the number of controller nodes in the system (from 8 GB for a two-node system to
32 GB for a four-node system).
growth limit: User-defined threshold that can be set for common provisioning groups
(CPGs) to cap their potential size. See also growth warning.
growth warning: User-defined threshold that can be set for common provisioning groups
(CPGs) to alert users when they reach a certain size. See also growth limit.
320-200231 Rev A
465
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
H
host: A set of WWNs of the physical ports on a server.
host port: See target port.
I
initiator, initiator port: A port that is connected to a drive cage. Also known as a disk port
because it sends commands to the physical disks.
Internet Storage Name Service: See iSNS
iSCSI adaptor: An iSCSI PCI host bus adapter (HBA) located in a controller node. The
iSCSI adapter connects a controller node to a host.
iSCSI name: A value used to identify iSCSI channel devices on an arbitrated loop.
iSNS: Internet Storage Name Service. Protocol that allows automated discovery,
management, and configuration of iSCSI.
L
LD template: Logical disk template. The template contains a set of logical disk parameters
that can be applied again and again to create logical disks or volumes with the same
characteristics using the InForm Management Console.
logical unit number: See LUN.
LUN: Stands for logical unit number. A number used to access a virtual volume that has
been assigned to a particular host on a particular port. See also export, VLUN, and
VLUN template.
M
Magazine availability: Creates a virtual volume that can tolerate a drive magazine failure
because its RAID sets use chunklets from different drive magazines.
matched-set VLUN template: A rule that allows a particular host connected to a
particular port to see a virtual volume as a specified LUN. See also VLUN template.
Maximum Transmission Unit: See MTU.
mirror: One member of a group of mirrored chunklets, which is also known as a RAID 1
set.
mirror depth: See set size.
mirroring: A data redundancy technique used by some RAID levels and in particular RAID 1
to provide data protection on a storage array.
MTU: Maximum Transmission Unit. The greatest amount of data or "packet" size that can
be transferred in one physical frame on a network.
466
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
N
No One Host policy: Use when exporting a VV to multiple hosts for use by a cluster-aware
application, or if using port presents VLUNs.
No Stale Snapshot: System can halt writing data to the base volume so as to prevent loss
of sync between the base volume and its snapshots.
no stale snapshots: Virtual copy policy that prevents changes being written to a base
volume when it does not have enough snapshot data or administration space to
prevent virtual copies from becoming invalid, or stale, as a result. See also stale
snapshots, virtual copy policy.
O
One Host policy: Constrains the export of a volume to one host or one host cluster (when
cluster names may be used as a host name.) This protects the volume from
accidental export to multiple hosts which could lead to data corruption if both hosts
are writing to the volume.
original parent base volume: The original base volume from which a series of virtual
and/or physical copies has been created. Any volume can be the parent from which
one or more virtual copies is created, but for each set of related copies there is only
one original parent base volume.
P
parent volume: A virtual volume from which a virtual or physical copy is made. See also
original parent base volume.
parity: A data redundancy technique used by some RAID levels and in particular RAID 5 to
provide data protection on a storage array.
parity set: See RAID 5 set.
parity set position: The group of chunklets that occupy the same position within a RAID 5
logical disk parity set.
physical copy: A physical copy is a snapshot that duplicates all the data from one base
volume to another base volume (the destination volume) for use, should the original
become unavailable.
physical copy, promoting: Promoting a virtual copy copies the changes from a virtual
copy back onto the base volume.
physical parent: The source volume for a physical copy.
Port availability: Creates a virtual volume that can tolerate two port failures because its
RAID sets use chunklets from devices on different cage loops.
port-presents VLUN template: A VLUN template that allows any host connected to a
particular port to see a virtual volume as a specified LUN. See also VLUN template.
primary server: In a Remote Copy setup, the storage server on which the primary volume
groups originate.
primary volume group: In Remote Copy, the set of volumes on the storage server to be
copied.
320-200231 Rev A
467
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
promote: For physical copies: to break the association between a physical copy and a base
volume by changing the physical copy into an independent base volume. For virtual
copies: to copy the changes from a virtual copy back onto the base volume,
therefore overwriting the base volume with the virtual copy.
R
RAID 0 set: Striped rows of chunklets on two or more physical disks. A RAID 0 set offers
no data redundancy.
RAID 10 (RAID 1) set: A group of mirrored chunklets.
RAID 50 (RAID 5) set: A group of parity-protected chunklets. Also known as a parity set.
RAID set: A grouping of mirrored or parity-protected chunklets.
RCFC: Remote Copy over Fibre Channel. The use of 3PAR Remote Copy with two storage
servers that are connected via Fibre Channel ports. See also 3PAR Remote Copy.
RCIP: Remote Copy over IP. The use of 3PAR Remote Copy with two storage servers that
are connected via Ethernet ports. See also 3PAR Remote Copy.
registered state change notification (RSCN): A Fibre Channel switch function that
allows notification to registered nodes if a change occurs to other specified nodes.
Remote Copy links: The method by which information is sent and received between
Remote Copy targets.
Remote Copy pair: The pair of storage servers on which Remote Copy operations are
performed.
Remote Copy target: The description of a Remote Copy system on one server in the
Remote Copy pair. Each server in a Remote Copy pair must have a target definition
for the other server.
Remote Copy volume group: A group of virtual volumes that are logically related and for
which there is a cross-volume ordering or writes.
resynch, resynchronize: To copy changes from one volume in a physical copy pair to the
other because that volume was modified at some point after the physical copy
operation took place. See also physical copy.
row: A grouping of RAID sets. Data is striped across the rows of RAID 10 and RAID 50
logical disks.
row size: The number of sets in a row. A row is a grouping of RAID sets. Data is striped
across the rows of RAID 10 and RAID 50 logical disks.
RSCN: See registered state change notification.
S
SCSI reservation/registration: Allows multiple hosts to share a SCSI interface to access
exported volumes. Multiple hosts can have registrations to a single volume, but only
one host can have the reservation.
secondary volume group: In Remote Copy, the set of copied volumes on the storage
server.
set: See set size.
468
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
set size: The number of chunklets in a set. Also known as mirror depth for RAID 1 sets and
parity set for RAID 5 sets.
SFP: High-speed data transceiver, small in size and hot pluggable, allowing for an individual
SFP connector to be replaced without replacing the entire module.
small form-factor pluggable optical transceiver: See SFP.
snapshot: A virtual or physical copy of a virtual volume.
snapshot administration space: The space on a virtual volume that is used to track
changes to the data since a snapshot of a virtual volume was created.
snapshot data: Data written to the base volume's snapshot data space to record changes
to the base volume after the first virtual copy of that volume was created.
snapshot data space: The space on a virtual volume that holds the data that has been
changed since the first virtual copy was created.
solid state drive: A data storage device that uses solid-state memory to store persistent
data.
source server: See primary server.
source volume: The virtual volume from which a copy is made.
spare, spare chunklet: A chunklet that is reserved for use in case of a failure in the
system. A certain number of chunklets are reserved for use as spares during the
system setup and installation process. However, the system may temporarily set
aside additional spares even though these chunklets are not permanently designated
for use as spares.
SSD: See solid state drive.
stale snapshot: A snapshot that does not track the most recent changes to its base
volume. The No Stale Snapshots virtual copy policy halts writing data to the base
volume so as to prevent loss of sync between the volume and any snapshots. See
also virtual copy policy and no stale snapshots.
step size: The number of contiguous bytes that the system accesses before moving to the
next chunklet.
system manager: Software component that negotiates between the storage server and
the user interfaces such as the InForm Management Console and InForm CLI.
T
target mode: The firmware setting for a port that is connected to a host.
target, target port: The port that is connected to and receives commands from a host
computer. Also known as a host port.
template: See VLUN template.
thin provisioning: See 3PAR Thin Provisioning.
thinly provisioned virtual volume (TPVV): A virtual volume that maps to logical disk
space associated with a common provisioning group (CPG) and is therefore capable
of growing on demand.
TPVV: See thinly provisioned virtual volume.
320-200231 Rev A
469
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
U
unspecified property: When using the InForm Management Console, a property that has
been included in a template but does not have a defined value. When applying the
template, the system will either use the default value (when applicable) or calculate
the optimized setting for you.
user data: For standard base volumes, the data that is written to the user space.
user size: The amount of user space in a virtual volume, or the size of the volume as
presented to the host.
user space: The space on a virtual volume that represents the size of the virtual volume as
presented to the host. For standard base volumes, the user space holds all user
data. For thinly provisioned virtual volumes, no storage is actually allocated to user
space, so the user space represents the volume's virtual size. See also virtual size.
V
virtual copy: A snapshot, or copy-in-time, of another volume (a base volume or another
virtual copy) created using copy-on-write techniques.
virtual copy consistency group: A group of snapshots created from multiple virtual
volumes at the same time in order to ensure consistency.
virtual size: The size that the volume presents to the host. For standard base volumes, the
virtual size is equal to the user space. For thinly provisioned virtual volumes, no
storage is actually allocated to user space, so the virtual size is determined by
whatever value is assigned to the user space. See also user space.
virtual volume: A virtual storage unit created by mapping data from one or more logical
disks. See also logical disk, mapping.
VLUN: A pairing between a virtual volume and a Logical Unit Number (LUN), expressed as
either a VLUN template or an active VLUN.
VLUN template: Sets up an association between a virtual volume and a LUN-host, LUNport, or LUN-host-port combination by establishing the export rule, or the manner in
which the volume is exported.
VV template: Virtual volume template. The template contains a set of virtual volume
parameters that can be applied again and again to create volumes with the same
characteristics using the InForm Management Console.
W
World-Wide Name (WWN): A unique 64-bit value used to identify Fibre channel devices
on an arbitrated loop. The WWN consists of a prefix issued by the IEEE to uniquely
identify the company and a suffix that is issued by the company.
WWN: See World-Wide Name.
Z
zone: A unit of physical disk space reserved by a controller node for snapshot or snapshot
administration data. A single zone may occupy space on more than one disk.
470
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Index
Viewing......................................... 83
A
About Introduction Tabs......................38
Controller Nodes Power Supplies Details 89
Alert Severity Indicators .....................53
Viewing......................................... 89
Alert/Task/Connection Pane.................37
Copying .......................................... 323
C
Template ..................................... 323
Cancelling Tasks .............................. 408
Capacity Information ........................ 422
Creating .... 246, 301, 323, 325, 327, 328,
330, 332, 376, 382, 414, 425
Batch Virtual Copy ......................... 328
Clearing Port Parameters .................. 164
Common Provisioning Groups .......... 246
Common Actions Panel .......................27
Consistency Group Physical Copy ..... 332
Common Provisioning Group ...... 230, 246,
249, 250
Consistency Group Virtual Copy ....... 327
Compacting .................................. 250
Domains ...................................... 425
Creating ...................................... 246
Physical Copy ............................... 330
Saving ......................................... 249
Remote Copy Groups ..................... 376
Viewing ....................................... 230
Remote Copy Links ........................ 382
Compacting a Common Provisioning Group
.................................................. 250
Similar Templates.......................... 323
Users ........................................... 414
Components ......................................21
Virtual Copy ................................. 325
Interface ........................................21
Configuring Remote Copy .................. 361
Connections .................................... 433
Consistency Group Physical Copy ....... 332
Creating ...................................... 332
Consistency Group Virtual Copy ......... 327
Creating ...................................... 327
Controller Node Batteries .............. 94, 95
Editing ...........................................94
Recharging .....................................95
Controller Node Battery Test Log .... 94, 95
Resetting .......................................95
Viewing .........................................94
Controller Node Power Supplies............93
Editing ...........................................93
Controller Nodes ................................83
320-200231 Rev A
VLUNs ......................................... 301
Creating Batch Virtual Copy ............... 328
D
Disabling ........................................ 167
Remote Copy Interface .................. 167
Domain Sets ................................... 428
Domains ..................................417, 425
Creating ....................................... 425
Drive Cage Details............................ 106
Drive Cage Details Summary Tab ....... 106
Drive Cage Physical Disks Details ....... 114
Drive Cage Power Supply Details ........ 115
Viewing........................................ 115
Drive Cages .............................116, 117
Editing ......................................... 116
Locating ....................................... 117
471
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
E
I
Editing ... 93, 94, 116, 117, 308, 386, 415
InForm Management Console .............. 40
Controller Node Batteries .................94
Refreshing ..................................... 40
Controller Node Power Supplies .........93
Interface.......................................... 21
Drive Cage Power Supplies ............. 117
Components .................................. 21
Drive Cages.................................. 116
L
Physical Copy ............................... 331
Locating ................................... 80, 117
Remote Copy Targets .................... 386
Drive Cages .................................. 117
TPVV Template ............................. 308
System ......................................... 80
Users .......................................... 415
M
Editing Drive Cage Power Supplies...... 117
Manager Pane................................... 28
Editing ......................................... 117
Multiple Items .................................. 39
Enabling ......................................... 167
Selecting ....................................... 39
Remote Copy Interface .................. 167
N
Events Manager ............................... 398
Name Server ................................... 166
Exporting .................. 215, 220, 284, 294
Node Subsystems Controller Nodes Tab
.................................................. 438
Virtual Volume Sets ....................... 294
Virtual Volumes ..............215, 220, 284
F
Failover Remote Copy Groups ............ 387
G
Global Preferences .............................43
Setting ..........................................43
H
Help Menu Bar ...................................57
Using ............................................57
Help Navigator ..................................58
Using ............................................58
Help Toolbar .....................................57
Using ............................................57
Host Sets ................................. 217, 219
Removing .................................... 219
Hosts ............................................. 214
Removing .................................... 214
Hosts Manager ................................ 184
472
Viewing........................................ 438
Node Subsystems Internal Drives Tab . 441
Viewing........................................ 441
Node Subsystems SFPs Tab ............... 446
Viewing........................................ 446
P
Per Table Preferences ........................ 45
Setting ......................................... 45
Performance .................................... 392
Viewing........................................ 392
Performance Manager ....................... 392
Physical Copy ................... 330, 332, 333
Creating ....................................... 330
Removing ..................................... 332
Stopping ...................................... 333
Viewing........................................ 330
Physical Disk Summary Tab ............... 169
Viewing........................................ 169
Physical Disks .................................. 168
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Viewing ....................................... 168
Enabling....................................... 167
Physical Disks Spares Tab ................. 181
Remote Copy Links..... 375, 381, 382, 383
Viewing ....................................... 181
Creating ....................................... 382
Pinging .............................168, 375, 383
Pinging .................................375, 383
Port............................................. 168
Remote Copy Targets ................384, 386
Remote Copy Links ................. 375, 383
Editing ......................................... 386
Port ........................................ 164, 168
Remote Copy Virtual Volumes ............ 359
Pinging ........................................ 168
Viewing........................................ 359
Resetting ..................................... 164
Removing .. 214, 219, 302, 324, 332, 381,
434
Port Offline ..................................... 165
Host Sets ..................................... 219
Setting ........................................ 165
Hosts ........................................... 214
Port Parameters ............................... 164
Physical Copy ............................... 332
Clearing ....................................... 164
Remote Copy Groups ..................... 381
Preferences .......................................43
Template ..................................... 324
Setting ..........................................43
User Connections .......................... 434
Promoting ....................................... 329
Virtual Copy ................................. 329
Provisioning_Manager .........................28
VLUNs ......................................... 302
Resetting .................................. 95, 164
Controller Node Battery Test Log ...... 95
R
Port ............................................. 164
Recharging .......................................95
Controller Node Batteries .................95
Refreshing ........................................40
InForm Management Console ............40
Remote Copy .................................. 361
Configuring .................................. 361
Remote Copy Disaster Recovery ......... 387
Remote Copy Groups .. 358, 376, 378, 381
Creating ...................................... 376
Removing .................................... 381
Starting ....................................... 378
Stopping ...................................... 378
Viewing ....................................... 358
Remote Copy Information ................. 345
Viewing ....................................... 345
Remote Copy Interface ..................... 167
Disabling...................................... 167
320-200231 Rev A
Restore Remote Copy Groups ............ 391
Restoring_the_Introduction_Tab ......... 38
S
Saving ............................. 249, 283, 396
Chart ........................................... 396
Common Provisioning Group ........... 249
Virtual Volume .............................. 283
Saving a Chart................................. 396
Security Manager ............................. 409
Selecting ......................................... 39
Multiple Items ................................ 39
Setting ................................ 43, 45, 165
Global Preferences .......................... 43
Per Table Preferences ..................... 45
Port Offline ................................... 165
Preferences ................................... 43
473
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Setting_the_WWN_Format ..................43
U
SFP ......................................... 130, 139
User Connections ............................. 434
SFP Information ............................... 153
Removing ..................................... 434
Viewing ....................................... 153
Users ......................................414, 415
Similar Templates ............................ 323
Creating ....................................... 414
Creating ...................................... 323
Editing ......................................... 415
Starting .......................................... 378
Using ......................................... 57, 58
Remote Copy Groups ..................... 378
Help Menu Bar ............................... 57
Status Bar ........................................37
Help Navigator ............................... 58
Stopping .................................. 333, 378
Help Toolbar .................................. 57
Physical Copy ............................... 333
Using Help ....................................... 56
Remote Copy Groups ..................... 378
V
Synching ........................................ 166
System.............................................80
Locating.........................................80
System Information ...........................64
Viewing .........................................64
System RCFC Ports .......................... 139
Viewing ....................................... 139
System RCIP Ports ........................... 150
Viewing ....................................... 150
Systems Manager ..............................64
T
Viewing 64, 83, 89, 94, 97, 106, 114, 115,
139, 150, 153, 168, 169, 181, 230,
251, 252, 254, 296, 330, 345, 358,
359, 392, 398, 405, 428, 438, 441,
446, 454
Alerts Summary ............................ 398
Cage Subsystems SFPs Tab ............ 454
Common Provisioning Groups .......... 230
Controller Node Battery Test Log ...... 94
Controller Nodes ............................ 83
Controller Nodes Power Supplies Details
................................................. 89
Domain Sets ................................. 428
Table_of_Contents .............................58
Tasks ............................................. 408
Cancelling .................................... 408
Tasks Manager ................................ 405
Tasks Summary ............................... 405
Viewing ....................................... 405
Template .................. 249, 283, 323, 324
Copying ....................................... 323
Removing .................................... 324
Top ................................... 64, 325, 359
TPVV Template ................................ 308
Editing ......................................... 308
Tuned Virtual Volume ....................... 289
474
Drive Cage Details ......................... 106
Drive Cage Details Summary Tab..... 106
Drive Cage Physical Disks Details ..... 114
Drive Cage Power Supply Details ..... 115
Drive Cage Summary ...................... 97
Node Subsystems Controller Nodes Tab
................................................ 438
Node Subsystems Internal Drives Tab
................................................ 441
Node Subsystems SFPs Tab ............ 446
Performance ................................. 392
Physical Copies ............................. 330
Physical Disk Summary Tab ............ 169
320-200231 Rev A
3PAR InForm Management Console 4.1.0 User’s Guide
Physical Disks ............................... 168
Creating ....................................... 325
Physical Disks Spares Tab .............. 181
Promoting .................................... 329
Remote Copy Groups ..................... 358
Virtual Volume Set ....................290, 294
Remote Copy Information............... 345
Exporting ..................................... 294
Remote Copy Virtual Volumes ......... 359
Virtual Volumes .. 215, 220, 251, 283, 284
SFP Information ............................ 153
Exporting ...................... 215, 220, 284
System Information .........................64
Saving ......................................... 283
System RCFC Ports ........................ 139
Viewing........................................ 251
System RCIP Ports ........................ 150
Virtual Volumes Summary Tab ........... 252
Tasks Summary ............................ 405
Viewing........................................ 252
Virtual Volumes ............................ 251
Virtual Volumes Tab ......................... 254
Virtual Volumes Summary Tab ........ 252
Viewing........................................ 254
Virtual Volumes Tab ...................... 254
VLUNs ...................... 295, 296, 301, 302
VLUNs ......................................... 296
Creating ....................................... 301
Viewing Cage Subsystems SFPs Tab ... 454
Removing ..................................... 302
Viewing the Alerts Summary .............. 398
Viewing........................................ 296
Viewing_Drive_Cage_Capacity .............97
VLUNs_Tab ..................................... 254
Virtual Copy ......................324, 325, 329
320-200231 Rev A
475
Download PDF

advertising